Tektronix 547 Instruction Manual

K4XL's

- f '

RAMA

This manual is provided FREE OF CHARGE from the “BoatAnchor Manual Archive” as a service to the Boatanchor community.

It was uploaded by someone who wanted to help you repair and maintain your equipment.

If you paid anyone other than BAMA for this manual, you paid someone who is making a profit from the free labor of others without asking their permission.

You may pass on copies of this manual to anyone who needs it. But do it without charge.

Thousands of files are available without charge from BAMA. Visit us at http://bama.sbc.edu

Tektronix, Inc.

P .0. Box 500

Beaverton, Oregon 97077 n7n.n10Q.nn

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Serial Num ber

WARRANTY

A ll Tektronix instrum ents are w a rra n te d a g a in st defective m aterials and w o rk m a n ­ ship fo r one year.

A n y questions w ith respect to the w a r ­ ra n ty m entioned above should be taken up w ith your Tektronix Field Engineer.

T ektronix re p a ir and re p la ce m e n t-p a rt service is geared d ire c tly to the fie ld , th e re ­ fore a ll requests fo r repairs and re p la ce ­ m ent parts should be directed to the Tek­ tro n ix Field O ffic e or Representative in your area. This procedure w ill assure you the fastest possible service. Please include the instrum ent Type and Serial num ber w ith a ll requests fo r parts or service.

Specifications and price change p riv ­ ileges reserved.

C o p y rig h t ' 1964 by T ektronix, Inc.,

Beaverton, O re g o n . Printed in the U nited

States o f A m erica. A ll rights reserved.

Contents o f this p u b lic a tio n m ay not be re ­ produced in a n y form w ith o u t permission o f the c o p y rig h t ow ner.

A

* Typ* 5 4 7

Typ« 547

T y p * 5 4 7 O ic ill» K o p *

Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

SECTION 1

CHARACTERISTICS

Introduction

The Type 547 Oscilloscope is a versatile laboraiory instrument designed for use with a ll Tektronix lettered or

1-Series plug-in units. The instrument features two id< nti- cal time-base generators that can be used singly or elect: on- ically alternated for viewing a single signal or multiple signals at two sweep rates.

The two time-base generators can also used in ' de­ laying" and "delayed" sweep operation for highly accuiate time measurements.

Sweep Rates

(at IX mag­ nification)

0.1 jusec/cm to 5sec/cm in 24 calibrated steps. Displayed Sweep-rate accuracy is

± 2 % for both sweeps. An uncalibrated variable sweep-rate control permits either sweep to be slowed to at least 0.4 of the indicated rate.

Sweep Any sweep rate can be increased by ex-

M agnification ponding the center portion of the display horizontally in fixed steps o f 2X, 5X, and

10X. Sweep-rate accuracy is within ± 5 % in the magnified positions.

Trigger Source Internal normal, internal plug in, external,

Selection and line.

Vertical Deflection System

Refer to Table 1-1 for the characteristics.

Sweep Generation

Trigger features and sweep rates of both Type 547 time- base circuits are identical.

Trigger Coupling Dc, ac, and ac low-frequency rejection.

Selection

Trigger Signal Internal (ac): Minimum deflection is 2 mm,

Requirements rising to 1 cm at about 50 me.

TABLE 1-1

Plug-In Characteristics lo r the Type 5 4 7 Oscilloscope

Plug-In

Unit y T y p e 1A1 * *

Type 1A2

^ Type 1A7

Type 1S1

Type B

Type C A **

Type D

Type E

Type G

Type H

Type K

Type L

Type M **

Type O *

Type Q *

Type R*

Type S* y Type W

Type Z*

C a lib ra te d

D e flectio n Factor

50m v/cm to 20v/cm

5 mv/cm

50m v/cm to 20 v/cm

10 mv/cm to lO v /c m

2 mv/cm to 200 mv/cm

0.005 v/cm to 20 v/cm

0.05 v/cm to 20 v/cm

0.05 v/cm to 20 v/cm

1 mv/cm to 50 v/cm

5 0 /uv/cm to 10 mv/cm

0.05 v/cm to 20 v/cm

5 mv/cm to 20 v/cm

0.05 v/cm to 20 v/cm

5 mv/cm to 2 v/cm

0.05 v/cm to 20 v/cm

0.02v/em to lO v /c m

0.05 v/cm to 20 v/cm

10 /ustrain/cm to

10,000 (iistrain/cm

0.5m a/cm to lOOma/cm

0.05 v/cm and 0.5 v/cm

1 mv/cm to

50 v/cm

0.05 v/cm to 25 v/cm

Bandpass at

- 3 d B *** dc to 50 me dc to 28 me dc to 50 me dc to 100 cps

- 5 0 0 kc dc to 1000 me

2 cps to 12 me dc to 20 me dc to 24 me dc to 300 kc-2 me

0.06 cps to 20 kc

- 6 0 kc dc to 20 me dc to 15 me dc to 30 me

3 cps to 24 me dc to 30 me dc to 20 me dc to 25 me dc to 6kc dc to 8 me dc to 23 me dc to 13 me

Fastest

Risetime

7 nsec

13 nsec

7 nsec

.7 /usee

.35 nsec

30 nsec

18 nsec

15 nsec

0.18 /isec

6 /usee

18 nsec

24 nsec

12 nsec

15 nsec

12 nsec

18 nsec

14 nsec

60 /usee

44 nsec

16 nsec

27 nsec

’ Spatial feature plug-ln unit*. See your Tektronix catalog for more information on ony of these plug-in unlit.

* ’ M ultiple-trace plug-in unlit.

’ ’ ’ Not more thon — 3 dS ot Indicated frequencies

A p p ro x Input

C apacitance

15 pf

47 pf

50 0 input Z

47 pf

20 pf

47 pf

50 pf

47 pf

47 p f

20 pf

20 pf

47 pf

47 pf

Adjustable

20 pf

24 pf

1-1

Characteristic!— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

Sweep Delay

Internal (dc): Minimum deflection is 5 rim at dc rising to 2.5 cm ot 50 MHz.

Internal (ac low-frequency rejection): M ini­ mum deflection is 2 mm with signals at about 2 kc, rising to 1 cm at about 50 me.

External: Frequency ranges are the same as internal. Minimum amplitude is 200 mvolts peak-to-peak (ac), 200m v(lts change in dc level (dc) and, 200 mvr Its peak-to-pcak (ac low-frequency reject).

A MAXIMUM INPUT OF ± 30 VOITS must not be exceeded in the EXTERN M trigger position. Minimum trigger le ’el range is greater than ± 2 volts with 'he

TRIGGER LEVEL control pushed in and

± 2 0 volts with the control pulled out

The time-base A sweep can be delayed by the main time base (B) sweep. Delay is continuously variable over the range of

0.1 fisec to 50 sec with the DELAY TIME and DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER contrr Is.

Delay time is accurate to ± 1 % o f indi­ cated delay ± 2 minor divisions of tne

DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER at sweep ra'es from 50 n sec to 50 sec. At delay tin.es shorter than 50 fisec, indicated d e ity accuracy is the same as above p us approximately 75-100 nsec. The 75-1'X) nsec represents the fixed inherent d e ity of the internal trigger circuitry o f the

Type 547. Incremental delay accuracy is

± 4 minor divisions of the DELAY-TIME

MULTIPLIER dial at sweep rates fr< m

1 /isec to 50 sec. Incremental accuracy at the three fastest sweep rates (0.1, 0.2, and

0 .5 /tsec) is ± 1 0 minor divisions. Stated accuracies apply only when the VARIABLE controls are set to CALIB. Delay jitter is no greater than 1 part in 20,000.

Output

Impedance

Amplitude

Accuracy

50 n in .2 to 200mVOLTS positions. Pro­ gressively higher output impedances in the .5 to 50 VOLT positions up to about

4 k in the 50 VOLT position. Output im­ pedance of the 100 VOLT position (ac and dc) is about 420 ft.

Peak-to-peak amplitude accuracy is ± 3 % o f indicated value when working into an im­ pedance of 1 megohm. The .2 to 200 mVolts position w ill be within ± 3 % of one-half of the indicated voltage when working into an impedance o f 50 ohms.

The 5 ma current accuracy is ± 3 % .

Front-Panel Output Signals

+G A TE B

DLY'D TRIG

SWEEP A

+G ATE A

A p p ro x im a te ly 2 0 -v o lt pe ak-to-p ea k square-wave pulse having the same dura­ tion as the B sweep. Minimum dc load resistance is 5 k.

Approxim ately a 10-volt peak-to-peak pulse occurring at the end of the delay period.

Approximately a 90-volt, peak-to-peak sawtooth voltage having the same duration as the A sweep. Minimum load imped­ ance is 10 k.

A p p ro x im a te ly 2 0 -v o lt p e ak-to-p ea k square-wave pulse having the same dura­ tion as the A sweep. Minimum dc load resistance is 5 k.

VERT SIG OUT Vertical signal output connector. Output amplitude is approxim ately 0.3 volt per centimeter of deflection on the crt. Rise­ time is 20 nsec or faster. Output is ac coupled.

External Single- Requires a positive-going step or pulse

Sweep Reset o f at least + 2 0 volts with a risetime of 0.5

Input-Signal /isec or faster.

Requirements

Horizontal Deflection System

The follow ing characteristics apply when the HORIZONT AL

DISPLAY switch is set to the EXT positions.

Deflection

Factor

Continuously variable from approximate ly

0.1 volt/cm to 10 volts/cm.

Frequency

Response

Dc to 400 kc (3-db down).

Input 1 megohm paralleled by approximately

Characteristics 55 pf.

Amplitude Calibrator

Output Voltages 0.2 mvolts to 100 volts peak-to-pcak m

18 steps. In oddition, a 100-volt dc o: t- put is available.

Frequency Approximately 1-kc square wave.

Output Current 5 mo square wave available at the froi t- panel current loop.

Cathode-Ray Tube

Type

Unblanking

T5470-31-2

Dc coupled.

Accelerating

Potential

10 kv.

Usable Viewing 6-cm high by 10-cm wide.

Area

Focus Vertical: 2 horizontal lines/mm distinguish­ able over the center 4 cm. 1.5 horizontal lincs/mm distinguishable in the top and bottom 1 cm.

Horizontal: 2 time markers/mm dis­ tinguishable over the middle 8 cm. 1.5 time markers/mm distinguishable in the first and tenth cm.

1 - 2

©?

Graticule Internal, adjustable edge lighting.

6X10 cm with vertical and horizontal 1- cm divisions with 2-mm markings on the centerlines. Provision made for riselime measurement.

Power Supplies

Line Voltage ± 1 0 % of nominal line voltage. (See O p ­ erating Instructions)

Characteristics— Type 547/R M 547

Line Frequency 50-60 and 400 cps.*

Power Con- sumption

510 watts typical,

Mechanical

Construction Front panel is anodized. Chassis is alu­ minum alloy.

Dimensions See Dimension Drawing.

'W ith line frequencies other than 30-60 cycles, a special fan m odifi­ cation is required! contact your local Tektronix Field Representative.

v*>-'

1-3

NOTES

FUNCTION OF CONTROLS A N D CONNECTORS

NOTE

The Time Base A and M a in Time Base (B ) controls serve id e n tic a l functions w ith the exception o f the

BRIGHTNESS co n tro l.

TRIGGERING

LEVEL

Selects the amplitude point on the trigger­ ing signal where sweep-triggering occurs.

When the knob is pulled out, greater big- gering range is offered for triggering on higher amplitude signals. The trigger­ ing circuit is most sensitive to small signals with the TRIGGERING LEVEL control pushed in and set to 0.

TRIGGERING

MODE

SLOPE

COUPLING

SOURCE

TIME/CM

VARIABLE

AUTO STABILITY position permits normal triggering on signals with repetition rotes higher than about 20 cps. W ith no b ig ­ ger signal, or with a lower repetition rote, the time-base circuit free runs and provides a handy reference trace.

TRIG (triggered) position permits normal triggering on all triggering signals. No trace occurs when the triggering signal is removed.

Determines whether the time base is big- gered on the negative- (—) or positive-

( + ) going slope of the signal.

AC position blocks the dc component of the triggering signal and allows triggenng to take place only on the changing portion of the signal. W ith frequencies below about 30 cps, use the DC position.

AC LF REJ position attenuates trigger '.ig- nal frequencies below about I.S kc, a l­ lowing the trigger circuits to respond only to higher frequencies.

DC position permits triggering on both high- and low- (to dc) frequency signals.

INT NORM position uses a portion o f the signal applied to the vertical defied ion plates o f the crt as a trigger signal.

INT PLUG IN position applies to multi- trace plug-in units that provide a simile- channel trigger signal through pin 5 o f the interconnecting plug (e.g. Tektronix T-.-pe

1AI plug-in unit).

LINE position uses a line-frequency signal as a trigger.

EXT position is for external triggering on a signal applied to the TRIGGER INF'UT connector.

Selects the sweep rate o f Time Base A.

Provides an uncalibrated adjustment of sweep rate. The sweep rate can be

SECTION 2

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

BRIGHTNESS

HORIZONTAL

DISPLAY

READY Lamps

SWEEP

MAGNIFIER

SINGLE SWEEP

DELAY-TIME

MULTIPLIER

1-10

HORIZONTAL

POSITION

VERNIER

AMPLITUDE

CALIBRATOR slowed by a factor o f a t least 2 .5 X . An

UNCALIBRATED lamp lights when the

VARIABLE control is not in the CALI­

BRATED position.

Allows adjustment of the contrast or brightness ratio o f the B trace compared to the A trace.

The A position allows only Time Base

A to display on the crt.

The ALT position, at the top permits alter­ nate operation so that both time bases are displayed independently. The B posi­ tion allows only the Main Time Base (B) to display on the crt.

B INTENS BY ‘A' is one of the delayed- sweep functions. In this position, a portion of the Main Time Base (B) is intensified during the time that Time Base A (the delayed sweep) is in operation.

The ALT position on the right-hand side permits alternate operation and display of both times bases while using the delayed- sweep feature. This allows the operator to view both the delaying sweep (Main Time

Base) and the delayed sweep (Time Base

A).

A DLY'D is one o f the delayed sweep functions. In this position Time Base A is displayed at the end o f each delay period as determined by the B TIME/CM or DE­

LAY TIME and DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER controls.

EXT XI and X I0 positions permit an ex­ ternal signal to be applied to the horizon­ tal deflection circuit. Sensitivity is con­ tinuously variable (with the VAR 10-1 control).

These light when the corresponding time- base circuit is ready for triggering.

Expands the sweep from the center of the graticule at any setting o f the TIME/

CM switch by the amount indicated.

Permits single-sweep operation in all modes of horizontal display except EXT.

Works in conjunction with the TIME/CM or DELAY TIME control o f the Main Time

Base (B). Varies sweep delay from 0.15 to

10.15 times the rate indicated by the Main

Time Base (B) TIME/CM or DELAY TIME switch.

Positions the display along the horizontal axis of the crt.

Determines the peak-to-peak voltage available at the CAL OUT connector.

2-1

Operating Instruction*— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

5 mA Current

Loop

POWER

Provides a calibrated source of square- wave current. The arrow shows direction of conventional current flow (i.e. positive to negative).

Toggle switch for turning the instrument on and off.

INTENSITY

FOCUS

ASTIGMATISM

TRACE ROTA­

TIO N

Controls brightness of the display tall traces).

Used in conjunction with the INTENSITY and ASTIGMATISM controls for obtain­ ing a well-defined display.

Used in conjunction with the INTENSITY and FOCUS controls for obtaining a w d l- defined display.

Permits horizontal alignment of the trace with respect to the horizontal lines of the graticule.

SCALE ILLUM

TRACE

SEPARATION

Varies illumination o f the grid lines of the graticule.

Varies the vertical position of the Time

Base A trace when the HORIZONT \L

DISPLAY switch is set to either ALT posi­ tion.

Beam

Position

TRIGGER

INPUT

(Time Base A)

Four neon lamps with accompanying <tr- rows indicate the direction when the dis­ play is deflected out o f the viewing art a.

Connector for applying an external trig ­ ger signal to Time Base A when its

SOURCE switch is set to EXT.

TRIGGER INPUT

(Main Time

Base (B))

Connector for applying an external trig­ ger signal to the Main Time Base iB) when its SOURCE switch is set to EXT

CAU TIO N

A M A X IM U M INPUT OF ± 30 VOLTS MUST NOT

BE EXCEEDED IN THE EXTERNAL TRIGGER POSI­

TIO N .

HORIZ INPUT

+G ATE B

DLY'D TRIG

SWEEP A

+G ATE A

VERT SIG

OUT

Jack for applying external horizontal signal when the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch is set to either XI or X10 EXT.

Supplies a 20-30-volt square-wave pulse when the Main Time Base (B) is operating.

Pulse duration is approxim ately 10.5X the setting o f the TIME/CM or DELAY TIME switch when the VARIABLE control is :.et to CALIBRATED.

Supplies a sharp positive-going trigger spike of about 10 volts at the end of the delay period as set by the TIME/CM or

DELAY TIME switch and the DELAY-TIME

MULTIPLIER control.

Supplies the sawtooth voltage of Tine

Base A. Peak amplitude is about + " 0 volts.

Same as +G A TE B except applies to Tin e

Base A.

Vertical signal output connector. O utp.il amplitude is approxim ately 0.3 volt p>:r centimeter of deflection.

2-2

Chopped Blank- Provides blanking of between-channel ing Switch switching transients when using mulfi-

(rear panel) channel plug-in units in the chopped mode.

External Single

Sweep Reset

(rear panel)

Allows remote control o f resetting in single-sweep operation. See Section 1 for reset step or pulse requirements.

EXTERNAL DE­

LAY INPUT

(rear panel)

A four-pin connector is provided for an external delay generator (rather than the normal internal delay produced by the

B sweep). Pin A of the connector permits disabling of the normal internal delayed trigger and is the fecd-in point for the external delay trigger (see Fig. 2-1).

Pin B is normally dc open and ac ground

(through a 0.01 / if capacitor), except in the B INTENS BY 'A ' and ALT (between

B INTENS BY 'A ' and A DLY'D) positions of the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch, then it is dc ground. Pin C supplies a B-gate pulse. Pulse characteristics are: + 2 volts minimum with a risetime o f 50 nsec or faster into a load of 1.1 k paralleled by lOOpf. Duration of the pulse is the same as the length of the B sweep. Pin D is ground at a ll times.

F(g. 2-7. Method o f coupling an oxtomol delayed trigger into the

Type 547.

NORMAL (NONDELAYED) SWEEP

The Type 547 Oscilloscope features two independent time- base circuits: Time Bose A and the Main Time Bose (B). The time bases can be used singly or alternately. When used alternately, an input signal can be displayed at two differ­ ent sweep rates in two independent presentations.

Sweep Triggering

Proper sweep triggering is essential for a stable presen­ tation of an input signal. For a stable display, the sweep must be triggered at the same time relative to the displayed signal. Thus, the sweep must be triggered by the input

signal or by some external signal that has a fixed time relationship with the displayed signal. The external trigger signal must be the same frequency or a submultiple of the input signal.

In alternate-sweep operation, both sweeps must be t.ig- gered to obtain a display. The ready lights may be userl to determine the proper triggering sequence.

O perating Instructions— Type 5 4 7 /R M S 4 7

The AC IF REJ position is also useful when triggering internally from multitrace plug-in units operated in the alternate dual-trace mode (unless the plug-in unit is a Type

1A1 and the SOURCE switch is set to PLUG IN). AC LF REJ coupling has a faster recovery time when subjected to the alternate dc levels from the multitrace plug-in unit.

Selecting the Trigger Source

The SOURCE switch selects one of a variety of possible triggering signals. For most applications, the sweep can be triggered internally from the displayed signal. This o o urs with the SOURCE switch set at NORM.

The PLUG-IN position is for plug-in units that w ill supply a single-channel triggering signal through pin 5 of the interconnecting plug, such as the Tektronix Type 1A1 D "ol-

Trace Plug-In Unit. This position is useful when opera'ing the plug-in unit in dual-trace chopped-mode operation since the triggering signal is the same as the applied signal and is free from any befween-channel switching transients.

The LINE position of the SOURCE switch connects a Ime- frequency signal to the triggering input. Line triggering is useful whenever the input signal is frequency-related to the line frequency.

To trigger the time base from an external signal, set the SOURCE switch to EXT and connect tho trigger signal to the TRIGGER INPUT connector. External triggering is often used when signal tracing in amplifiers, phase-shift networks, and wave shaping circuits. The signal from a single point in the circuit can be used as the external trigger signal.

W ith this arrangement, it is possible to observe the shaping a n d /o r am plification o f a signal at various points throngh the circuit without resetting the triggering controls for each new display.

Selecting Trigger Coupling

Three means of trigger coupling are available with the

COUPLING switch. The different coupling positions peim it you to accept or reject certain frequency components of the triggering signal.

W ith the COUPLING switch set at DC, the time base ran be triggered with all frequency components of the trigge ing signal within the trigger am plifier bandpass, including dc levels.

W ith the COUPLING switch set at AC, the dc compor enl of the triggering signal is blocked. Also, low-frequency signals below about 30 cps are attenuated.

W ith the COUPLING switch set at AC LF REJ, dc and l>w- frequency signals (below about 1.5 kc) are rejected or a t’en- uated. Thus, the trigger circuit w ill respond best to the higher-frequency components of the triggering signal.

In general, use AC coupling. However, it w ill be ne :es- sary to use DC coupling for very low-frequency signals.

When line-frequency hum is mixed with the triggering signal, it is best to use AC LF REJ coupling so that triggering takes place only on the signal of interest (if the signal of into est contains frequency components above about 1.5 kc).

Selecting Trigger Slope

The trigger SLOPE switch determines whether the trigger­ ing circuit responds on the rising ( + setting) or the falling

(— setting) portion of the triggering signal. When several cycles o f a signal appear in the display, the setting of the

SLOPE switch w ill probably be unimportant. However, if you wish to look at only a certain portion of a cycle, the

SLOPE switch w ill help start the display on the desired slope of the input signal. Fig. 2-2 illustrates the effect of both the SLOPE and TRIGGERING LEVEL controls.

Selecting Trigger Mode

The automatic stability mode is generally more convenient.

W ith the MODE switch set to AUTO STABILITY, proper trig ­ gering takes place after setting the TRIGGERING LEVEL control. When the triggering signal is removed, the time- base circuit autom atically free runs and presents a reference display. In alternate sweep operation, both MODE switches should be set to AUTO STABILITY. If this is done, a display w ill be maintained if one of the triggering signals is re­ moved.

The TRIG position of the MODE switch should be used if the trigger signal has a very low repetition rale (below about 20 cps).

Setting Triggering Level

The TRIGGERING LEVEL control determines the amplitude point on the signal where triggering occurs.

The trigger circuit is most sensitive to ac triggering signals with the TRIGGERING LEVEL control set near zero and pushed in. Moving the TRIGGERING LEVEL control in the + direction causes the trigger circuit to respond at some higher positive amplitude on the triggering signal. Moving the

TRIGGERING LEVEL control in the — direction causes the trigger circuit to respond at some higher negative amplitude on the triggering signal. Fig. 2-2 illustrates the effect of the TRIGGERING LEVEL control and the SLOPE switch.

The range o f the TRIGGERING LEVEL control is extended

10 times when pulled out.

Selecting Tim e/Cm (Sweep Rate)

The TIME/CM and SWEEP MAGNIFIER switches control sweep rate. The SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch expands both time bases.

The TIME/CM and SWEEP MAGNIFIER switches allow you to view an applied signal at a wide variety of calibrated sweep rates. When you make time measurements from the ert, be sure the VARIABLE control is set to CALIBRATED.

®1

2 -3

Operating Instructions— Type 547/R M 547

7

Posirivo

( 4 - ) Slop® y \

” N l :

-X7

I

L :

-\7

A 1

2-4

Hg. 2-2. Effoct. of tho TRIGGERING LEVEL and SLOPE control..

®

When the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch is set to X I, 'he

TIME/CM switch indicates the true sweep rate. However, with the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch set to X2, the setting of the TIME/CM switch must be divided by 2 to determine 'he true sweep rate. For example, assume that the T IM E /'IM switch is set at 1 mSEC and the SWEEP MAGNIFIER is set to X5. In this case, the true sweep rate would be 1 (msec) divided by 5 (SWEEP MAGNIFIER setting); resulting in a displayed sweep rate o f 0.2 msec per division. Fig. 2-3 illustrates how to make time measurements from the gra ti­ cule.

Fig. 2-3. Illustration of Hmo measurement from lh« graticule.

Alternate-Sweep Operation

Alternate-sweep operation occurs with the HORIZON! AL

DISPLAY switch set to one of the ALT positions. The alter­ nate-sweep features of the Type 547 allow signal to be displayed at two independent sweep rates. The alternate- sweep features can be used in either delayed or nondelayed modes o f operation.

To obtain a display in the alternate-sweep mode, b"th time-base circuits must be triggered. To insure that b"fh time-base circuits are always triggered, the MODE switch of both Time Bases can be set to AUTO STABILITY. If this is done, the oscilloscope presents an alternate-sweep display even if there is no triggering signal or if the TRIGGERING

LEVEL control is set improperly.

W ith a Tektronix Type 1A1 Dual-Trace Plug-In Unit opeia- ting in the alternate dual-trace mode, Channel 1 w ill lock -in with the Time Base A sweep, and Channel 2 w ill lock-in with the Main Time Base (B) sweep. The result is two dis­ plays that are independent in sweep rate and vertical deflnc- tion factor. If a multitrace plug-in unit is operated in 'he chopped mode, each channel w ill be displayed on both time bases.

The TRACE SEPARATION control allows vertical position­ ing of the Time Base A display in either ALT mode. The vertical position control of the plug-in unit positions both

® !

Operating Instruction*— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 displays. The BRIGHTNESS control varies the intensity of the

Main Time Base (B) trace. This adjusts brightness or contrast ratio of the B trace compared to A trace. In the delayed mode, this allows the operator to adjust the intensified zone on the delaying sweep for best viewing contrast. In the normal alternate mode the operator may adjust the bright­ ness level so that the intensity of each sweep is equal while the sweep rates may be significantly different. Also, the

BRIGHTNESS control provides a convenient means o f identi­ fying the Main Time Base (B) trace when both traces are displayed on the crt.

Single-Sweep Operation

In applications where the displayed signal is not repetitive or varies in amplitude, shape, or time, a conventional re­ petitive display may produce a jumbled presentation. To avoid this, use the single-sweep feature of the Type 547.

To use single sweep, first make sure the trigger circuit w ill trigger on the event you wish to display. Do this in the conventional manner with the single sweep switch set at

NORMAL. Then, depress the single sweep switch to the RESET position and release the switch so it returns to the SINGLE

SWEEP position. When this is completed, the next trigger pulse w ill actuate the sweep and the instrument w ill display the event on a single trace. The READY lamps, near the

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch, first light when the sweep is ready to accept a trigger and then go out after triggering has taken place. To ready the circuit for another single dis­ play, depress the single sweep switch to RESET and release.

In single-sweep operation, make sure the MODE switch is set to TRIG.

In normal alternate mode, the single sweep switch controls the B sweep. Thus, the A sweep can run up only once after the B sweep has occurred due to the alternating function.

Therefore, for each single-sweep reset, each time base pro­ duces a single alternate sweep upon being triggered.

In the delayed alternate mode, the single-sweep switch again controls only the B sweep. However, B sweep must run up for each display. Therefore, resetting is required for each display.

NONTRIGGERED DELAYED SWEEP

The following procedures describe various measurements, the accuracy o f those measurements, and other operations that can be performed using delayed sweep.

Insert a vertical plug-in unit and set the controls and switches on the instruments as listed in Table 2-1.

Set the HORIZONTAL POSITION control so the trace begins precisely at the left-hand edge of the graticule. Notice the position of the intensified segment in the trace.

N ow set the B TIME/CM or DELAY TIME switch to .2 SEC and A TIME/CM to 20 mSEC. The intensified segment should be at the same position as with the previous sweep rates.

Connect the SWEEP A output to the vertical plug-in unit input. Notice that the A sweep sawtooth and the inten­ sified segment in the trace start and end at the same time.

This display shows that time base A produces one sweep during the intensified segment of each B sweep. The A

TRIGGERING LEVEL control has no effect.

2-5

Operating Instruction*— Type 547/R M 547

The B sweep rate is 0.2sec/cm. The intensified segment begins 5 cm after the beginning of the trace. Hence, the

A sweep starts 1 sec after the B sweep (0.2 sec / cm X 5 i m).

The number of centimeters between the beginning of the trace and the beginning of the intensified segment is estab­ lished by the setting of the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER contiol.

Therefore, with any dial setting, the time difference between the beginning o f the A and B sweeps is the product of the

B TIME/CM or DELAY TIME switch and the DELAY-TIME

MULTIPLIER dial setting (see Fig. 2-4).

HORIZONTAL

POSITION

INTENSITY

Centered

So both intensity levels in the trace are easily seen.

Set the applicable controls and switches o f the vertical plug-in unit as follows:

VOLTS/DIV

VARIABLE

AC-DC-GND

POSITION

5

CALIBRATED

DC

Trace centered.

The following procedures describe five common applica­ tions of the delayed-sweep feature. These applications are more accurate than time measurements taken directly from the ert display.

TABLE 2-1

B MODE

B SOURCE

B COUPLING

B SLOPE

B TRIGGERING LEVEL

B TIME/CM or DELAY

TIME

A MODE

A SOURCE

A TIME/CM

VARIABLE (A and B)

HORIZONTAL DIS-

PLAY

SWEEP MAGNIFIER

DELAY-TIME

MULTIPLIER

AMPLITUDE CALI BRA-

TOR

AUTO STABILITY

NORM

AC

+

0

1 mSEC

AUTO STABILITY

EXT

.1 mSEC

CALIBRATED

B INTENS BY A'

OFF ( X I )

5.00

10 Volts

Demonstration 1

This procedure describes how to measure pulse duration with the pulse triggering the Main Time Base (B).

Set the controls and switches as listed in Table 2-1 except as follows:

.1 mSEC B TIME/CM or DELAY

TIME

A TIME/CM 1 /tSEC

A pply the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR signal to the input of the vertical plug-in unit. If necessary, adjust B TRIGGERING

LEVEL to obtain a stable display. The display should consist of nearly 1 cycle o f the square-wave signal.

Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial to intensify the falling portion of the square wave. Sot the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to A DLY'D. The display should now be a horizontally expanded version o f the signal observed in the intensified segment of the previous display. Set the HORIZONTAL

DISPLAY switch to ALT (between the B INTENS BY 'A' and

A DLY'D positions). Now, both the "d elaying” and the

"delayed" sweeps can be observed simultaneously. A d­ just the BRIGHTNESS control of the Main Time Base (B( to equalize the intensity. Set the TRACE SEPARATION control so that the 0 and 100% amplitude points o f both displays are exactly superimposed.

Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial so the falling 50% point on the delayed trace exactly crosses the 50% am pli­ tude level on the rising portion o f the intensified display

(this point may be hard to see but w ill be very near the start o f both traces). M ultiply the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial reading (e.g. 5.03) by the B TIME/CM or DELAY TIME switch setting. The product is the time duration o f the square- wave positive-going half-cycle.

Accuracy: Determined by the combination of all the follow ­ ing factors:

1. The basic accuracy o f time measurements made by using the sweep delay is as stated in Section 1.

2. The Delay Pickoff and Time Base A generator circuits typically require a net total of about 75 to 100 nsec to respond to the signal event which triggers Delayed Sweep

2-6

(A). This small Inherent delay need not be considered unless it is a significant percentage (delay times shoiler than 50 /xsec) o f the measured time or when measunng time differences using the same sweep rate. When nei es- sary, add the net circuit delay time to the measured time: that is, when measuring the time from the start of th.; B sweep.

Summary: The method described in Demonstration 1 provides a time measurement accuracy within 1% of reading r! 2 minor divisions of the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial.

By comparing the delay reading to an accurate external timing standard (such as a Tektronix Type 180A Time-Mark

Generator) and applying a correction factor, an accuracy of

± 2 minor divisions of the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial > an be achieved.

O perating Instructions— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

2. The error added by the sweep-delay system linearity is ± 4 minor dial divisions. Hence, % of measurement error decreases as the numerical dial difference increases.

NOTE

W hen the sep ara tion betw een d ia l settings is

100 m inor d ia l divisions o r less, the tim e m easure­ m ent can ofte n be m ade more accurate by direct re a d in g from a m ag in fie d ert d is p la y . See Dem on­ stra tio n 3: M a g n ific a tio n .

3. The accuracy of time measurements made in Demon­ stration 2 is independent of the inherent circuit delays, provided the B TRIGGERING LEVEL control setting is the same for each o f the two dial readings.

Summary: The method described in Demonstration 2, provides time measurement accuracy as stated in Section 1. Accuracy w ill be greatest when the numerical difference between the two DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIED readings is greatest.

Demonstration 2

This procedure describes how to measure time between two pulses, neither o f which triggers Time Base A.

Set the controls and switches as listed in Table 2-1 except as follows:

,2mSEC B TIME/CM or DELAY

TIME

A TIME/CM 2/uSEC

A pply the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR signal to the vertical input. If necessary, adjust the B TRIGGERING LEVEL control to obtain a stable display. The display should consist of about 2 cycles o f the square wave. Set the DELAY-TIME

MULTIPLIER dial so the square-wave rise located near the center o f the display is intensified.

Set the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to ALT (between the

B INTENS BY 'A ' and A DLY’D positions). The display should now include a horizontally expanded version of the in tifi- sified segment.

Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial so the rising 50% am plitude level of the square wave intersects the vertii al centerline of the graticule. Note the exact setting of the

DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial (e.g. 5.48). Turn the DELAY­

TIME MULTIPLIER dial clockwise until the falling 50% am pli­ tude level of the square wave intersects the same vertii al graticule centerline used with the previous dial setting.

Again note the exact setting of the DELAY-TIME MULTI­

PLIER dial.

Subtract the first dial setting from the second setting.

The product of the difference times the B TIME/CM or DE­

LAY TIME switch setting equals the time duration of tne square-wave positive-going half-cycle (between the 50% am plitude points). This measurement should indicate a time o f about 0.5 msec.

Accuracy: Determined by the combination of the follow ing factors:

1. The basic accuracy of the sweep delay as describ' d in Demonstration 1.

Demonstration 3

Complex signals contain a number of individual events of different amplitudes. Since the trigger circuits of the Type 547 respond to signal amplitude, a stable display w ill normally be obtained only when the sweep is triggered by the event having the greatest amplitude. The A delayed mode permits the start of the A sweep to be delayed for a selected time after the signal event having the greatest amplitude. Any event within the series of events may then be displayed in magnified form as follows:

Set the controls and switches on the instrument as listed in Table 2-1. A pp ly the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR signal to the vertical input. If necessary, adjust the B TRIGGERING

LEVEL control to obtain a stable display. The display should consist of several cycles of the square-wave signal. Set the

DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial to intensify one o f the positive­ going pulses.

Set the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to ALT (between the

B INTENS BY 'A' and A DLY'D positions). The display should now include the same signal information as the intensified trace segment, but horizontally expanded (magnified) ten times.

Increase the A sweep rate to 1 jtsec/div. The BRIGHT­

NESS and INTENSITY controls may require readjustment to view both displays. Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial to position a square-wave rise on the crt. The display now gives X I 000 magnification of the intensified segment.

Slowly turn the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial. Note that any portion o f the square wave can be brought into view in magnified form.

The DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial reading corresponds to the number of centimeters between the beginning o f the time base B trace and the beginning o f the time base A

(intensified) trace (e.g. 7.00 = 7 major graticule divisions).

2 -7

Operating Instructions'— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

The A delayed display w ill probably exhibit some horizon­ tal jitter. The time jitter contributed by the delay system is less than 5 X 10"s times the B TIME/CM or DELAY TIME switch setting. Since the sweep rate of the delayed sweep is now 1 fisec/cm, the jitter due to the delay system is less than one-half centimeter.

Accuracy: Depends solely on the B sweep-rate accuracy as listed in Section 1.

M onitor the signal available ot the +G A TE connector on another oscilloscope and establish the desired pulse repetition rate by setting the B TIME/CM or DELAY TIME switch and VARIABLE B control. Establish the desired duty factor by setting the A TIME/CM switch.

The maximum pulse repetition frequency that can be obtained in this manner is 60-90 kc. Maximum duty factor is about 0.9, decreasing to about 0.15 with faster sweep rates.

Demonstration 4

O rdinarily, the displayed signal is also used to trigger the oscilloscope sweep. In some situations, it may be de sir­ able to reverse this situation. The sweep-related output pulses, available from the front-panel o f the Type 547, . an be used as a triggering signal for an external device. The output signal of the external device can then produce a stable display while the oscilloscope sweep free runs.

To demonstrate one method of performing this operation, proceed as follows:

Set the controls and switches as listed in Table 2-1 except as follows:

B SOURCE

DELAY-TIME

MULTIPLIER

B TIME/CM or

DELAY TIME

A TIME/CM

EXT

1.00

IO u SEC

1 mSEC

Connect a lead from the DLY'D TRIG connector to 'he vertical input. The display should consist of a posit! re- going spike.

The oscilloscope display is the pulse that is available at the Type 547 at the end of each delay period. In a practical application, the pulse would not be applied to 'he vertical input but instead to some external device to be tested. The pulse would then serve as the trigger pulse or input signal for the external device, and the output of 'he device would provide a stable display on the oscilloscope, as through the oscilloscope were triggered in the normal m<in­ ner.

Demonstration 5

The +G ATE A connector output signal of the Type .'-47 can be used as a variable repetition rate, variable duty-hic- tor pulse generator. To use the Type 547 in this manner, proceed as follows:

Set the controls and switches as listed in Table 2-1 exci pt as follows:

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY

DELAY-TIME

MULTIPLIER

B TRIGGERING MODE

B INTENS BY A'

About 0.20

AUTO

2-8

TRIGGERED DELAYED SWEEP

Complex signals contain a number o f individual events at different amplitudes. Since the trigger circuits in the Type 547 respond to signal amplitude, a stable display w ill normally be obtained only when the sweep is triggered by the event having the greatest amplitude.

The follow ing instructions demonstrate that Time Base A can be triggered by any event with a series of events, regardless of relative amplitude.

Set the controls and switches on the instrument as listed in Table 2-1.

Connect the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR signal to the verti­ cal input. You should obtain a square-wave display.

Turn the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial about 2 turns in either direction. Notice that the brightened segment in the display moves smoothly across the crt.

Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial so the brightened segment begins about in the middle o f a pulse top. Now, set the A MODE switch to TRIG and the A SOURCE switch to NORM. Notice that the brightened segment in the dis­ play has shifted to the next pulse on the right. (If the bright­ ened segment is not present, cr is unstable, readjust the A

TRIGGERING LEVEL control.) Turn the DELAY-TIME MULTI­

PLIER dial several full turns. The brightened segment in the display should jump from one pulse to the next. Set the

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to A DLY'D and notice that the display now begins on the rising portion o f the pulse.

W ith the present display, turning the DELAY-TIME MULTI­

PLIER dial should not change the display since all o f the

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR pulses are the same shape. How­ ever, if the input signal consisted of a repeating series of several dissimilar pulses, turning the dial would provide a triggered display of each pulse in the series (provided the

A TRIGGERING LEVEL control is set for triggering on the smallest pulse).

The display is produced in the following manner:

Time Base A produces one sweep during each B sweep.

The Time Base A sweep w ill begin some time after the start of B sweep. This time is the total of the B TIME/CM or DE­

LAY TIME switch setting multiplied by the DELAY-TIME MULI-

PLIER dial setting, plus the time between the end of this de­ lay interval and the next event in the signal which can trigger Time Base B.

W ith the A TRIGGERING MODE switch in the TRIG position, the Time Base A sweep w ill occur only if A is armed and triggered before the B sweep ends. If Time Base A is not triggered, the scope waits.

Polarized Light Hlter

The polarized light filter provided with the Type 547 minimizes undesirable reflections when viewing the display under high ambient light conditions. The filter may be left on when taking waveform photographs unless a high w riting rate is required.

If the light filter is removed, the CRT protector plate should be installed to prevent scratches to the CRT lace plate.

EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION

For special applications, horizontal deflection can be produced with an externally derived signal. Thus, the o c il- ioscope system can be used to plot one function against another (c.g. Lissajous figures). However, the system is not intended for precise phase-angle measurements.

To use an external signal for horizontal deflection, < on- nect the signal to the HORIZ INPUT connector. Set the

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to EXT. The signal is dc coupled to the deflection amplifier. The M A G switch is inoperative when the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch is set to either external horizontal position.

O perating Instructions'— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 the method to be used is determined by the serial number of the instrument as follows:

SN 7 9 8 0 and Above

The Type 547 can be operated from either a 115-volt or a 230-volt nominal line-voltage source. The Line Voltage

Selector assembly on the rear panel converts the instrument from one operating range to the other. In addition, this assembly changes taps on the primary winding of the power transformer to allow selection of one of three regulating ranges. The assembly also includes the two line fuses. When the instrument is converted from 115-volt to 230-volt nominal operation, or vice versa, the assembly installs the proper fuse to provide instrument protection.

To convert from one nominal line voltage to the other a n d /o r change regulating ranges, use the follow ing pro­ cedure. (See Fig. 2-5)

COOLING

A fan maintains safe operating temperature in the T/pe

547 by circulating filtered air over the power supply recti­ fiers, regulators, and other circuit components. When in operation, the instrument must be placed so that the air intake a t the back and the vents in the side panels are clear of any obstruction that might impede the flow of air. Allow at least 3 inches clearance at the rear of the instrument ind

2 inches at each side. The side panels should be in place

(except during maintenance adjustments) for proper air circulation inside the instrument.

The Type 547 should never be operated without the fan running, since temperatures within the instrument will rise to a dangerous level in a few minutes. In this event, the thermal cutout switch disconnects the power and keeps it disconnected until the temperature drops to a safe level

Fig. 2-5. Voltage Selector assembly. Oscilloscope serial number

7980 and above.

POWER REQUIREMENTS

General. The Type 547/RM547 w ill regulate with input line voltages which are within 10% of designed center -.olt- age range. Two possible methods of connecting the oscillo­ scope for use with the appropriate power supplies exist, and

1. Disconnect the instrument from the power source.

2. Loosen the two captive screws that hold the cover in the voltage selector switch base; then remove the cover by pulling it straight away from the base.

3. To change nominal line voltage selection, pull out the

Voltage Selector plug, (see Fig. 2-5) rotate it 180° and plug it back in.

©

2 -9

Operating Instruction*— Typo 547/R M 547

4. To change regulating ranges, pull out the Range 'Se­ lector plug (see Fig. 2-5), slide it left or right to the desiied position and plug it back in. Select a range which centers about the average line voltage to which the instrument is to be connected (see Table 2-2).

5. Re-install the cover and tighten the two captive screws, making sure that the indicating tabs are protruding through the correct holes in the cover for the desired line voltage and regulating range.

6. Re-connect the instrument to the power source.

CAUTIO N

O p e ra tio n o f this instrum ent w ith the V o lta g e Se­ lector or Range Selector switch in the w ro n g posi­ tion fo r the a p p lie d lin e v o lta g e m ay dam age the instrum ent o r cause im p rope r o p e ra tio n .

Transformer and Fan Connections

SN 7 9 7 9 and Below

TABLE 2-2

Regulating Ranges SN 79 80 and Above

Range Selector

Switch Position

LO (switch bar in left holes)

M (switch bar in middle holes)

HI (switch bar in right holes)

V o lta g e Selector

115-V olts

N o m ina l

90 to 110 volts

104 to 126 volts

112 to 136 volts

23 0-V o lts

N o m ina l

180 to 220 volt

208 to 252 volt

224 to 272 volt:

Fig. 2-6. Transformer connections fo r 10S to 244 volt, SO to 60 cps.

SN 7979 and bolow.

White with green stripes

SN 7 9 7 9 and Below

Unless otherwise indicated, the Type 547 is shipped with the power transformer and fan wired for 115-volt AC inp it.

Fig. 2-6 and a connection diagram on the side of the trans­ former show alternate connections for other input voltages to the power transformer. When the transformer is changid from 108-122 volts to 216-244 volts connection, the fan w ir­ ing must also be changed. Fig. 2-7 shows the fan connections for each voltage range.

(solid black) operation, move fan load.

108 to 122 volt operation

Fig. 2-7. Fan connections fo r 108 to 244 volt, SO to 60 cps. SN

7979 and below.

2-10

® !

SECTION 3

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Introduction

This section contains the theory of operation of the venous circuits in the Type 547. A simplified block diagram Oiial- ysis is given first to explain the operation of each circuit in general terms, then the operation of each circuit is <ov- ered in detail.

BLOCK DIAGRAM ANALYSIS

In the following analysis, it is assumed that the o c il- loscope is equipped with a dual-channel vertical plu'i-in preamplifier, and that the horizontal display switch is set in the ALT position betwoen the A DLY'D BY B and the

B INTENS BY ‘A' positions. Fig. 3-1 is a simplified bl->ck diagram showing the Type 547 operating in this mode. De­ tailed block diagrams showing circuit configuration for 'his and other modes o f operation are contained in Section 6.

The functions of the various blocks in Fig. 3-1 are explained in the following paragraphs.

Low-Voltage Power Supply. The low-voltage power s jp- ply produces all operating voltages for the oscilloscope v.ith the exception o f parts o f the ert circuit. The low-voltage sup­ ply provides regulated — 150, + 100, + 225, and + 3 5 0 volts.

It also provides heater voltages and an unregulated +325- volt output.

Vertical Plug-In Preamplifier. Any Tektronix letter-Se'ies o r 1-Series vertical plug-in preamplifier can be used with 'he

Type 547. For a circuit description o f the plug-in unit re­ fer to the plug-in unit instruction manual.

Vertical Input Am plifier. The vertical input am plifier is a balanced, hybrid am plifier that amplifies the output of the plug-in vertical preamplifier and applies the am plified vertical signal to the trigger-pickoff circuit and the ver­ tical output amplifier.

Delay Line. The push-pull output of the vertical input am­ plifier is applied through the balanced delay line to the vC'ti- cal output amplifier. The delay line is a specially braided

186-ohm line which delays the application of the vertical sig­ nal to the vertical output am plifier for 170 nsec. This provides time for unblanking ert and starting the horizontal sweep before the vertical signal reaches the deflection plates.

The delay allows the leading edge of a single fast-rising pulse to be displayed. The delay line requires no adjust­ ment because of the precision construction.

Vertical Output Amplifier. The vertical output amplifier is a push-pull three-stage, transistor am plifier that takes Hie output of the delay line and amplifies it to a level sufficir nt to drive the vertical deflection plates of the erf.

Trigger-Pickoff Circuit. The trigger-pickoff circuit apples a sample of the input waveform to the trigger circuits of both time bases. The trigger is picked off at the output of the vertical input amplifier.

M ain Time Base (B) Generator. The main time base (B) generator provides accurate ramp voltages for the horizontal deflection system, unblanking for the ert, sync pulse for the sweep switching circuit, and a + B gate to a front-panel connector. The main time base (B) generator may be trig­ gered by signals derived from either internal or external sources.

Delay-Pickoff Circuit. The delay-pickoff circuit compares the ramp-voltage output o f the main time base (B) generator with a variable reference voltage, and assuming indentical characteristics in the two halves of the comparator, gen­ erates a trigger pulse when the two voltages are equal. The trigger output o f the delay-pickoff circuit may be used to arm or trigger Time Base A, and is also available at a front-panel connector.

Alternate-Sweep Switching Circuit. When the HORIZON­

TAL DISPLAY switch is in either of the alternate modes, the alternate-sweep switching circuit performs the following functions:

1. Gates the ramp signals from the time-bose generators into the horizontal am plifier and thereby decides which o f the two time-base generators is to be displayed.

2. Provides the vertical plug-in preamplifier with dual-trace slaving pulses.

3. Applies trace-separation voltage to the vertical am plifier during the A sweep.

4. Disables the B sweep unblanking circuit during presenta­ tion of the delayed A sweep.

In the A ALT B position o f the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch, the alternate-sweep switching circuit provides sweep- generator lockout voltages to the horizontal display switch.

Horizontal Am plifier. The input to the horizontal am plifier is selected from the outputs of the main time base (B) gen­ erator, time base A generator, or the external horizontal in­ put amplifier. The selected input is split in phase and am­ plified to provide push-pull drive to the horizontal deflec­ tion plates of the ert.

External Horizontal Amplifier. The external horizontal in­ put am plifier provides the necessary gain to drive the hori­ zontal am plifier from external signals. An input attenuator and a gain control provide horizontal deflection factors from

0.1 to about 10 volts/cm.

Cit Power Supply. The ert power supply provides the high voltages for operating the ert. The power supply is of the rf type, using a 50-kc Hartley oscillator. Secondary windings on the oscillator transformer supply voltages to the high-volt­ age rectifiers.

Cathode Ray Tube (C rt). The cathode-ray lube used in the Type 547 is a flat-faced, infernal graticule, 5-inch tube

3-1

Circuit Description— Type 547/R M 547

VERTICAL

PLUG-IN

PRE-

AMPLIFIER

7

,

VERTICAL

INPUT

AMPLIFIER

DELAY

LINE

VERTICAL

OUTPUT

AMPLIFIER

TRIGGER

PICKOFF

DELAY

PICKOFF

CRT

MAIN

TIME BASE

IB)

TIME BASE

(A)

ALTERNATE

SWEEP

SWITCHING

CIRCUIT

HORIZONTAL

AMPLIFIER

3-2

CALIBRATOR

CRT

POWER

SUPPLY

EXTERNAL

HORIZONTAL

AMPLIFIER to Crt

Fig. 3-1. Type 5*17 simplified block diagram.

LOW VOLTAGE

POWER

SUPPLY

To All

Block!

with 6 cm o f usable vertical scan area. The tube is designed for low input capacitance to the vertical deflection phites and minimum x-axis center-to-edge defocusing.

Calibrator. The calibrator in the Type 547 is a multivibrator and cathode follower that provides a square-wave output with a maximum amplitude of 100 volts at a nominal 1 kc.

A step attenuator permits switching the output amplitude from the front panel. In the 0.2-mvolt to 200-mvolt range, the output impedance is 50 0.

Time Base A Generator. The time base A generator clo'ely resembles the main time base (B| generator. The descrip-ion o f functions and the circuit analysis given for the time base

(B) generator in most instances apply also to the time b ise

A generator.

CIRCUIT ANALYSIS

The following circuit analysis o f the Type 547 describes the operation of the various circuits in detail. W hile re ld- ing through the description of a particular circuit, n fer to the circuit diagram being discussed (see Section 6).

Low-Voltage Power Supply

The low-voltage power supply in the Type 547 (see Power

Supply schematic) actually consists of four interrelated j

jp- plies that operate together as as system. This system deli' ers filtered and regulated voltages of — 150, +100, + 225, <md

+ 350 volts as well as an unregulated dc voltage of + 125 volts. A common power transformer, T601, supplies the in out power to each of the supplies, as well as heater powei to thermal time-delay relay K600 and the tubes in the oscil­ loscope. Unless otherwise specified, the Type 547 is shipped with T601 wired for 115-volf ac input. A connection digr im on the side o f the transformer shows alternate connecti >ns for other input voltaes for SN 7979 and below. For SN 7 *80 and above, a Voltage Selector assembly is provided I ;ee

Operating Instructions section of this manual).

The 115-volt ac input power is applied to T601 throi gh

POWER O N switch SW601. Overload protection is provided by fuse F601. Thermal cutout TK601 in the primary cir uit of T601 is a protective device that opens the transfori ter primary circuit if the temperature inside the oscilloscope rises above a safe value. TK601 resets automatically w ien temperatures return to normal; and to shorten the cool ng time, the fan continues to run while TK601 is open |ex< :pt when T601 is connected for 210-250-volt operation). Thernal time delay relay K600 provides a filament warmup time of approimately 30 seconds before the dc power supplies ire connected to 6.3 volts on the T601 secondary winding, t ur- ing heater warmup time, contacts 4 and 9 o f relay K600 re­ main open. A t the end of heater warmup time, contact 4 and 9 close and apply power to magnetic relay K601. C >n- tacts K601-1 o f relay K601 remove the heater power ft >m

K600, but before K600 can open, contacts K601-1 lock he holding circuit to the coil of K601. K601 now remains ci er- gized until the power to the oscilloscope is switched ofl or otherwise interrupted. When K601 is energized, contr cts

K601-2, K601-3, K601-4, K601-5, and K601-6 are also clo cd and thus activate their respective dc supplies.

Crcuit Description— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

— 150-V o lt Supply. The — 150-volf supply in the Type 547 is the reference voltage source for the other supplies and must be very stable. The -1 5 0 -v o lt supply includes a high- gain electronic voltage regulator designed to give good regulation under extreme operating conditions. This regula­ tor circuit contains a series regulator, a glow-discharge tube reference source, an error detector, and an amplifier.

In operation, the input power to the -1 5 0 -v o lt supply is supplied by one secondary winding of T601. The ac output of the secondary winding is rectified by silicon-diode rectifier bridge D642 and filtered by capacitor C642A. In series with the positive side of the supply and ground are series regula­ tor tubes V637 and V647, paralleled by shunting resistors

R646 and R647. The output o f the -1 5 0 -v o lt supply is taken from the negative side.

Error sensing in the voltage-regulator circuit is accom­ plished by comparator tube V624. Current flow through

V624 is established by the setting o f the tap on R616 in the voltage divider R615, R616, and R617. The voltage on the grid of V624A is held at approximately + 8 5 volts by refer­ ence tube V609. Assuming that the output voltage o f the

— 150-volt supply increases due to increased line voltage or some other cause, the voltage increase appears on the cath­ odes of V624 and throngh the tap on R616, on the grid of

V624B. Due to the voltage divider, only a part of the volt­ age increase appears between the grid and cathode of

V624B, but the full change appears on the grid and cathode o f V624A. The increase is in the negative direction, there­ fore, V624A increases its conduction to maintain the proper bias between grid and cathode, and this holds both cath­ odes more or less fixed while the grid of V624B is pulled negative by the increasing negative voltage across the volt­ age divider. The increasing negative voltage on the grid of

V624B causes a decrease in current; thus the plate voltage goes positive.

The positive change in plate voltage is am plified and inverted to a negative change by am plifier tube V634. The amplified error signal from V634 is applied to the grids of series regulator tubes V637 and V647. The negative-going error signal on the grids of V637 and V647 decreases the current through the tubes, effectively increasing their resis­ tance and the voltage drop across them. The voltage neces­ sary to provide the increased drop across the series regula­ tor tubes and shunt resistor can only be obtained by sub­ tracting it from the negative side of the supply, so the undesired increase in negative voltage is absorbed in the series regulators and shunt resistors. If the output of the

-1 5 0 -v o lt suppy had decreased instead of increased, then the error voltage applied to the grids of the series regula­ tors would have been positive-going, The positive-going error voltage on the grids o f the series regulators would lower the resistance of the series regulator tubes, and the voltage drop across them would decrease, leaving more voltage for the negative side of the supply. Since the output voltage of the -1 5 0 -v o lt supply depends upon the relation­ ship of the voltage on the tap o f R616 and the reference voltage from V609, accurate adjustment o f the output volt­ age is provided by making R616 variable.

Filter capacitor C642A does not remove all the ripple from the output of the bridge rectifier, and the series regula­ tor circuit functions also to reduce this output ripple voltoge.

Any ripple between the -1 5 0 -v o lt output point and ground reaches the grid (pin 2) of V624A via capacitor C610. This

3-3

Circuit Description— Typo 547/R M 547

input ripple voltage is am plified by V624 acting as a coth- ode-coupled am plifier. The ripple output voltage at the plate (pin 6) of V6248 has the same polarity as the ripple voltage at the -1 5 0 -v o lt output. C628 couples this ripple output voltage to the grid o f V634. The ripple voltagr is further am plified by V634 and applied to the grids o f the series regulator tubes with a polarity that opposes the original ripple voltage. Ripple in the positive side o f 'he

-1 5 0 -v o lt supply is coupled into a degenerative feedb ick loop through R637 to the screen o f V634.

Some o f the components in the -1 5 0 -v o lt supply are not necessary in normal operation but are included to insure proper operation o f the circuit under adverse conditions.

C636 provides for proper operation o f the circuit wl en extremely low temperatures reduce the capacitance of the electrolytic filter capacitors. R640 and R641 protect aga nst large surge currents, and C642B suppresses sudden load changes that fall outside the bandwidth o f the regulotor circuit.

+ 100-V o lt Supply. The input to the + 100-volt supply is the output of secondary winding 19-20 of transformer T<01 and silicon-diode bridge D672. In addition to its other loads, the -f-100-volt supply is required to supply current to a series string of filaments at all times. When the Type

547 is first turned on, relay K601 contacts are open and all the regulated supplies are inoperative. During this time, the series-string filaments are supplied by the unregulated side of the - f 100-volt supply through relay contacts K601 4.

By the time thermal relay K600 activates K601, the series- string filaments have reached operating temperature. When

K601 is activated by K600, relay contacts K601-4 shift the series-string filaments to the regulated output of the + 1(0- volt supply.

The reference voltage source is the regulated output of tne

—150-volt supply. V664A is the error amplifier, V661B compensates for V664A grid-cathode contact bias changes caused by changing line voltage, and V677 is the series regulator tube. The error-feedback circuit is through R650 and R651, the junction o f which is connected to the grid of

V6A4A. The fop end o f R650 is connected to the regulated

+ 100-volt output, and the lower end of R651 is connected to the output of the regulated -1 5 0 -v o lt supply to obtain reference voltage. W ith normal line voltages and loads, tire voltage at the junction of R650 and R651 is about — 1.7 vo fs with reference to ground; this is the operating bias of V664V

If the load current, output voltage, or the input volta ie changes (including changes due to ripple), the output of the regulated + 100-volt supply starts to change also, but any change appears across R650 and R651 and is applied -o the grid of V664A as a change in operating bias. Assuming that the output of the regulated + 100-volt supply tries 'o decrease, the reduced voltage at the top end of R650 p< r- mits the voltage at the junction of R650 and R651 to <io more negative than the normal — 1.7-volt level at that poit t.

The increase in negative bias on the grid of V664A reduces the flow of plate current through V664A, the voltage dre p across plate load resistor R663 decreases, and the p la o voltage of V664 and the grid bias of V677 go more poti- tive. As the grid of V667 goes more positive, the resistan< e that V677 offers to the flow of current is decreased and the output voltage rises, compensating for the drop in outp it voltage which initiated regulating action. O f course, ti e regulator circuit can never completely compensate for a change in output voltage, for there must be an error input for the circuit to operate, but any error in output is re­ duced by a factor equal to the loop gain of the regulator circuit.

The screen grid o f V664A is used as a signal grid for injecting a sample of any ripple or transient voltage present in the unregulated side of the + 100-volt supply into the regulator circuit. The regulator circuit thereby becomes a dynamic filter for ripple reduction. The ripple signal is applied to the screen o f V664A, am plified and inverted in phase by V664A, then applied to the grid o f V677. By the time the am plified and inverted ripple gets to the grid of

V677, it is o f proper amplitude and phase to cancel out the ripple appearing at the plate of V677.

To keep the proper load on the + 100-volt supply when the vertical plug-in preamplifier is removed, a plug-in sens­ ing switch is built into the main frame o f the Type 547 at the top rear of the plug-in compartment. When the plug-in unit is removed, the sensing switch connects a resistive load in place of the series-filament string. When it is desired to operate the plug-in unit outside the Type 547 by means of a test harness, the sensing switch must be manually operated.

To manually operate the switch, pull the plastic plunger outward to the stop position.

Unregulated + 32 5 -V o lt Supply. The unregulated +325- volt supply voltage source differs somewhat from the voltage sources for the - 1 5 0 - and + 100-volt supplies. A center- tapped secondary (13-14-15) on T601 and silicon diodes D702 and D732 form a center-tapped bridge rectifier circuit with the negative side connected to the positive unregulated side o f the voltage source for the + 100-volt supply. The unregu­ lated + 325-volt output is taken from the transformer center- tap (14) connection.

The unregulated output o f the voltage source for the

+ 100-volt supply is approxim ately + 1 8 0 volts. The unregu­ lated output of the center-tapped bridge circuit is approxi­ mately + 2 9 0 volts; this, added to the unregulated +180 volts provides the + 4 7 0 volts. However, for the unregulated

+ 325-volt output, the connection is made at the center tap

(+ 145 volts) o f the bridge (the midpoint o f the +290 volts).

Adding the + 1 8 0 and + 145 volts provides the desired out­ put o f +325 volts.

+ 22 5 -V o lt Supply. The voltage source for the regulated

+225-volt supply is the unregulated +325-volt supply des­ cribed in the preceding paragraphs. The regulator circuit is similar to the regulator circuit found in the -1 5 0 -v o lt sup­ ply; the main difference being that instead of using a glow discharge tube as a reference voltage source, the reference voltage is from the -1 5 0 -v o lt supply. The error signal is picked off the junction of precision resistors R680 and R681.

The upper end of R680 is connected to the + 225-volt output, and the lower end of R681 is connected to the regulated

-1 5 0 -v o lt supply. The voltage at the junction between R680 and R681 is approximately —0.9 volt which is applied through R682 and R683 to the grid of V684B. The cathodes of V684 are longtailcd to the -1 5 0 -v o lt supply through 82 k resistor R685. The grid of V684A is grounded. The error signal is fed from the grid o f V684B through the common- cathode circuit to the A side of the tube. Notice that this comparator is somewhat different from the comparator used in the -1 5 0 -v o lt supply; the output is taken from the A

3 -4

®

side. The error signal is amplified by V684 and fed, un­ changed and in phase, to the voltage divider in the grid of

V694. V694 also amplifies and inverts the error signal ind applies it out of phase with any change in the -f225- 'olt output, to the grid o f series regulator tube V707.

Here again, the screen o f the error am plifier tube is acting as an injection grid for ripple reduction. A sample of the unregulated supply ripple is applied to the screen of V<94.

V694 amplifies the ripple, inverts it in phase, and applies it to the grid of series regulator tube V707. The result is mat the same ripple appears simultaneously on the grid und plate of V707, but 180° out of phase,- thus the ripple can- els out.

+ 3 5 0-V o lt Supply. The input to the + 350-volt suppl; is the full voltage output of the center-tapped bridge isee description of unregulated + 325-volt supply) added to 'he unregulated side of the + 100-volt supply. The operation of the regulator circuit is very similar to the operation of the

- f 100-volt regulator except for different component values and no grid-cathode contact-bias compensating diode.

Crt Circuit

The crt circuit (see Crt schematic) includes the crt, the high-voltage power supply, and the controls necessary to focus and orient the display. The crt (Tektronix T;, pe

T5470-31-2) is an aluminized, 5-inch, flat-faced, glass crt v. ith a helical post-accelerator and electrostatic focus and de­ flection. The crt circuit provides connections for externally modulating the crt cathode. The high-voltage power supoly is composed of a dc-to-50-kc power converter, a voltage- regulator circuit, and three high-voltage outputs. Frc nt- panel controls in the crt circuit adjust the trace rotat on

(screwdriver adjustment), intensity, focus, and astigmati m.

Internal controls adjust the geometry and high-voltage < ut- put level.

H ig h-V o ltag * Power Supply. The high-voltage power sup­ ply is a dc-to-ac converter operating at approximately 50 kc with the transformer providing three high-voltage outputs.

The use o f a 50-kc input to the high-voltage transformer permits the size of the transformer and filter components to be kept small. A modified Hartley oscillator convi-rts dc from the +325-volt unregulated supply to the 50-kc input required by high-voltage transformer T801. C808 and 'he primary of T801 form the oscillator resonant tank circuit.

No provisions are made for precise tuning of the oscilloror tank since the exact frequency of oscillation is not important.

Voltage Regulation. Voltage regulation of the high-voltage outputs is accomplished by regulating the amplitude of oscillations in the Hartley oscillator. The --1850-volt output is referenced to the + 350-volt regulated supply througl a voltage divider composed of R84I, R842, R843, R845, R81d,

R847, R853, and variable resistors R840 and R846. Throigh a tap on the voltage divider, the regulator circuit samp'es the -1 8 5 0 -v o lt output of the supply, amplifies any errors and uses the amplified error voltage to adjust the serr en voltage of Hartley oscillator V800. If the -1 8 5 0 -v o lt output changes, the change is detected at the grid of V814B. lh e detected error is am plified by V814B and V814A. The er or signal at the plate o f V814A is direct coupled to the screen of V800 by making the plate-load resistor of V814A serve as

Circuit Description— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 the screen-dropping resistor for V800. Any change in the

— 1850-volt output thus changes the screen voltage of V800 and the amplitude of the 50-kc oscillations. R840 provides a means of controlling the high-voltage output through con­ trolling oscillation amplitude.

Crt Grid Supply. The approxim ately -1 9 5 0 -v o lt output of the high-voltage power supply is the rectified output of one of the two high-voltage secondaries on T801. To provide dc-coupled unblanking signals to the crt grid, the crt grid supply is floating (the dc voltage levels on the components shift in accordance with the unblanking signals). The posi­ tive side of the crt grid supply is returned to the -1 5 0 - volt supply through the unblanking cathode-follower load resistor of the selected sweep generator and through R831 and R832. The negative side of the crt grid supply is applied through the INTENSITY control to the crt grid.

A t the fastest sweep rates, the stray capacitance o f the floating crt grid circuit makes it difficult for the crt grid to rise fast enough to unblank the crt in the required time. An isolation network consisting of R827, R828, C828, C829, and

C830 isolates the capacitive loading. By this arrangement, the fast leading edge of the unblanking pulse is coupled through C830 and C828 to the grid of the crt. For short- duration unblanking pulses, such as those that occur at the fastest sweep rates, the dc levels on the rectifier and sec­ ondary winding are not appreciably affected. Longer un­ blanking pulses, such as those that occur at the slower sweep rates, charge the stray capacitance in the -19 50 -volts out­ put through R827. This pulls up the floating crt grid circuit and holds the crt grid at the unblanked potential for the duration of the unblanking pulse.

+ 81 5 0 -a n d - 1 8 5 0 - V o l t Outputs. Both the +8150-and the -1 8 5 0 -v o lt outputs are derived from the same secondary winding on T801. The full secondary voltage of approxi­ mately 2900 volts is applied to a voltage tripler consisting o f rectifiers V832, V842, and V852 and associated capacitors.

A tap on the secondary provides the input for half-wave rectifier V862 in the -1 8 5 0 -v o lt output. Both outputs are referenced to the regulated + 350-volt supply through o voltage divider network. The + 8 1 50-volt output is connected to the crt post-deflection-accelerator anode and the -1 8 5 0 - volt output is connected to the crt cathode, providing a total accelerating voltage of 10,000 volts.

Crt Circuit Controls and Connectors. Optimum size and shape of the fluorescent spot on the crt is obtained by ad­ justing the front-panel FOCUS and ASTIGMATISM controls.

FOCUS control R846 provides the correct voltage for the second anode (focus ring) in the crt. Proper voltage for the third anode is obtained by adjusting ASTIGMATISM con­ trol R864. In order to obtain optimum spot size and shape, both the FOCUS and ASTIGMATISM controls are adjusted to provide the proper electronic lens configuration in the region of the second and third anodes of the crt. Spot intensity is adjusted by means o f front-panel INTENSITY control R826.

Varying the INTENSITY control changes the voltage on the crt grid, which in turn varies the density of the electron stream. Internal GEOMETRY control R861 adjusts the isola­ tion shield voltage in the crt, and is adjusted to minimize

"b ow ing " or “ tiltin g " of the display. Front-panel TRACE

ROTATION control R778 permits minor adjustments in trace orientation. By adjusting the TRACE ROTATION control,

®!

3 -5

Circuit Description— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 the trace can be made parallel with the horizontal lines on the graticule, eliminating the need to physically turn the crt to correct for minor deviations of the trace from the horizontal.

An input binding post on the rear panel of the Type >47 provides an input for externally modulating the crt cathode.

The input binding post is normally grounded by a link If if is desired to intensity modulate the display from an ex­ ternal source, the link is opened, and the modulating signal is coupled to the crt cathode through C858.

When the Type 547 is used with a multichonnel vert cal plug-in preamplifier that provides dual-trace chopped blonk- ing pulses, the blanking pulses are applied to rear-ponel

CRT CATHODE SELECTOR switch SW858. W ith the vert cal plug-in preamplifier operating in the chopped mode end

SW858 set to the CHOPPED BLANKING position, a positive pulse of approximately 20-volts amplitude is applied throi gh

C858 to the cathode o f the crt. At normal intensity levels, this pulse is sufficient to cut off the crt during the time he am plifier channels in the vertical plug-in preamplifiers ire being switched.

Vertical Amplifier System

The vertical amplifier system in the Type 547 consists of an appropriate vertical plug-in preamplifier, a push-pull catho le- follower input stage, a push-pull transistorized delay-1 ne driver, a delay line, and a push-pull transistorized output amplifier. In addition, the trigger-pickoff circuit functions as a part of the vertical am plifier by providing reverse termi ia- tion for the delay line.

Vertical Input Amplifier. The push-pull output o f the ver­ tical plug-in preamplifier, with a fixed dc level of appr >x- imately +67.5 volts, is applied to the input of the verti :al am plifier through terminals 1 and 3 of the plug-in connect er.

Transient-response compensation switch SW1000, cap< ci- tor C1000, and resistor R1000 at the input of the verti :al am plifier compensate for the difference in transient response that exists between different models o f vertical plug-in p e- amplifiers. SW1000 is actuated by a mechanical sens ng device when the plug-in unit is inserted into the oscilloscope, and requires no attention on the part of the operator.

R1001 and R1011, in series with the grids of the push-| ull cathode-follower stage, are parasitic suppressors. Input cathode followers V)003A and VI003B are the two hah es o f a 12AT7 twin triode. The cathodes of the cathode I j

I- lowers are returned to ground through vertical dc balar ce control R1004, which is adjusted to equalize the dc voltoge

(about +68.5 volts) on the bases of delay-line driver tran is- tors Q1014 and 01024. The heaters o f V1003 are op era nd as part of the series string which receives power from ie

+ 100-volt dc supply. The use of dc on the heater prevc its changes in line voltage from affecting the gain of the verti al amplifier.

The balanced delay-line driver stage is a push-pull a n- plifier with an adjustable vertical gain control (R1017) c< n- nected in the emitter circuit of the two transistors. Gain is adjusted by controlling the amount of degeneration in I ie emitter circuit. Zener diode D1018 sets the operating poi its of the termination transistors on both ends of the delay lii e.

3-6

The RC networks in the collectors of Q1014, Q1024, Q1144,

Q1154, and in the emitter leads of Q1034 and Q1044 set the individual transistor operating points to achieve thermal balance. The 5-lurn center-tapped coils at the input of the delay line and the collector-base capacitance of the delay-line driver transistors form a T-section matching net­ work. C l029 provides a means of varying the impedance of the T section.

Vertical Output Am plifier. The vertical output amplifier must properly terminate the delay line and provide broad­ band am plifiication of the vertical signals. Proper termin­ ation of the delay line is obtained by connecting forward- termination transistors in a common-base configuration. The common-base configuration also operates well in broad band am plifier applications. To help meet the broad-band re­ quirement, the collector load circuit of the termination transis­ tors contains RC low-frequency compensation networks, and in addition, LR network in the collectors of transistors

Q1034 and Q1044 compensate for losses due to skin effect within the delay line.

Following the forward-termination am plifier is a wide­ band am plifier stage consisting of Q1074 and Q1084 and as­ sociated elements. High-frequency compensation in this stage is provided by shunt peaking coils LI072 in the collector circuits. The high-frequency response is varied by adjusting

C1076, which provides variable high-frequency degeneration in the emitter circuit o f Q1074 and Q1084.

The output stage o f the vertical am plifier is a transis­ torized equivalent o f a push-pull cascode amplifier. This circuit configuration is used to match the low impedance of the transistorized vertical-amplifier system to the higher impedance required at the crt vertical deflection plates.

High-frequency compensation is provided by rc networks between the collector of the driving transistor and the emitter of the driven transistor on each side. C l 105 and Cl 106 provide a means of varying the high-frequency response of the output stage. The outputs from 01114 and 01134 are connected to the deflection plate of the crt via series- peaking coils LI 115 and LI 135.

Trigger-Pickoff Circuit. The trigger-pickoff circuit provides reverse termination for the delay line as mentioned in the preceding paragraphs. The input stage of the trigger-pickoff circuit, which provides the deloy-line reverse termination, is a common-base circuit. The output stage o f the trigger- pickoff circuit is a push-pull emitter-follower am plifier that not only provides trigger signals to the two time bases, but supplies the VERT SIG OUT jack with a vertical signal and drives position-indicator am plifier V I 184.

Main Time Base (B)

The main time base (B) consists of the B sweep trigger and the B sweep generator circuits. The B sweep trigger circuit is a wide band hybrid am plifier driving a tunnel diode. The B sweep trigger circuit includes controls for selecting the type, source, and level of the trigger to be used, and circuit elements for regenerating the selected trigger into a pulse suitable for triggering the 8 sweep gen­ erator. The B sweep generator circuit is basically a M iller- runup circuit. The B sweep generator provides ramp voltages for the horizontal deflection system, alternate-trace sync pulses, unblanking pulses, and + B gate pulses.

Trigger Generator

The input to the B sweep trigger circuit (see B Sweep

Trigger Generator schematic) is selected by SOURCE switch

SW1 from the trigger-pickoff circuit in the vertical am pli­ fier, the trigger output of the vertical plug-in preamplifier, the power transformer for line triggering, or from the frent- panel TRIGGER INPUT connector. COUPLING switch SW5 permits further selection of the type of triggering signal; either ac, ac with low frequencies rejected, or dc. Once the type and source of triggering signal has been selected, the slope on which triggering is desired is selected by SLOPE switch SWIO. The level of the triggering signal requited by the B sweep trigger circuit is selected by adjusting TRIG­

GERING LEVEL control R15. After this triggering signal l as been selected by the foregoing controls and switches, it is applied to trigger input am plifier V24.

Circuit Description SN 6740-U P . V24A and V24B fo.m a switching comparator. The voltage level at which the com­ parator switches is set by the B TRIGGERING LEVEL con­ trol R15. V24 drives Q34 and Q44, which form a cum nt type switching comparator. Q34 and Q44 drive tunnel fi- ode D45 which in turn drives sweep gating tunnel diode

D85.

If no triggering signal is applied to V24 the stage con­ sisting of V24A and V24B is unbalanced. One section (which one depends upon the setting of the B SLOPE and B TRIG­

GERING LEVEL controls) is conducting more current than 'he other. The voltages at the plates of V24A and V24B shoi Id therefore be different. However, diodes D2I and D22 clamp the two plate voltages to within 0.3 volt o f each other, with the plate o f the section which is conducting the m ist current being the most negative.

The second stage, made up of Q34 and 044, is a'so unbalanced. The transistor whose base is the most nega­ tive conducts most o f the current supplied by R36. This

Fig. 3-2. Tunn*l died * che racttriitlci.

Circuit Description— Typo 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 current is not sufficient to cause the conducting transistor to saturate. The conducting transistor merely acts as a constant current source.

Tunnel diode D45 is biased to its low voltage state by current through R32, R33, R45, and R42. If the comparator stages are unbalanced in such a manner as to cause Q34 to conduct, an additional current flows through D45. This additional current biases D45 to its high voltage state (see

Fig. 3-2 for funnel diode characteristic curve).

When the current through D45 reaches a total of 10 mA the voltage across D45 w ill suddenly increase to approxi­ mately 0.5 volts. This sudden voltage change is coupled to the sweep gating tunnel diode D85 by C56, D59, and

C57. C56 differentiates the triggering signal which pro­ vides a fast rising pulse for D85. L56 and the low imped­ ance of conducting diode D57 decrease the fall time of the triggering pulse. D59 ensures that D85 is only triggered when D45 turns on, and not when D45 turns off.

Circuit O peration SN 1 0 1 -6 7 3 9 . In operation, V24A and

V24B form a push-pull am plifier which drives a push-pull input, single-ended output amplifier consisting of 034 and

Q44. Tunnel diode D45 is biased at its low-voltage state

(see Fig. 3-2 for trigger tunnel-diode curve) by current flow through the voltage divider consisting of R44, R45, R47, and

R48. When the desired slope of the triggering signal se­ lected arrives at the grids of V24, V24B and Q44 are biased into conduction. The conduction of Q44 increases the cur­ rent flow through D45, and D45 switches to its high-voltage state. The sudden voltage change across D45 as it switches to its high-voltage state produces a uniform fast-rising trig ­ ger pulse which is used to trigger the main time base (B) sweep generator.

Sweep Generator

For purposes of explanation, assume that the HORI­

ZONTAL DISPLAY switch (see B Sweep-Generator schematic) is in the B posittion, the SINGLE SWEEP switch is in the

NORMAL position, the TRIGGERING MODE switch is in the TRIG position and that no trigger is being applied.

Under these conditions, V145A in the holdoff multivibrator is conducting and V145B is cut off. The paths for the cur­ rent in V145A are from the -1 5 0 -v o lt supply through RI64 and D163 in parallel with R163. When V145A is conduct­ ing and no trigger is being received from the trigger gen­ erator, D85 is in its low-voltage state since the dc current supplied from the + 100-volt supply through R82 and R81 is less than the peak current of D85. Under these conditions,

Q84 is cut off. For SN 12480 and above, the collector volt­ age of Q84 is positive, thereby forward biasing Q86, D86,

Q89 and Q103. (For units with serial numbers below SN

12480, the collector voltage of Q84 is positive, thereby for­ ward biasing D86, Q89 and Q103.) M iller tube V91 is con­ ducting. The circuit is now ready to be triggered.

Assuming that a trigger pulse is now applied, the positive trigger from the B sweep trigger circuit is coupled through

C56 to L56 and D57. C56 and L56 form a differentiating network that narrows the trigger pulse to approximately

4 nsec in width. The sharpened trigger pulse passes through

D59 to tunnel diode D85 and causes D85 to switch to its high state, where it remains after the trigger pulse decays to zero. When D85 switches to its high stale, G84 is biased into saturation and the voltage change across 0 8 4 applies

®!

3 -7

Circuit Description— Type 547/R M 547

forward bias to Q173 and reverse biases Q89, Q103, ind

D86. When D86 is reverse biased, the voltage on the • irid o f V91 goes negative and the M iller circuit starts to run up.

As the voltage on the cathode o f V93A goes positive, it starts to charge timing capacitor C90 through D98. At high sweep rates, boot-strap capacitor C94 couples the ri: ing cathode voltage to the plate circuit of V91 and effectively in­ creases the plate supply voltage for V91, compensating for losses introduced by stray capacitance. In addition, the positive-going cathode voltage of V93A forward biases DI29 and starts putting a positive voltage on the grid of V145K in the holdoff multivibrator. A t a point determined by sweep- length resistor R125, the rising positive voltage biases VI 158 into conduction, and the holdoff m ultivibrator changes stite, cutting o ff V145A. When V145A cuts off, its cathode volMge drops to —20 volts and reverse biases D85 and Q84. As

Current flow through Q84 ceases, the voltage increase across it again forward biases D86. When D86 becomes forward biased, it applies a positive-going voltage to the iirid of V91 which resets the M iller circuit and ends the sw< ep.

Disconnect diode D100 ensures that the sweep starts from the same voltage point each time. Q103 is included in the circuit to reduce the amount o f current that D100 has to switch, and thereby improves the linearity at the start of the sweep.

When the sweep ends, V145B has control of the holtioff multivibrator, and remains in control until the charge on holdoff capacitor C130 discharges through Rl30. Dui ng the time that V145B has control of the holdoff m ultivibraor, funnel diode D85 cannot be triggered; but when the holooff capacitor discharges to the point where V145A can again as­ sume control, D85 is again biased to a point where it • an accept another trigger.

Automatic Stability Circuit. Q65, Q75, and associaed circuit components form a monostable multivibrator 1'iat controls the stability of the B sweep generator. When 'he trigger MODE switch is in the TRIG position, the swi'ch grounds the collector of Q75 and disables the automatic stability feature of the Type 547. When the triggering MODE switch is in the AUTO STABILITY position, the sweep genera­ tor free runs if no trigger pulses are received from the b ig ­ ger generator.

In normal operation, Q65 is conducting due to the posit ve voltage applied to its base. Q75 is normally cut off <ue to its base being grounded through R69. When the trigger

MODE switch is set to the AUTO position, C76 starts to charge through R76. When the voltage across C76 excei ds the breakdown of Zener diode D76, D76 breaks down and provides an additional current path for tunnel diode D15.

The additional current through D85 causes it to switch to its high state and start the sweep. When the sweep ends and 'he holdoff multivibrator switches, the voltage on the cathcde of VI45A drops to approxim ately —20 volts, reverse bias ng

D85. When the holdoff period ends, the cathode voltage of

V145A goes slightly positive, and the current through C 76 again switches D85. If no trigger is applied, the cycle e- peats only if the trigger MODE switch is in the AUTO pc si- tion.

When a trigger pulse is received at T52, a negative out­ put from the secondary is applied to the base of 0 6 5 and causes the monostable multivibrator to switch. W th

Q65 now cut off, its collector voltage goes more positive, and C67 charges through R69, applying a positive voltage to the base of Q75. The positive voltage on the base of Q75 biases it to saturation, and Q75 provides a low-resistance path that discharges C76 and reverse biases D79 and D76.

W ith the collector of Q75 below the D76 breakdown voltage, the collector circuit does not provide switching current for tunnel diode D85, so the only way D85 can be switched is by the application of a trigger pulse. If no further trigger pulses are received, 0 7 5 is kept in saturation until the charge current for C67 decays and removes the positive voltage from the base of 075.

During the charge time of C67, Q65 is kept cut o ff by the forward voltage drop across D71. When the decaying charge current removes saturation bias from Q75, the voltage drop across D71 decreases and permits 0 6 5 to conduct, and the m ultivibrator switches back to its normal state. If no further trigger pulses are received, C76 charges through R76 and R75 until D76 again breaks down and provides switch­ ing current for D85.

Unblanking Circuit. W ith the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch set in the B position, an unblanking pulse is generated and applied to the ert unblanking circuit during B sweep time.

The unblanking pulse is initiated when tunnel diode D85 switches to its high state and biases Q84 into conduction.

When Q84 conducts, its collector voltage drops and removes the cutoff bias from Q173, biasing 0173 into conduction.

When Q173 conducts, it removes the negative bias from the emitter of Q184 and the grid of V193A. The base of Q184 is negative by the amount o f forward voltage drop across

DI82, while the emitter is positive by the amount of forward voltage drop across D183. The sum of the forward voltage drops across the two diodes is sufficient to bias Q184 into conduction. When Q184 conducts, it puts a positive-going voltage on the grid of cathode follower V195B, and the positive-going voltage is coupled to the crt-unblanking supply.

Single-Sweep Circuit. When single-sweep operation is desired, NORMAL-SINGLE SWEEP-RESET switch SW135 is set to the SINGLE SWEEP position. When SW135 is pushed to the RESET position it operates switch SW369 which dis­ charges C369 (see A Sweep Generator schematic) through

R369, R368, and R367, generating a positive pulse which is applied through Cl 66 and D164 to the cathode of holdoff tube V145B. The positive pulse on the cathode o f V I 458 causes the holdoff multivibrator to switch, and V145A biases sweep tunnel diode D85 to the ready point as previously ex­ plained. Since Q84 and V145B are both cut off, the positive voltage on the collector of 0 8 4 and the voltage on the plate of V145A combine through R87 and R142 produce turn-on bias for Q89. When Q89 conducts, it completes the circuit for the NE-23 READY lamp (B89). W ith the application of a trig ­ ger pulse, Q84 conducts and the voltage on its collector drops, removing the bias on 0 8 9 and thereby extinguishing the READY lamp. The runup of the M iller circuit causes the hold-off mulitvibrator to switch, and V145B takes control.

NORMAL-SINGLE SWEEP-RESET switch SW135 applies a positive voltage through D132 to the grid of V145B, and this positive voltage prevents the holdoff multivibrator from re­ setting until NORMAL-SINGLE SWEEP-RESET switch SW369 has been moved to either the RESET or NORMAL position.

3 -8

M ain Time Base IB ) Sweep Timing. The sweep rate ( he rate at which the spot moves across the face of the crt’ is determined by the rate at which the timing capacitor end timing resistor permit the M iller circuit to run up. By means of

TIME/CM or DELAY TIME switch SW90 (see B Sweep Timing-

Switch schematic), both the size o f the capacitor being charged and the charging current can be selected to co er a wide range of sawtooth slopes (sweep rates). Note that

SW90 is connected so that switching 8 capacitors and 6 resistors provides 24 different sweep rates, varying fr>m

5 sec/cm to 0.1 ^sec/cm without magnification. The TIME/( M or DELAY TIME switch also selects the proper holdoff capaci­ tor and discharge resistor for the sweep rate in use.

Continuously variable uncalibrated sweep rates are pro­ vided by R90Z and SW90Z (VARIABLE control). When SW

90Z is switched to the UNCAL position, it removes the sh >rt from around R90Z and switches on UNCAL lamp B90W. By turning VARIABLE control R90Z, the charging time of the tim ­ ing capacitor selected by the TIME/CM or DELAY TitAE switch may be increased by a least 2.5 times the calibrated rate, providing continuously variable sweep rates.

Delay-Pickoff Circuit. The delay-pickoff circuit (see D e liy

Pickoff schematic) generates a trigger pulse that is delay id form the start of the B sweep by an amount determined i>y the settings o f the Main Time Base (B) TIME/CM or DELAY

TIME switch and the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial. A com­ parator in the delay-pickoff circuit continuously monitors Hie ramp output voltage of the main time base (B) M iller runup circuit and compares the ramp voltage with a voltage lev el established by the setting of the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial. When the ramp voltage biases V404A into conduction, the comparator switches a tunnel diode. The tunnel diode generates a trigger pulse that is delayed from the start of Hie

B sweep by the time it takes the ramp voltage to rise to a value approxim ately equal to the voltage established by Hie

DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial setting. After being amplified, the delayed trigger is applied through the HORIZONTAL

DISPLAY switch as a source of delayed trigger for the time base A generator, and to the DLY'D TRIG output connecter on the front panel for use in external equipment. Delayed trigger pulses are connected to the time base A sweup generator when the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch is in Hie

B INTENS BY 'A ', A DLY'D BY B positions, and the ALT posi­ tion between the two.

In actual operation, the comparator is longtailed through a constant-current tube that keeps the current through the comparator relatively constant despite the large volta-ie swings applied to the grids. The grid voltage of constant- current tube V93B is fixed at approximately —56 volts by the voltage divider consisting o f R406 and R407. W ith Hie grid o f V93B biased at approxim ately —56 volts, R409 mam- tains the current through V93B (and thereby the comparator tube) to approxim ately 5 ma.

Comparator tube V404 receives the ramp output of tne main time base (B) sweep generator on one grid and the voltage from the tap on delay-time heliopot R416 on the other. A t the start of the ramp, V404B is conducting ai d

V404A is cut off. Assume that the ramp input to the coi i- parator is increasing at the rate of 10 volts/msec, and the

DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial is set at 2.0 (2.0 is equal ’O

20 volts o f a 100-volt ramp), then the voltage on each gr d of the comparator becomes 20 volts, 2 msec after the ramp starts. At this point, V404A starts conducting. V404A draws

Circuit Description— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 current through R404, L404, and tunnel diode D405. The current flow through D405 causes it to switch to its high state, generating a sharp trigger pulse. R404 and L404 narrow the hysteresis zone of D405. The low resistance of R404 would attenuate the trigger pulse if it were not for the high-fre­ quency peaking effects o f L404. The trigger voltage devel­ oped across D405 is amplified by Q424 and applied to

Q433 through a differentiating network. The output of 0433 is applied to the DLY'D TRIG connector on the front panel and to the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch as previously mentioned.

Jack J435 provides a means of coupling in an externally- generated delayed trigger. Terminals B and C provide function information to the external trigger generator, and the externally-generated delayed trigger is applied to ter­ minal A. It is also necessary to apply sufficient dc bias to terminal A to back bias D433.

Time Base A

Time base A in the Type 547 is very similar to the main time base (B) and the circuit description for main time base

(B) generally applied to time base A. The two trigger-genera­ tor schematics, in particular, show few differences other than circuit symbols.

The major differences in the two time bases are 0344 and cathode follower V293B which appear on sweep generator

A but not on B, and Q184 (the function of which is described in the discussion of main time base (B) which appears on sweep generator B but not on A. 0344 is part o f the alter­ nate-sweep lockout circuit which is explained later in this section. Cathode follower V293B is a conventional long­ tailed cathode follower that provides a sample of the out­ put of the A sweep generator to the A SWEEP front-panel output connector.

Alternate Sweep Switching Circuit

The alternate sweep switching circuit gates the desired sweep voltage to the horizontal deflection plates o f the crt, provides trace-positioning voltages, and when a dual-channel vertical plug-in preamplifier is used, slaves the alternate trace multivibrator in the plug-in unit,

When the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch is in either ALT position, the alternate sweep switching circuit prevents

B sweep from being unblanked whenever A sweep is being displayed.

Sweep Switching M ultivibrator. The sweep-switching mul­ tivibrator (see Alternate Sweep Switching schematic) consis­ ting of Q465, Q475, and associated circuit components is a conventional bistable transistor multivibrator. In alternate- sweep operation, the multivibrator is switched by the trailing edge of a sweep-gating pulse from either time base. As the sweep-gating pulse ends and starts to go positive, Q464 is biased into conduction and applies a negative-going sig­ nal to the differentiating network consisting o f C459 and

R459. The sharpened pulse is applied through D469 and

D479 to the bases of both transistors in the multivibrator, cutting off the conducting transistor and turning on the other.

Assuming that Q465 is the conducting transistor, the re­ sistance between its emitter and collector is quite low, effectively grounding its collector. W ith the collector of

Q465 at ground, the voltage division across R467 and R479

&

3 -9

Circuit Description— Typo 547/R M 547

applies approxim ately —3 volts to the base o f Q475, keep­ ing it cut off. W ith Q475 cut off, the voltage division across R467 and R479 applies sufficient bias to the base of

Q465 to keep it saturated.

Sweep Gates. D46I, D462, D471, D472, and associated circuit components form an exclusive "o r" gate. W ith Q-165 saturated and Q475 at cutoff as described in the preceding paragraph, current flow through Q465 and D461 reverse biases D462, preventing the B sweep ramp voltage from pass­ ing through D462. W ith Q475 cut off, its collector voltagi- is held at approxim ately + 2 7 volts by Zener diode D475. This

+ 2 7 volts reverse biases D471. The A sweep circuit then for­ ward biases D472. D472 forward biased, the A sweep gati- is open, and the A sweep ramp voltage passes through to the horizontal amplifier. When Q475 is the conducting transisior, it forward biases D471 and reverse biases D472, closing the gate for the A sweep. When Q475 conducts, Q465 cuts off and opens the B sweep gate.

Trace-Separation Amplifier. In the ALT positions o f ihe

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch, the collector of Q475 is con­ nected through the switch to D482 and D492 in Ihe fra:e- separation amplifier. When Q475 is cut off, D482 and

0 * 9 2 are reverse biased, and the operating points of V494A end

V494B are determined by the setting of TRACE SEPARATIC >N control R484. The outputs of V494A and V494B are applied to opposite sides of the push-pull vertical am plifier and posi­ tion the A trace in accordance with the setting of the TRACE

SEPARATION control. When Q475 is saturated (during B sweep), D482 and D492 are forward biased, effectively grounding out the positioning voltage from the TRACE

SEPARATION control. Since Q475 alternates between cut­ off and saturation with the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch in the ALT positions as explained in Ihe preceding paia- graphs, the bias on trace-separation am plifier V494 is shifted in synchronism with the alternate sweeps, thus providing trace separation.

A Sweep Terminating Circuit. When the HORIZONTAL

DISPLAY switch is in B INTENS BY 'A' or the adjacent ALT position and the B sweep intensified by A sweep is being displayed, it is desirable that the A sweep be terminated not later than the end o f the B sweep. When the HORI­

ZONTAL DISPLAY switch is in either of the foregoing posi­ tions, the signal at the plate o f VI45A (in the B sweep-g< n- erator holdoff multivibrator) is coupled through the HORI­

ZONTAL DISPLAY switch and C449 to the base of Q444.

At the instant that the B sweep ends the B sweep-hold' >ff multivibrator switches, the voltage at the plate of V145A goes positive, and a differentiated positive spike is applied to

Q444. The positive spike is amplified and inverted by Q444, and the now negative spike is coupled through C441 and

D347 to the grid of V345B in the A sweep-holdoff m ulti/i- brator. If the A sweep-holdoff m ultivibrator has not >ef switched and stopped the A sweep, the negative spike from

Q444 triggers the sweep-holdoff multivibrator and stops the sweep. If the A sweep has not yet started, the negative pulse resets the A sweep-holdoff multivibrator.

When the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch is in the ALT posi­ tion (between B INTENS BY ‘A ’ and A DLY'D) some means must be used to disable the B sweep terminating pulse during the time that the delayed A sweep is being displayed. At this time, Q465 in the alternate-sweep switching multivibrator is saturated, so the B sweep terminating pulse is couph-d

3 -1 0

through D449 to the collector of Q465, where it is effectively grounded.

Alternate Trace Blanking. When the Type 547 is operated in the B INTENS BY 'A' — ALT — A DLY’D mode, it is necessary to keep the B sweep unblanking circuit cut o ff dur­ ing the part of the sweep-switching cycle in which only the delayed A sweep is displayed. Cutoff is accomplished by applying the positive A sweep-gating voltage from the collector o f 0475 to the base of 0184. When the HORI­

ZONTAL DISPLAY switch is in either ALT position, the A sweep-gate voltage taken from the collector of Q475 is applied through the switch to D481. When the A sweep-gate voltage is positive, D481 is forward biased, and applies the positive voltage through R181 to the base o f Q184.

The positive voltage applied to the base of Q184 during the time that the A sweep gate is open is sufficient to keep

01 84 cut o ff despite the unblanking signal from Q173.

Alternate-Sweep Lockout and Blanking Circuits

When alternate A and B sweeps are to be displayed, the horizontal am plifier and the ert must be time-shared between the two displays. Alternate-sweep lockout and blanking circuits are employed to ensure that the sweeps are displayed in proper sequence. The operations of the cir­ cuits for each position of the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch are described in the follow ing paragraphs.

A Position. In this position of the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch, only the A sweep is displayed. The main time base

(B) generator is blanked out by grounding the collector of

Q465 in the alternate-sweep switching circuit. In the A posi­ tion of the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch (SW530), the collector of Q564 is grounded through terminals 1 and 5 of wafer 8F. Grounding the collector of Q465 closes the B sweep gate composed o f D461 and D462. W ith the B sweep gate closed, any output from the main time base (6) genera­ tor does not get through to the horizontal amplifier.

B Position. This position of the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch grounds the collector o f Q475, closing the A sweep gate composed of D471 and D472. In this case, the output of the A sweep generator is prevented from reaching the horizontal amplifier.

A — ALT— B Position. When the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch is placed in the ALT position midway between A and

B, the horizontal am plifier and ert must be time-shared be­ tween the two time-base sweep generators. Note that in this position of the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch, the collec­ tor o f Q475 is connected through D133and terminals 9 and 11 o f wafer 4R to the B sweep-holdoff m ultivibrator. Likewise, the collector of Q465 is connected through terminals 3 and

10 o f wafer 4F to the holdoff circuit of A sweep-holdoff multivibrator. This means that at the instant o f turn on, the nonconducting transistor of the alternate-sweep switching multivibrator permits a lockout voltage to be applied to the holdoff multivibrator to which it is connected. The switching inputs to the sweep-switching m ultivibrator are taken from the plate of V345B in the A sweep-holdoff mul­ tivibrator, and from the plate of V145A in the B sweep-hold­ o ff multivibrator. If, at the instant of turn on, no triggering signals are being applied and both TRIGGERING MODE switches are in the TRIG position, there is no sweep. Under

0 *

these conditions, if Q465 in the alternate-sweep switching multivibrator is the conducting transistor, the main time base

(6) sweep generator is locked out and cannot be triggr red until A sweep generator has been triggered. If a trig g rr is now applied to the A sweep generator, it runs up, its fv>ld- off m ultivibrator switches, and a switching signal is sent by the holdoff multivibrator to the alternate-sweep switching multivibrator via Q464. B sweep can now be triggered. If

Q475 is the conducting transistor at the moment of turn on, and the TRIGGERING MODE switches are in the TRIG posi­ tion, then the A sweep generator cannot be triggered i ntil the main time base (B) has been triggered.

B INTENS BY ‘A ' Position. In this position o f the H( >RI-

ZONTAL DISPLAY switch and with the TRIGGERING MODE switch in the TRIG position, the pulse from the delay-pichoff circuit switches the A sweep-holdoff m ultivibrator, but the sweep wails for a trigger before starting to run up. When the A sweep generator completes its runup and goes nto holdoff, this fact is signaled to the main time base (B) gen­ erator by Q344. The conduction of V345A during th< A sweep-holdoff time is sufficient to reverse bias D356, cut­ ting o ff Q344. Cutting off Q344 permits the voltage at the junction of R135 and R136 to go more positive, keeping the main time base (B) sweep generator locked in holdoff. As the holdoff capacitor in the A sweep generator discharges, the voltage on the grid of V345A falls, decreasing the cur­ rent flow through V345A. When the holdoff capacitor in the

A sweep generator is fina lly discharged, the current flow through V345A has decreased to where D356 is no longer reverse biased, and Q344 conducts, removing the lockout voltage from the main time base (B) generator holdoff mul­ tivibrator. The main time base (B) generator resets and is triggerable.

B INTENS BY ‘A ’ - ALT — A DLY’D Position. In this posi­ tion of the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch, the alternate- sweep switching multivibrator alternately gates A sweep de­ layed by B and B sweep intensified by A into the horizontal amplifier. Note that in this mode of operation the main time base (B) generator sends a sweep-terminating pulse to th i- A sweep-generator holdoff circuit at the end of the intensified

B sweep, and that A sweep-generator holdoff multivibrotor keeps the main time base (B) sweep generator locked out (in holdoff) until the A sweep generator has completed its hold- o ff period and is triggerable. The foregoing actions can be determined by tracing the signals through wafers 7R, 8F,

8R, 4F, 4R, 2R, and IF of the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch.

B INTENS BY 'A ' Position. In this mode o f operation, the collector o f 0475 in the alternate-sweep switching mul­ tivibrator is grounded through the contacts of wafer 8R, ond the A sweep gate is closed. Contacts 5 and 10 of wafer

4F apply a positive voltage to the grid o f V345A in the A sweep-holdoff multivibrator. The positive voltage on 'he grid of V345A assures that the A sweep generator w ill s ay in holdoff until the delayed trigger pulse from the delay-pi;k- off circuit overrides the holdoff voltage and resets the he Id- off m ultivibrator. If the TRIGGERING MODE switch is in the TRIG position, runup of the A sweep generator does lot commence until a trigger is received from the A sweep-tug­ ger circuit. At the end of the B sweep, Q444 in the alterncte- sweep switching circuit sends a termination pulse to he grid of V345B (in the A sweep-generator holdoff mult vi­ brator) that resets the holdoff m ultivibrator and termino es the A sweep.

Circuit Description— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

A DLY'D Position. In this position of the HORIZONTAL

DISPLAY switch, the collector of Q465 in the alternate-sweep switching multivibrator is grounded, closing the B sweep gate.

The A sweep-generator holdoff multivibrator is kept in hold­ off by a positive voltage applied through wafer 4F o f the

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch, and, as in the case where the B sweep is intensified by the A sweep, can be brought out o f holdoff only by a reset pulse from the delay-pickoff cir­ cuit. When the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch is in the A

DLY'D position, the action starts when the main time base

(B) generator receives a trigger and starts its runup. After a period of time selected by the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial, the delay-pickoff circuit generates a pulse that takes the A sweep generator out of holdoff. If the TIME BASE

A-TRIGGERING-MODE switch is in the AUTO STABILITY position, the A sweep generator starts its runup.

Alternate-Trace Sync Amplifier

The alternate-trace sync am plifier (see Interconnecting

Jack J11 schematic) amplifies and shapes the alternate-trace sync pulses and applies them to the vertical plug-in pream­ plifier, provides a sample o f the pulse to the ert for blank­ ing purposes, and amplifies the chopped blanking pulses from the vertical plug-in preamplifer for application to the crt.

Horizontal Amplifier

The dc-coupled horizontal am plifier (see Horizontal Am­ plifier schematic) consists o f a transistor input amplifier, an emitter follower, a transistor paraphase amplifier, a push- pull vacuum-tube output amplifier, a pair of output cathode followers, and a capacitance-driver tube. In addition, the

Type 547 contains a cathode-coupled pream plifier that is used to am plify externally applied horizontal deflection sig­ nals. The input to the horizontal am plifier is received from either the alternate-sweep switching circuit or the external

HORIZ INPUT connector, depending upon the setting of the

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch.

Input Stages. The selected input signal is applied to the base o f Q534 along with dc-positioning voltages from the horizontal positioning controls. The composite signal output of Q534 is applied to emitter follower Q543, and from that transistor to the paraphase amplifier. Negative feedback from the emitter of Q543 to the base of Q534 keeps the in­ put and output impedance of the two stages low. R544 in the feedback loop provides a means of adjusting the amount of feedback, thereby providing am plifier gain adjustment.

Paraphase Am plifier. Q554, Q564, and associated circuit components form a paraphase am plifier that splits the signal from 0543 into push-pull output. The signal from Q554 to

Q564 is coupled through the emitter circuit, and by changing the value o f the coupling resistor, the gain o f the paraphase am plifier is changed to provide sweep magnification. Four selectable values of coupling resistor are available provid­ ing X I, X2, X5, or X10 sweep magnification.

The feedback loop from the collector o f Q554 stabilizes the gain and balance of the paraphase amplifier. D542 and

D561 provide base-operating bias. The feedback loops from the output cathode followers (V574B and V584B) to the emit­ ters of Q554 and Q564 assist in stabilizing the gain of the horizontal amplifier.

3-11

Circuit Description— Type 547/R M 547

Output Am plifier and Cathode Followers. The ramp-volt­ age outputs of the paraphase am plifier are applied to tile grids o f amplifiers V574A and V584A. The ramp voltages are amplified by the two triodes, which then apply die ramp voltages to the output cathode followers. To main­ tain the desired linearity at high sweep rates, part o f the output from each am plifier is bypassed around the cathode followers through small variable capacitors C572 and C5I<2.

C576 and C586 together with stray capacitance across R5'6 and R586 form a capacitance bridge to provide correct high- frequency feedback.

Capacitance Driver. The cathode o f V574B drives the left- hand deflection plate and, during the sweep, the cathode voltage should go linearly in a negative direction. At hiqh sweep rates, when V574B tries to drive the deflection plote negative, the deflection-plate capacitance and the output capacitance of cathode follower V574B tend to distort the ideal linear ramp voltage into an rc discharge curve. I'o overcome this tendency toward nonlinearity, the positive­ going ramp voltage at the cathode of V584B is applied through C591 to the grid of capacitance driver tube V5P.9.

The positive-going voltage on the grid o f V589 forces it into heavy conduction, and the current supplied through the tube provides extra current to the cathode o f V574B and helps to discharge the capacitance in the output o f V574B. Since the ert is blanked during the return trace, there is no need for a similar current driver at the cathode of V584B.

External Horizontal Preamplifier. The preamplifier applies external horizontal deflection voltages through the HORI­

ZONTAL DISPLAY switch to the grid of V514B. For large- amplitude signals, a X I0 attenuator position is provided . >n the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch. V514B and V514A form a cathode-follower grounded-grid amplifier, with the gain con­ trolled by adjusting the value of the coupling resistor be­ tween the two cathodes. In this case, R511 provides at leost a 10:1 range of adjustment. The output o f V514A is applic d through the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to the base of

Q534.

Amplitude Calibrator

The amplitude calibrator in the Type 547 is a 1-kc squarn- wave generator (see Amplitude Calibrator schematic) thot provides both voltage and a 5-ma current output to the front-panel connectors. The voltage output is taken from the CAL OUT connector on the front panel, where either a selectable-amplitude squarewave or a steady + 100-volt tic reference voltage is available. By turning the AMPLITUDE

CALIBRATOR switch, the amplitude o f the square-wave out­ put may be varied from 0.2 mvolt to 100 volts peak-to-peak.

The current output is applied to the link marked 5 mA Q, with the arrow indicating conventional current flow. When the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch is in the 100 V DC posi­ tion, the link has 5m a dc flowing through it; when the switch is in the 5 mA Q position, the current through the link is in the form of a 1 -kc, 5 ma square wave.

CAU TIO N

The link is designed fo r use w ith a snap-on current pro be and does n o t un plug.

Square-W ave Generator. The square-wave generator is an astable multivibrator direct-coupled to a cathode follower.

V935A and V945 are the multivibrator tubes, with the screen of V945 serving as an anode and furnishing feedback to

V935A. The plate of V945 operates as an electron-coupled amplifier. The time constants in the grid circuits of the tubes are different to compensate for the difference in their char­ acteristics. When the amplitude calibrator is turned on, the multivibrator cathodes are returned directly to the dc-coupled

-1 5 0 -v o lt supply. Since the plate load and grid resistors are grounded, this means that the supply potential o f the m ultivibrator is 150 volts. The plate o f V945 operates from the +225-volf supply, but is clamped slightly above 100 volts by D942 and D948. The voltage on the plate of V945 swings from about —30 volts to about + 1 0 2 volts. The plate of

V945 is coupled through Zener diode D948 to the grid of cathode follower V935B. CAL AMPL control R943 is adjusted so that when the signal to V935 is positive, its cathode volt­ age rises to +100-volts. When the signal from the V945 plate goes negative, V935B is cut off and the cathode volt­ age goes to ground potential.

Output Level Selection. The cathode load for V935B is essentially the string o f precision resistors starting with R950 and ending with R958. The junctions of the precision resis­ tors are connected to the CAL OUT connector through

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch SW950. The values of the precision resistors are selected to give output amplitude steps in multiples of 1, 2, or 5. In the steps from 200 mvolts to

100 volts, the junctions o f the precision resistors are switched through R962 to the CAL OUT connector, while in the steps from 0.2 to 100 mvolts, an additional divider with a ratio of

1000:1 is inserted between the precision resistors and the

CAL OUT connector. In the 0.2 mvolt to 200 mvolt range, the output impedance is 50

Cl.

3 -1 2

&

SECTION 4

MAINTENANCE

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

CAU TIO N

Turn o f f po w e r b e fore rem oving or rep la cing parts.

General Information

The Type 547 is a stable instrument and w ill provide m^iny hours of trouble-free operation. However, to maintain measurement accuracy, a visual inspection and a calibrai on check should be made after each 500 hours o f operation or every six months if used intermittently. The calibration procedures include steps for checking the operation of var­ ious circuits. Minor troubles not apparent during regi lar operation w ill often be revealed during calibration. M ojor troubles in the instrument are often isolated or eliminated by recalibrating the instrument.

Visual Inspection

The Type 547 should be inspected occasionally for s ich defects as broken connections, broken or damaged ceramic strips, improperly seated tubes or transistors, and h< at- damaged parts.

The remedy for most visible defects is obvious; howe' er, particular care must be taken if heat-damaged parts ore detected. Overheating is usually only a symptom o f trouble.

For this reason, it is essential to determine the actual cause of overheating before the heat-damaged parts are replaced; otherwise, the damage may be repeated.

Cleaning

The Type 547 must be cleaned as often as operating con­ ditions require. Accumulations of dirt in the instrument < an cause overheating and component breakdown. Dirt on he components acts as an insulating blanket (preventing efficient heat dissipation) and provides conducting paths for e'ec- tricity. Dirt in the air filter chokes the flow of cooling air and leads to excessive operating temperature.

A ir Filter. The air filter should be visually checked every few weeks and cleaned if dirty. More frequent inspections and cleaning are required under servere operating conditions.

To clean the filter, wash it out as you would a pla.tic sponge. Rinse the filter and let it dry. Coat the dry finer with fresh "Filter— Kote" (Tektronix art Number 006-580) or

"Handi-Koter". (These products are available from the lo :al representative o f the Research Products Corporation, end from some air-conditioner suppliers.) Let the filter dry thoroughly before reinstalling.

Exterior. Loose dust accumulating on the outside of he

Type 547 can be removed with a cloth or small paint bash.

The paint brush is particularly useful for dislodging dust on and around the front-panel controls. Stubborn dirt can be removed with a soft cloth dampened in a mild solution of water and detergent. Abrasive cleaners should not be used.

Clean the face of the crt with a soft, lint-free cloth damp­ ened with denatured alcohol.

Interior. Although the air entering the Type 547 is filtered, some dust w ill eventually penetrate into the interior of the instrument. This dust should be removed occasionally due to its conductivity under high humidity conditions. The best way to clean the interior of the equipment is to first carefully vacuum all accessible areas and then blow away the remain­ ing dust with dry low-pressure compressed air. Avoid the use of high-velocity air which might damage some of the components. Remove stubborn dirt with a soft paint brush or a cloth dampened with a mild water and detergent solution.

Pay special attention to high-voltage circuits, including parts inside the high-voltage shield. Arcing in the high-volt­ age circuits due to dust or other causes may produce false sweep triggering resulting in an unstable crt display.

Lubrication

The fan motor bearings should be lubricated every three or four months with a few drops of light machine oil (see

Fig. 4-1). Failure to lubricate the bearings periodically can cause the fan to slow down or stop.

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

General Information

Many components in the Type 547 are mounted in a par­ ticular way to reduce stray inductance and capacitance.

W hile removal or replacement procedures for most parts in the Type 547 are obvious, remember to duplicate lead length, lead dress, and location of the original component when installing replacement parts. Since components o f the same type may exhibit slightly different characteristics, it is desirable to check the calibration of the Type 547 after completion of repairs.

Component Numbering

The component number of each electrical part is shown on the circuit diagrams. The follow ing chart lists the com­ ponent numbers associated with each circuit:

Numbers less than 100------ B Sweep Trigger Circuit

100 — series numbers------ B Sweep Generator

200 — series numbers------ A Sweep Trigger Circuit

300 — series numbers------ A Sweep Generator Circuit

400 — series numbers------ Alternate-Sweep Switching Cir­ cuit

500 — series numbers------ Horizontal A m plifier Circuit

600 — and 700 — series numbers------ Low-Voltage Power

800 — series numbers------ Crt Circuit

900 — series numbers------ Calibrator

1000 — and 1100 — series numbers ------ Vertical Am plifier

4-1

Maintenance— Type 547/R M 547

lubrlceHen Point*

Pig 4 - 1 . Pen m o to r lu b r ic a t io n p o in t *

Soldering Precautions

In the production of Tektronix initrum enti, a spocial silver-bearing solder is used to establish a bond to the ceramic terminal strips. This bond may be broken by re­ peated use o f ordinary tin-lead solder, or by excessive heat­ ing of the terminal strip with a soldering iron. Occasional use of ordinary 60-40 solder w ill not break the bond unless excessive heat is applied, but it is advisable to stock solder containing about 3% silver for the maintenance of Tektronix instruments. This solder may be purchased directly from

Tektronix in one-pound rolls; order by Part Number 251-514.

Because o f the shape of the ceramic-strip terminals, it is recommended that a soldering iron with a wedge-shaped lip be used. A wedge-shaped tip allow s the heat to be concen­ trated on the solder in the terminals and reduces the amount of hoot required. It is important to use as little heat as pos­ sible while producing a full-flow joint.

Tho follow ing procedure it recommended for removing or replacing components mounted on ceramic strips:

1 Use a 50- to 75-wott soldering iron.

2. Tin the tip with solder containing about 3% silver.

3. Use long-nose pliers for a heat sink. Attach pliers be­ tween the component and the point where heat is applied.

4. Apply heat directly to the solder in the terminal without touching the ceramic. Do not twist the iron in the notch as this may chip or breok the ceramic strip.

5. A p p ly only enough heat to make the solder flow freely.

6. Do not attempt to fill the notch on the strip with solder; instead ap ply only enough solder to cover the wires adequately and form a small fille t on the wire. O ver­ fillin g the notches may result in crocked terminal strips.

If the leod extends beyond the solder joint, clip the excess as close to the joint os possible. Remove a ll wire clippings from the chassis.

Tubes and Transistors

Tubes or transistors should not be replaced unless they are actually defective. If tubes or transistors are removed and found to be acceptable, be sure to return them to their original sockets Tube or transistor-tester checks on the lubes or transistors used in the Type 547 are not recommended.

Testers may indicate a tube or transistor to be defective when it is operating satisfactorily in a circuit, or may fa ll to in­ dicate tube or transistor defects which affect the performance o f the circuits. It is recommended that tubes and transistors be checked by substitution. If the tube or transistor is good, return it to its socket. Unnecessary replacement of tubes or transistors is not only expensive but may also result in need less recalibration o f the Instrument.

W hen installing replacement transistors on heat sinks in the instrument, the bottom of the transistor where it con­ tacts the heat sink should be coated with silicone grease. If a heat sink has been replaced along with the transistor, then that area o f the heat sink which contacts the chassis of the instrument should also be coated with silicone grease.

W a fe r Switches

Individual wafers are norm ally not replaced In the switch assemblies. If one wafer is defective, the entire switch assembly should be replaced. Switches can bo ordered from Tektronix either wired or unwired. Refer to the ports list in Section 6 for w ired and unwired switch part numbers

The wafer switches shown on the schematics are coded to indicate the position of the wafer on the switch. The wafers are numbered from front to rear (i.e., the number I wafer is always closest to the front ponol). The lotters F and R indicate the front or rear o f the wafer. For example, code designation of 3R means the rear side of the third wafer from the front panel.

Cathode-Ray Tube

To remove and replace the cothode-ray tube, perform the follow ing procedure:

W A R N IN G

Be c a re fu l w h en h a n d lin g a crt. A v o id s trik in g it on a n y o b je c t th a t m ig h t cause it to crack and im p lo d e . F lyin g glass from an im p lo d in g crt can cause serious in ju ry . Use s a fe ty glasses o r a plastic face mask fo r p ro te c tio n ,

1. Remove the crt bezel nuts, bezel, and plastic polarized light filter (see Fig. 4-2).

2. Remove plastic eyebrow and retaining spring from the top o f the crt (see Fig. 4-2).

4-2

Crt

S o<k.t

Maintenance— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

V ie w in g hoi# fo r erf b o s * d a m p K r * w .

t * t , Crt b t i t l o n d t y t b t t w Of r« n§ » m # ni

M o u n tin g u r t w i fo r erf b o s * d a m p brocket

3. Remove crt anode leod, ditconnect a ll lead* to the neck o f the crt.

NOTE

Do not disconnect th e crt tra c e -ro ta tio n coil leads.

4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen crt base clomp

(see Fig. 4-3).

5. W ith your left hand, wiggle the crt socket (see Fig. 4-3) to ensure that the base of the crt is loose in the base clamp.

6. W ith a chisel-tipped plastic or wooden dowel, carefully work the crt socket loose from the crt base

7. Grasp the face o f the crt with the right hand. Push the crt carefully towords the front o f the Type 547 with the left hand. Be careful not to bend the neck pins. Re­ move the crt through the front o f the oscilloscope.

8. Before reinstalling the crt, dust talcum powder on the crt base. This keeps the base o f the crt from sticking to the neoprene bushing Inside the base dam p

9. Carefully insert the new tube into the shield and the tube base clamp. Keep the anode button in line with the anode connector hole so that the button is oligned with the hole when the crt is fully inserted.

NOTE

M oke sure th a t the crt bose c la m p is loose enough to pe rm it th e crt bose to slide th ro u g h the ne oprene bushing in side the base cla m p.

® !

Fig 4 -9 . lo o « * n in g Ik * erf b o s * clom p

10. Connect the tube socket lo the tub# base Check that the socket is fully seated.

11. A lign the crt so that the horizontal graticule lines are parallel w ith the top o f the front panel. Push the crt inward until the crt face protrudes exactly ’/ is " beyond the front panel.

NOTE

If the crt face is no t p a ra lle l w ith the fro n t o f the oscillo scop e, use a V*4" h e x a g o n o l w rench to loosen th e tw o m ou n tin g screws th o t fasten the base c la m p to its m ou n tin g bro c k e t (see Fig. 4 - 3 ) .

The bose cla m p a n d crt base m ay n o w be moved r a d ia lly to a lig n the face o f th e crt p a ra lle l w ith the fro n t o f th e oscilloscope.

12. Reconnect the anode and neck pin leads (observe color code).

13. Install eyebrow and eyebrow retainer spring. Align the crt so that the front surfaces o f the light pipe and eye­ brow are flush.

14. Tighten the base clamp.

15. Turn on the oscilloscope. O btain a free-running sweep on the crt.

4 -3

Maintenance— Type 547/R M 547

16. Check the alignment o f the trace with the graticule linss.

If the trace is not parallel with the graticule lines, align the trace with the TRACE ROTATION control.

17. Replace plastic polarized light filter, crt bezel and betel nuts.

Graticule Lamps

Proper illumination of the crt graticule depends upon he proper positioning o f the graticule lamps. When replac ng graticule lamps, slide the lamp and sockets in or out u itil the filament of the lamp is at the middle of the light-p pe thickness.

Ceramic Terminal Strips

To remove a ceramic terminal strip, first unsolder all le< ds and components connected to it. Use diagonal cutters to :ut off one side o f each stud holding the strip. This frees he strip, and the remainder of the stud can then be pulled f ee of the chassis with a pair o f pliers. The spacers may cone out with the studs; if not, they can be pulled out separatt ly.

If they are not damaged, the spacers may be used with he new strip assembly. Ceramic strips are supplied with sti ds attached, so it is not necessary to salvage the old studs.

After removing a damaged strip and stud assembly, piece the spacer; into the holes in the chassis and insert the sti ds into the spacers. Be sure the studs are completely sea ed in the spacers. If necessary, use a soft- faced mallet to ‘ 3p the studs into the spacers. Tap the studs in equal increments to prevent strains on the ceramic strip. Fig. 4-4 shows he assembled ceramic strip.

Fig. 4-4. Ceramic strip assembly.

Troubleshooting Techniques

If the instrument is not operating, first check that he power cord is plugged in and that there is power at he socket. Then check that the pilot lamp and tube heal srs are lit. If necessary, check the line fuse.

Attempt to isolate the trouble by a quick operatio ial and visual check. Make sure that any apparent trouble is actually due to a malfunction within the instrument and tot to improper control settings or to a faulty plug-in unit or probe. Instructions for the operation of the Type 547 end general information concerning plug-in operation are con­ tained in Section 2. Operating instructions for a specific plug-in unit or probe w ill be found in the manual for that unit.

Check the settings of all controls on the Type 547 and the vertical plug-in pream plifier unit. A control set to the wrong position may cause what appears to be a trouble symptom. Operate the controls to see what effect, if any, they have on the trouble symptom. The normal or abnormal operation o f each particular control helps in establishing the nature of the trouble.

When vertical-system troubles are encountered, isolate the trouble to the Type 547 or to the vertical plug-in pre­ am plifier unit. The best way to determine this is by sub­ stituting another vertical plug-in preamplifier unit. If the trouble appears to be in the plug-in unit, refer to the M ain­ tenance section o f the plug-in unit instruction manual.

If other plug-in units are not available, and the symptoms are not definite, check the power-supply resistances and volt­ ages since a failure in one of the regulated power supplies frequently presents unusual symptoms. Table 5-2 in the

Calibration Procedure lists normal resistances to ground for each power-supply lead. Typical voltages in the power sup­ plies are shown on the power-supply schematic. The volt­ ages shown may vary slightly from instrument to instrument.

A ll wiring used in the Type 547 is color coded to facili­ tate circuit tracing. In addition, all regulated power-supply leads are coded with specific color combinations for easy identification. In general, three stripes are placed on the wires of the regulated supplies. The code used is the stan­ dard EIA number-color code. The first color (widest stripe) indicates the first number of the voltage on that lead. The second color indicates the second number of the lead volt­ age, and the third color is a multiplier. The method is simi­ lar to that used in color coding resistors. Thus, the + 100-volt leads are coded brown, black, brown. The voltage is positive if the body color of the wire is white and negative if the body color of the wire is tan.

Reference voltage for the regulated supplies is obtained from the -1 5 0 -v o lt supply. If it is not operating properly, the other low-voltage supplies w ill be affected. For this reason, the -1 5 0 -v o lt supply should be checked first when trouble is suspected in the low-voltage supplies. If the output of the — 150-volt supply is correct, then check the outputs of the other supplies.

Most troubles that might occur in Tektronix instruments result from the failure of vacuum tubes or semiconductors.

Once the trouble has been isolated to a particular area or circuit, check the tubes and semiconductors in the trouble area. It is preferable to check them by substitution rather than with a tester, since testers frequently fail to indicate certain troubles which can affect oscilloscope performance.

Remember that when tubes or semiconductors fail, asso­ ciated circuit components can be damaged.

Circuit Troubleshooting

The Type 547 consists of ten main circuits plus the C ali­ brator and Alternate-Trace Sync Am plifier circuits. The ten main circuits are the:

1. Low-Voltage Power Supply

2. Crt Circuit (including the High-Voltage Power Supply)

3. Vertical Am plifier and Delay Line

4. Main Time Base (B) Sweep Trigger Circuit

5. Main Time Base (B) Sweep Generator

6.

Time Base A Sweep Trigger Circuit

7. Time Base A Sweep Generator

8. Delay-Pickoff Circuit

9. Alternate-Sweep Switching Circuit

10. Horizontal Am plifier

The crt display can often be used to identify a defec’ ive circuit. For example, if there is no vertical deflection wnen the intensity and horizontal deflection appear normal, the trouble can be open signal connections, no signal source, the

Maintenance— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 plug-in unit or even loose crt connections. Other abnormal characteristics in the crt display similarly point to a defective circuit or group of circuits.

Once the nature and approximate location of the trouble has been determined, further isolate the trouble by perform­ ing the steps in the calibration procedure for the circuits in which trouble is suspected. The voltages and waveforms to be expected in each circuit are shown on the schematics.

Refer to Section 3 for an explanation of the operation of the defective circuit.

IMPORTANT

W hen it is desired to o p e ra te the p lu g -in unit from a p lu g -in extension, the p lu g -in sensing switch (S W 673 , lo cated a t the lo p rear o f the p lu g -in com p artm en t) must be m a n u a lly o p e r­ ate d. To m an u a lly o p e ra te the switch, p u ll the plastic p lu n g e r o u tw a rd to the stop position.

4 - 5

NOTES

Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

Introduction

The Type 547 Oscilloscope is a stable instrument which w ill provide many hours of trouble-free operation. How< ver, to ensure measurement accuracy, it is suggested that you recalibrate the instrument after each 500 hours of operation or every six months if used intermittently. It w ill also be necessary to recalibrate certain sections of the instrument when tubes, transistors, or other components are replaced.

The steps in the following procedure are arranged in the proper order for complete recalibration to avoid unnecessary repetition.

This procedure is a combination performance check and adjustment procedure. The first portion of the step title refers to the name of the check or adjustment and the last portion o f the title is the name of the circuit diagram afiect- ed by the step or on which the adjustment is located, which­ ever is applicable.

Figs. 5-5, 5-8, 5-11, 5-14, and 5-17 are oscilloscope front- panel illustrations that show the control settings, signal con­ nections and signal input (if any) at those particular points in the procedure. These illustrations serve two purpr ses:

(1) as an aid to quickly check your own setup, and (?) to enable you to start in the “ m iddle" o f the procedure when it is necessary to recalibrate a certain portion of the in .tru- ment. For example, Fig. 5-5 shows the front-panel setui> at the completion o f step 12e. Using this same setup as illus­ trated, this can be the starting point for recalibrating the

A Sweep Trigger circuit. Fig. 5-5 can also be used as an aid when determining the setup needed for starting the recalibra- tion o f the B Sweep Trigger circuit. Unless otherwise stated, all resistances and voltages are measured with respec1 to chassis ground.

Equipment Required

The follow ing equipment or equivalent is necessary for complete calibration of the Type 547 Oscilloscope:

1. Low-Bandwidth Test Oscilloscope with a XI attenuator probe. Description: Bandwidth, dc to 300 kc or be'ter; calibrated vertical deflection factor o f 5 mv/cm.

Purpose: To check low-voltage power supply ou'put ripple amplitude.

2. Test load unit, Tektronix Type TU7 (067-0521-00). (o n - tains a pulse generator capable o f producing pulses with a risetime o f 3 ns or faster. This multi-purpose 'est-

NOTE

W henever the TU-7 (0 6 7 -0 5 2 1 -0 0 ) REPETITION

RATE switch is re ffe re d to, the fo llo w in g switcii positions should be considered e q u iv a le n t fo r test purposes:

TU-7 (0 6 7 -0 5 2 1 -0 0 )

LOW

MED

HIGH

0 6 7 -0 5 2 1 -0 1

4 kHz

80 kHz

500 kHz

SECTION 5

CAUBRATION

load unit is the only plug-in needed to perform a com­ plete calibration o f the Type 547 Oscilloscope.

3. Time-Mark generator, Tektronix Type 180A. Markers re­ quired at 1 and 5 sec, 500, 100, 10, 5, and 1 msec, 500,

100, 50, 10, 5, and 1 f it e c ,

5, 10, and 50-mc sine waves.

10-/isec trigger pulse output required. All outputs must have a time accuracy o f a least 0.1 %.

4. VO M (Volt-Ohm-Milliammefer) Dc sensitivity of at least

20,000 ohms per volt. Calibrated for an accuracy of at least 1% at — 150, + 100, +225 , and + 3 5 0 volts, at least 5% at — 1850 volts.

5. Variable autotransformer (e.g. Powerstat or Variac).

Required specifications: A rating o f a least 600 volt-am­ peres with an output voltage range covering the operat­ ing range of the oscilloscope under test.

6. Rms-calibrated ac voltmeter. Required specifications: A range of 0-150 volts (0-300 volts if the oscilloscope is wired for 234-volt nominal line-voltage operation).

7. Two coaxial cables, 50-ohm nominal impedance, 42" long with BNC plug-connectors on each end. Tektronix

Part No. 012-057.

8. Power cord adapter for connecting the 3-wire oscillo­ scope power cord to a 2-wire receptacle. Tektronix Part

No. 103-013.

9. Adapter, single binding post fitted with a BNC plug.

Tektronix Part No. 103-033.

10. Coaxial connector adapter with BNC-jack and UHF-plug connector fittings. Tektronix Part No. 103-015.

11. Jumper clip lead, about 4 " long. Equipped with minia­ ture alligator clips on each end.

12. Two interconnecting leads, 18" long, with combination plug-and-jack banana-type connectors on each end.

Type PC-18R. Tektronix Part No. 012-031.

13. BNC T connector. Fits one BNC jack and accepts two

BNC plugs. Tektronix Part No. 103-032.

14. Miscellaneous Items

1— Screwdriver, ’/ u " wide bit, shank about 3 " long.

1 “ Screwdriver, 3 j j " wide bit, shank about 2

" long.

1— Jaco No. 125 insulated low-capacitance-type screw­ driver with a 1 V i" long shank and % " wide metal tip. Total length is 5 ". Tektronix Part No. 003-000.

1— Low-capacitance alignment tool consisting o f a handle

(Tektronix Part No. 003-307), a gray nylon insert with a metal screwdriver tip (Tektronix Part No. 003-334), a 5/s

4

W hexagonal wrench insert (Tektronix Part No.

003-310).

1— Hexagonal wrench, */u " . For repositioning, if neces­ sary, the TRIGGERING LEVEL control knobs.

PRELIMINARY PROCEDURE

1. Remove the oscilloscope from the cabinet.

5-1

Calibration— Type 547/R M 547

2. Insert (He Type TU-7 in the oscilloscope vertical plug-in comportment. Set the Type TU-7 Tets Function switch to the Low Load position.

3. la y the oscilloscope on its left side for access to the bottom o f the instrument.

4. Using the VO M , check the resistance from the regulated power-supply terminals to ground as shown in Fig. 5-1.

The values o f resistance should be approxim ately os indicated in Table 5-1, once the capacitors are charged by the V O M internal battery.

M e t - t p «w » r tw p p l y

I t i l p o in t lo ro tlo n t

Power Supply le a d

- 1 5 0 volts

+ 100 volts t-225 volts t 350 volts

TABLE 5-1

Resistance to G roun d

1 k to 7 1

1 k to 2 k

2 k to 3 k

25 k to 35 k

5. Check the fuse of the rear of the instrument for correct value.

6. Connect the instrument and oc voltmeter to the auto­ transformer output. Connect the aulolransform er to the power line.

7. Turn the INTENSITY control on Iho instrument fully counterclockwise and turn on the power to a ll the equip­ ment. Adjust the autotransformer output voltage to 115 volts lor the design-center voltage for which the instru­ ment is wired).

8. Set the oscilloscope front-panel controls to the posi­ tions listed in Table 5-2.

TABLE 5 -2

Crt Controls

INTENSITY

FOCUS

0

As is

5-2

ASTIGMATISM

SCALE ILLUM

TRACE SEPARATION

As is

5

0

Time Base A

TRIGGERING LEVEL Fully counterclockwise and pushed in

TRIGGERING

TRIG MODE

SLOPE

COUPLING

SOURCE

VARIABLE (TIME/CM)

TIME/CM

+

AC

NORM INT

CALIBRATED

.5 mSEC

Horizontal Display

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY

SWEEP MAGNIFIER

Single Sweep Switch

A

X I OFF

NORMAL

M ain Time Base (B)

TRIGGERING LEVEL Fully counterclockwise and pushed in

TRIGGERING

MODE

SLOPE

TRIG

COUPLING

SOURCE

VARIABLE (TIME/CM)

TIME/CM

BRIGHTNESS

• f

AC

NORM INT

CALIBRATED

.5 mSEC

Fully clockwise

DELAY-TIME MULTI-

PLIER

O ther Controls

1.00

M idrange HORIZONTAL POSI-

TION

VERNIER (HORI-

O NTAL POSITION)

M idrange

AMPLITUDE CALI-

BRATOR

OFF

9. Set the Type TU-7 front-panel controls as follows:

Vertical Position

Test Function

O ther Controls

Contored

Low Load

As is

10. A llo w about five minutes lo r warmup. Check that the

EXT CRT CATHODE-fo-GND shorting strap is in place on the terminals, and the CRT CATHODE SELECTOR switch is set to the EXTERNAL CRT CATHODE position.

11. Recheck the autotransformer output for proper design- center voltage as soon as the instrument has warmed up.

CHECK A N D ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

1. Check V o lta g e A ccuracy— P ow er S upply a. Establish the conditions described previously under

"Preliminary Procedure".

b. Check the voltage accuracy of each power supply output using the V O M according to the inform ation given in Table 5-3. The location o f the test points is shown in Fig. 5-1.

Power

S upply

— 150 v

+ 100 v

+ 2 2 5 v

+ 3 5 0 v

TABLE 5 -3

T olerance

| — 147 to — 153 v

+ 9 8 to + 1 0 2 v

+ 2 2 0 5 to + 229 .5 v

+ 3 4 3 to -t-357 v

M axim um P ea k-to-

Peak Ripple

10 mv

15 mv

10 mv

25 mv c. If necessary, adjust — 150 VOLTS R616 (see Fig. 5-21 so a ll power supply voltages are within tolerance.

NOTE

Do n o t ad ju st the — 150 VOLTS c o n tro l unless one o r m ore o f the supplies is a c tu a lly ou t o f to le ra n c e . Remember th a t the c a lib ra tio n o f the e n tire instrum ent is a ffe c te d b y changes in the p o w e r s u p p ly v o lta g e s a n d a ll the po s itiv e v o lt-

Calibration— Typo 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 a g e p o w e r supplies d e p e n d upon th e — 1 5 0 -v o lt s u p p ly o u tp u t accuracy.

2. Check Regulation and Output Ripple— Power Supply

NOTE

W h e n checking fo r p ro p e r re g u la tio n o f the p o w e r supplies a t th e lo w e r lin e -v o lta g e lim it, the ac line v o lta g e sho uld c o n ta in no m ore th a n 3*/* d is to r­ tio n .

a. M onitor the regulated output o f the — 150-volt sup­ p ly with the VOM . The test point location is shown in Fig. 5-1.

b. Connect the X I probe form the test oscilloscope to the — 150-volt test point and check the output rip ­ ple am plitude. The maximum rip ple voltage is given in Table 5-3.

NOTE

G ro u n d lo op s con cause erroneous rip p le m easure­ m ent. (R ip p le due to g ro u n d loops is th e same fre q u e n c y as the lin e ; lo w v o lta g e p o w e r sup ply rip p le it tw ic e th e lin e ro te .) O n e w a y to a v o id

C503C

C90C c?oe

C 90A Dll AY

STAtT

141

CAL

A M P l

1 9 4 1

— 1 SO

VOLTS

( 6 1 6

Fig. 5 *2 . C a lib ra tio n a d ju ttm o n t lo ca tio n *.

5 -3

Calibration— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 rip p le due to g ro u n d lo op s is to te m p o ra rily d is ­ connect the chassis g ro u n d w ire in the p o w e r cord b y using an u n g ro u n d e d 3- to 2 -w ire lin e -p lu g a d a p te r. Then use a g ro u n d le a d from th e sig n a l pro b e b o d y to make a g ro u n d c on ne ction to the oscilloscope chassis a t th e lo c a tio n show n in Fig.

5 -1 . The p ro b e w ill then p ro v id e the o n ly g ro u n d c on ne ction be tw ee n the tw o instrum ents. The term

"te s t o s c illo s c o p e " is item 1 un de r "E q u ip m e n t

R e qu ired " w h ile th e term "o s c illo s c o p e " o r " i n ­ s tru m e n t" is th e oscillo scop e b e in g c a lib ra te d .

c. Slowly increase the output o f the variable oufotrons- former to 126.5 voc (or 10% above the design-center line voltage for which the instrument is wired). The dc output voltage should remain essentially constant; typically within 2% o f that obtained with design- center line voltage. The ripple voltage should not exceed the maximum peak-to peak amplitude given in Toble 5-3.

d. Repeat steps 2a through 2c for each supply.

e. Reset the autotronsformer for 115 volts output (or the design-center voltage for which the instrument is wired).

f. Set the Type TU-7 Test Function switch to High Load.

g. Reduce the line voltage to 103.5 volts (o' 10% below design-center voltage). The dc output voltage o f each supply should remain essentially constant; typically within 2% o f that obtained at design-center voltage.

Ripple voltage should not exceed the maximum peak-to-peak am plitude given in Table 5-3.

h. Disconnect the voltohmmeter and XI probe.

i. Resot the autotronsformer for 115 volts output (or the design-center voltage).

j. Set the Type TU-7 Test Function switch to Low lo a d , k. Place the instrument in its upright position.

l . If the 3- to 2-wire adapter was used during this step, turn off oscilloscopo power and remove the odapter

Plug the line cord directly into the autotransformer and turn on the oscilloscopo power.

3. Adjust HIGH VOLTAGE R840— Crt Circuit o. Set the range o f the voltohmmeter to measure — 1850 volts and connect the voltohmmeter to the high- voltage test point (see Fig. 5-3).

b. Adjust the HIGH VOLTAGE R840 (see Fig 5-2) for a — 1850 voltmeter indication.

4. Check High V oltage Regulation— Crt Circuit a. M onitor the voltage at the high voltage test point with the voltohmmeter.

b. Set the A TRIGGERING MODE switch to AUTO.

c. Turn the INTENSITY control clockwise until the trace is at normal intensity. Use the Type TU-7

Vertical Position control to vertically center the trace. Defocus the trace with the FOCUS ond ASTIG­

MATISM controls. Set the INTENSITY control at 7.

d. Use the HORIZONTAL POSITION control to position l the troce to start of the left side o f the groticule.

e. Slowly increase the output o f the variable autotrons­ former to 126.5 voc (or 10% obove the design-center line voltage for which the instrument is wired). The high-voltage dc output should remain essentially constant; typica lly within 2% o f that obtained with design-center line voltage. The troce should not show any signs o f blooming. (Blooming is when the display changes size as the supply voltage changes.) f. Reset the autotronsformer for 115 volts output (or design-center voltage).

g. Set the Typo TU-7 Test Function switch to High Load h. Reduce the line voltage to 103.5 volts (or 10% below design-center voltage). The dc output voltoge should remoin constant; typically within 2% o f that obtained with design-center line voltage. The troce should not show any signs o f blooming.

i. Reset the autotronsformer for 115 volts output (or the design-center voltoge).

j. Set the Type TU-7 Test Function switch to Low Load k. Dcscreasc the troce intensity to normal with the

INTENSITY control

. Disconnect the VOM .

H iy h - V o fo y *

( To»l Point |

1 8 S0 v f

N f . 5 -3 . M ig h -vo llo g # to»t p o in t lo ca tio n

5. Adjust CAL AMPL (C alib rato r Am plitude I R943—

Calibrator o. Connect the single binding post adapter to the oscil­ loscope CAL OUT connector.

b. Connect the V O M to the binding post adapter and to the oscilloscope chassis.

c. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to 100 V DC.

d. Adjust CAL AMPL R943 (see Fig. 5-2) for a voltmeter reading o f exactly 100 volts.

6. Check Duty Factor of Signal— Calibrator o. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to 100

VOLTS (not 100 V DC).

b. Check for + 4 5 to + 5 5 volts measured between the

CAL OUT connector and ground.

NOTE

+ 5 0 volts in dicates a n o m in a l d u ty fa c to r o f

0 .5 . I f th e v o lta g e is n o t w ith in + 4 5 to + 5 5 volts, try new tubes.

c. Disconnect the V O M and set the AMPLITUDE CALI­

BRATOR switch to OFF.

d. Remove the adapter from the CAL OUT connector.

7. Adjust TRACE ROTATION— Crt Circuit a. Adjust the FOCUS and ASTIGMATISM controls for the narrowest troce.

b. Position the trace directly behind the center hori­ zontal graticule line, using the Type TU-7 Vertical

Position control.

c. If the trace and graticule line do not coincide over the w idth of the graticule, adjust the TRACE ROTA­

TIO N control for correct trace alignment.

S. Adjust GEOMETRY R861— Crt Cricuit a. A pp ly S0-fLsec markors from the time-mark generator through a coaxial cable to the Type TU-7 Ext Input connector.

b. Set the A TIME/CM switch to 50 pSEC.

c. Advance the INTENSITY control to make the display visible.

d. Set the TRIGGERING LEVEL control to obtain a stable display o f vertical marker lines.

e. Adjust the TU-7 V ariable control so the markers over-scan the crt; set the Vertical Position control to position the bose line o f the markers below the display area.

«. Use the HORIZONTAL POSITION control to posi­ tion the markers so they olign with the graticule markings.

g. Adjust GEOMETRY R861 Isee Fig. 5-2) for the s l i g h t ­ est possible vertical marker-lines running parallel to the 0 and 10-cm graticule lines at the left and right edges o f the graticule. Note the amount of bowing.

h. Disconnect the signal from the TU-7 Ext Input con­ i. Reduce the trace intensity to normal with the IN ­

TENSITY control while positioning the trace onto the crt w ith the TU-7 Vertical Position control.

j. Position the trace to the bottom o f the graticule with the TU-7 Vertical Position control. Note the omount of bowing. Then position the troce to the top of the graticule and note the omount o f bowing.

k. Repeat steps 8a through 8j so the trace exhibits minimum bowing in both planes.

l

. After completing the previous steps, disconnect the signal from the TU-7 Ext Input connector. Check that the trace is positioned into the display area and the INTENSITY control is set to a suitable trace- brightness level.

9. Adjust VERT DC BAL (Vertical Am plifier Dc Bal­ ance) R1004— Vertical Am plifier a . nector.

Calibration— Typ« 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

Using a small screwdriver, short the crt vertical deflection-plate pint together (tee Fig. 5-4).

f ig . 5 -4 . V e rtlcol A m p lifie r I r i l p o in t* a n d a d jv ifm e n t lo ca tio n * fo r p e rfo rm in g it e p t 9 a n d 10.

5-5

Calibration— Type 547/R M 547

5 -6

Fig. J -S . F to n t-p a n a l to n tro l ta ttin g * a n d lig n a l c o n n a ctla n t a t Hia co m ple tio n o f H op l j o .

CAU TIO N

Do no t short tho crt d e fle c tio n -p la te pins to g ro un d.

b. Note the position of the trace. This is the electri­ cal center of the crt vertical deflection plates.

c. Remove the screwdriver from the crt pins.

d. Short the cases o f Q1074 and Q1084 (see Fig. M ) together (not to ground) and note the trace deviation from electrical center. Deviation should not be more than 0.5 cm maximum. Remove the short.

e. Short the collector of Q1034 to the collector of

Q1044 (see Fig. 5-4) and note the trace deviation from electrical center. Deviation should not be more than 0.5 cm maximum. Remove the short.

f. Short the cases of Q1014 and Q1024 (see Fig. .'--4) together (not to ground) and note the trace deviation from electrical center. Deviation should not be more than 0.5 cm maximum. Remove the short.

g. Set the Type TU-7 Test Function switch to Common

Mode.

h. Adjust VERT DC BAL R1004 (see Fig. 5-4) to position the trace to the center o f the graticule.

10. Adjust VERT G A IN (Vertical Am plifier G ain) R 1 0 I7

Vertical Amplifier a. Set the Type TU-7 Test Function switch to the Gain

Set position.

b. Connect a coaxial cable between the Type TU-7 l:xt

Input connector and the oscilloscope CAL OUT con­ nector.

c. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to 100

VOLTS.

d. Pull the A TRIGGERING LEVEL control outward for a X 1 0 range increase and turn the control fully clockwise to free run the time base.

e. Adjust VERT G A IN R1017 (see Fig. 5-4) so the dis­ play vertical deflection is exactly 4 cm in amplitude.

11. Check Common-Mode Rejection— Vertical Am plifier a. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to 1 VOLT.

b. Set the TU-7 Test Function Switch to Common Mode.

c. Set the A TIME/CM switch to .5 mSEC.

d. Note the amplitude of the calibrator waveform.

The am plitude of the waveform should not be more than 3 mm maximum.

12A. Adjust A TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R225 and

A TRIGGER SENS R245— A Sweep Trigger ISN

67 40 -u p ) a. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR to .1 volts.

Calibration— Typo 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

NOTE

A 100 mv p e a k -to -p e a k signal is used in this p o r­ tio n o f the procedure as an adjustm ent a id o n ly a n d is n o t in te nd ed to be in te rp re te d as a trig g e r- am p litu de spe cifica tion th a t contradicts the one given in the Characteristics section o f this m anual.

b. Insert a BNC T connector between the CAL OUT connector and the coax cable to the TU-7 Ext Input.

Connect another coax cable from the T connector to the A TRIGGER INPUT connector. (The CAL OUT connector should now be connected to the Ext Input connector on the TU-7 and to the A TRIGGER IN ­

PUT connector on the oscilloscope.) c. Set the front-panel controls as follows:

Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

Controls not mentioned may be left as is.

INTENSITY

FOCUS

ASTIGMATISM

SCALE ILLUM

HORIZONTAL POSI­

TION

As required for a visible trace

As required for a focused trace

As required for a focused trace

As required for a visible graticule

As required to position trace to the left edge of the graticule

Midrange VERNIER (HORIZON-

TAL POSITION)

HORIZONTAL DIS-

PLAY

SWEEP MAGNIFIER

SINGLE SWEEP

Switch

A

XI (OFF)

Normal

Tim * Basei A

TRIGGERING LEVEL

TIME/CM

TRIGGERING

MODE

SLOPE

COUPLING

SOURCE

0

.5 mSEC

TRIG

+

AC

EXT

TU-7

Variable

Vertical Position

Test Function

Fully Clockwise

Centered

Low Load

Input Coupling

Volts/Div

Time/Div

Test Oscilloscope

AC

.02

.5 mSEC

5 -7

Calibration— Typo

5 4 7/R M 547

Triggering

Mode

Slope

Coupling

Source

AUTO

+

AC

Internal d. Locate the junction o f R2I7, C218, R218, (See Fig.

5-6a). Connect a short jumper clip lead between the junction and ground. This jumper disables the

A TRIGGERING LEVEL control e. Locate the junction o f R252 and L250 (See Fig. 5-da).

Connect a 1 0 X probe from the test oscilloscope to this junction.

f. Preset the A TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R225 con trol to midrange and the A TRIG SENS R245 control fully clockwise.

g. Adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R225 control for a stable square wave display of ap pro xi­ mately 200 mv peak-to-peak. Note that there is a range in the adjustment of R22S through which the square wave display w ill remain stable. Set R225 approxim ately in the middle of this range.

h. Change the SLOPE switch to — and readiest R225 if necessary. Continue alternating the position of the

SLOPE switch and adjusting R225 until tho square wave on the test scope is stable in both positions o f the SLOPE switch.

i. Turn the A TRIGGER SENS R245 control counter­ clockwise until the squaro wave on the tost oscillo­ scope just begins to break up. (This w ill occur where the square wave suddenly reduces in a m p litu d e )

Leave R245 set a t this point.

j. Readjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R225 control for a stable square wave display ot both positions o f the SLOPE switch. (Note that there is a range in the adjustment of R225 over which a stable square wave can be obtained. Set R225 in the center of this range.) k. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to 50 mVOLTS. The am plitude of the square wove dis­ play on the lest oscilloscope should be reduced to less than 100 m illivolts in either position o f the

SLOPE switch. If the amplitude of the square wove on the test oscilloscope remains at approxim ately

200 millivolts, repeat i through k.

I. Disconnect the 1 0 X probe from tho junction o f

R252 and L250

12B A d ju st A TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R225 a n d A

TRIGGER SENS R245— A Sweep T rig g e r (SN 10 1-

67391 a. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to 50 m- volts.

b. Insert the BNC T connector between the AMPLITUDE

CALIBRATOR connector and the coaxial cable.

5 -8 t i e 5 -6 A T n g g *. d lp - U o d c * n n * < ti« n i, o d jw ttm v n l a n d last p a in t lo c a tia n i c. Connect another coaxial coble from the T connector to the A TRIGGER INPUT connector. (The CAL OUT connector should now be connected to the Ext Input connector on the Type TU-7 and to the A TRIGGER

INPUT connector on the oscilloscope.)

d. Set the TU-7 front-panel controls as follows:

Variable

Vertical Position

Test Function

Folly clockwise

Centered lo w Load e. Set the A MODE switch to TRIG and the A TRIGGI R-

ING LEVEL control to 0. Check that the A CO U­

PLING switch is set at AC and the A SOURCE switch is set to EXT.

f. Locate the junction o f R217, C218, and R218. Con­ nect the short jumper clip lead between the junc­ tion and ground. This jumper disables the A TRIG­

GERING LEVEL control.

g. Connect a 1 0 X Probe from the test oscilloscope to the junction o f R245-R248.

h. Set the test oscilloscope controls as follows:

INPUT COUPLING

VOLTS/DIV

TIME/DIV

AC

.02

.2 mSEC

TRIGGERING

MODE

SLOPE

COUPLING

SOURCE

AUTOMATIC

+

AC

INTERNAL i. Set the TRIGGER SENS R245 to midrange.

j. Rotate TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R225 fully coun­ terclockwise.

k. Rotate TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R225 dockvs.se until a stable display 2 to 3 m ajor divisions high appears on the test oscilloscope.

l . If no stable display appears on the test oscilloscoi>e, rotate the TRIGGER SENS R245 slightly clockwse, then repeat part k.

m. Change the Triggering SLOPE switch to —and chi ck for a stable display on the test oscilloscope. If neces­ sary readjust the TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING Ri 25 slightly so as to obtain a stable test oscilloscope in both positions o f the A SLOPE switch.

n. If a stable test oscilloscope display can not be obtained for both A SLOPE switch positions, rot ate the TRIGGER SENS R245 slightly clockwise and repeat part m.

o. After obtaining a stable test oscilloscope display for both A SLOPE switch positions, rotate the TRIGC ER

SENS R245 slightly counterclockwise. Again chuck for a stable test oscilloscope display in both posi­ tions of A SLOPE switch. TRIGGER LEVEL CENTER­

ING R225 may have to be readjusted slightly.

p. Continue rotating the TRIGGER SENS R245 slightly counterclockwise and then checking the test osci;lo- scope display until a stable test oscilloscope disp ay can not be obtained for both positions o f the T.ig- gering SLOPE switch.

q. Rotate the TRIGGER SENS R245 just enough clock­ wise to permit a stable tost oscilloscope display to

Calibration— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 be obtained for both positions o f the Triggering

SLOPE switch. Slight readjustment o f TRIGGER

LEVEL CENTERING R225 w ill probably be necessary.

13. Adjust A INT TRIG DC LEVEL R209— A Sweep Trigger a. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to .5 VOLTS.

b. Set the A SOURCE switch to NORM INT.

c. Adjust the TU-7 Variable control so the displayed waveform is 5 mm peak-to-peak in amplitude.

d. Using the TU-7 Vertical Position control, center the display for equal amplitude above and below the graticule centerline.

e. Set the A COUPLING switch to DC.

f. Adjust A INT TRIG DC LEVEL R209 (see Fig.

5 -6 )

to obtain a stable display. (W ith the A SLOPE switch set to + , the sweep trace should start on the posi­ tive-going rise of the calibrator waveform.)

14. Check Internal Triggering— A Sweep Trigger a. Set the A COUPLING switch to AC.

b. Adjust the TU-7 Variable control until the display is

2 mm peak-to-peak in amplitude.

c. Disconnect the jumper clip lead.

d. Adjust the A TRIGGERING LEVEL control to obtain a stable display.

e. Check for stable time-base triggering on the —slope when the A SLOPE switch is set to — and on the + slope when the SLOPE switch is set to + . If neces­ sary, readjust the A TRIGGERING LEVEL control to obtain a stable display when checking each SLOPE switch position.

15. Check A TRIGGERING LEVEL Control Zero S et-^A

Sweep Trigger a. Check that the A TRIGGERING LEVEL control is set to 0 and the A SLOPE switch is set to + .

b. Connect the VO M between the R217/C218/R218 junction and ground.

c. Carefully turn the A TRIGGERING LEVEL control to obtain a reading of ± 0 .1 V on the VOM.

d. If the A TRIGGERING LEVEL knob is set properly on the control shaft, the white dot on the knob should be directly below the 0 on the front panel. If the white dot does not point exactly to 0, disconnect the VOM, loosen the setscrew in the knob and re­ position the knob.

e. After tightening the knob, set the knob to 0, recon­ nect the VOM , and recheck the reading. The VOM reading should be within ± 0 .1 V of zero when the

A TRIGGERING LEVEL knob is set to 0.

5 -9

Calibration— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

NOTE

A dc-coupled tost oscilloscope w ith a X 1 0 probe can be used in place o f the V O M to perform step

15.

As an o th e r m ethod, the TRIGGERING LEVEL knob can be checked fo r correct position by re p e a tin g step 14e. This m ethod does not req uire the use o f a test oscilloscope or VO M . W hen pe rfo rm in g step I4 e the TRIGGERING LEVEL knob should po in t to 0 when stab le trig g e rin g is o b ta in e d .

f. Disconnect the V O M or X 1 0 probe, whichever is used.

16A. Adjust B TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R25 end

B TRIGGER SENS R45— B Sweep Trigger (SN

6 7 4 0 -u p ) a. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR to .1 volts.

NOTE

A 100 mv p e a k -to -p e a k sig na l is used in this p o rtio n o f the procedure as an adjustm ent aid o n ly and is not in te n d e d to be in te rp re te d as a trig g e r-a m p litu d e spe cifica tion th a t contradicts the o n e given in the Characteristics section o f this m anual.

b. Insert a BNC T connector between the CAL OUT connector and the coax cable to the TU-7 Ext In­ put. Connect another coax cable from the T con­ nector to the B TRIGGER INPUT connector. (The

CAL OUT connector should now be connected to the Ext Input connector on the TU-7 and to th<- B

TRIGGER INPUT connector on the oscilloscope.) c. Set the front panel controls as follows:

Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

Controls not mentioned may be left as is

HORIZONTAL DIS-

PLAY

BRIGHTNESS

B

As required for visible trace

Time Base B

TRIGGERING LEVEL

TIME/CM

TRIGGERING

MODE

SLOPE

COUPLING

SOURCE

0

.5 mSEC

TRIG

■I-

AC

EXT

TU-7

Variable

Vertical Position

Test Function

Fully Clockwise

Centered

Low Load

5 -1 0

Test Oscilloscope

Input Coupling

Volts/Div

Time/Div

Triggering

Mode

Slope

Coupling

Source

AC

.02

.5 mSEC

AUTO

+

AC

Internal d. Locate the junction of R17, C18, R18 (See Fig. 5-7a).

Connect o short jumper clip lead between the junc­ tion and ground. This jumper disables the B TRIG­

GERING LEVEL control.

e. Locate the junction of R52 and L50 (See Fig. 5-7a).

Connect a 10 X probe from the test oscilloscope to this junction.

f. Preset the B TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R25 con­ trol to midrange and the B TRIG SENS R45 fully clockwise.

g. Adjust the B TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R25 con­ trol for a stable display of square waves on the test oscilloscope. (The square waves w ill have an amplitude o f approxim ately 200 mv peak-to-peak.)

Note that there is a range in the adjustment of

R25 through which the square wave w ill remain stable. Set R25 approxim ately in the middle of this range.

h. Change the SLOPE switch to — and readjust R25 if necessary. Continue alternating the position of the

SLOPE switch and adjusting R25 until the square wave display on the test oscilloscope is stable in both positions of the SLOPE switch.

i. Turn the B TRIGGER SENS R45 control counterclock­ wise until the square wave display on the test os­ cilloscope just begins to break up. (This w ill occur where the square wave suddenly reduces in am­ plitude.) Leave R45 set at this point.

j. Readjust the B TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R25 control for a stable square wave display at both positions of the SLOPE switch. (Note that there is a range in the adjustment o f the R25 over which a stable square wave can be obtained. Set R25 in the center o f this range.) k. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR to 50mVOLTS.

The amplitude of the square wave display on the test oscilloscope should be reduced to less than

100 millivolts in either position of the SLOPE switch.

If the amplitude of the square wave display on the test oscilloscope remains at approximately 200 m illi­ volts, repeat steps i through k.

l

. Disconnect the 1 0 X probe from the junction of R52 and L50.

16B. Adjust B TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R25 and B

TRIGGER SENS R45— B Sweep Trigger (SN 10 1-

6 7 3 9 ) a. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to 50 mvolts.

C alibration— Typo 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

& b. Insert the BNC T connector between the AMPLITUDE

CALIBRATOR connector and the coaxial cable.

c. Connect another coaxial coble from the T connector to the B TRIGGER INPUT connector. (The CAL OUT connector should now be connected to the Ext Input connector on the Type TU-7 and to the B TRIGGER

INPUT connector on the oscilloscope.) d. Set the TU-7 front-panel controls os follows:

VARIABLE

POSITION

TEST FUNCTION

Fully clockwise

Centered

Low Load e. Set the B MODE switch to TRIG ond the B TRIG­

GERING LEVEL control to 0. Check that the B C O U ­

PLING switch is set at AC and the B SOURCE switch is set to EXT.

f. Locate the junction o f RI7, C18. and R18. Connect the short jumper clip lead between the junction and ground. This jumper disables into A TRIGGERING

LEVEL control.

g. Connect a 1 0 X Probe from the test oscilloscope the junction o f R45-R48.

h. Set the test oscilloscope controls as follows:

INPUT COUPLING

VOLTS/DIV

TIME/DIV

AC

.02

.2 mSEC

TRIGGERING

MODE

SLOPE

COUPLING

SOURCE

AUTOMATIC

+

AC

INTERNAL i. Set the TRIGGER SENS R4S to midrange.

j. Rotate TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R25 fully coun­ terclockwise.

k. Rotate TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING R25 clockwise until a stable display 2 to 3 m ajor divisions high appears on the test oscilloscope.

l

. If no stable display appears on the test oscilloscope, rotate the TRIGGER SENS R45 slightly clockwise, then repeat part k.

m. Change the Triggering SLOPE switch to — and check for a stable display on the test oscilloscope. If necessary readjust the TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING

R25 slightly so as to obtain a stable test oscilloscope in both positions o f the A SLOPE switch.

n. If a stable test oscilloscope display con not be obtained for both B SLOPE switch positions, rotate the TRIGGER SENS R45 slightly clockwise and repeat part m.

o. After obtaining a stable test oscilloscope display for both B SLOPE switch positions, rotate the TRIGGER

SENS R45 slightly counterclockwise. Again check for a stable test oscilloscope display in both posi­ tions of B SLOPE switch. TRIGGER LEVEL CENTER­

IN G R25 may have to be readjusted slightly.

t v O row nd C lip l e a d b 1 10 1 -6 7 1 9 1 >

J w H lIin f i g 5 -7 . • T rig ge r c lip -le a d ce nn e ctle m , o d |\rth n e n l o n d le t ! p e in l location*.

p. Continue rotating the TRIGGER SENS R45 slightly counterclockwise ond then checking the test oscillo­ scope display until a stable test oscilloscope display can not be obtained for both positions o f the Trig­ gering SLOPE switch.

5 - n

Calibration— Type 5 4 7/R M 547

5 -1 2

Fig S - i . F ro n t-p a no l c o n tro l te tfin g t o f tho co m ple tio n o f stop 2 0 a

&

Calibration— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 q. Rotate the TRIGGER SENS R45 just enough clockwise to permit a stable test oscilloscope display to be obtained for both positions of the Triggering SLOPE switch. Slight readjustment o f TRIGGER LEVEL CEN­

TERING R25 w ill probably be necessary.

17. Adjust B INT TRIG DC LEVEL R9 — B Sweep Trigger a. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to .5 VOLTS.

b. Set the B SOURCE switch to NORM INT.

c. Adjust the TU-7 Variable control so the displayed waveform is 5 mm peak-to-peak in amplitude.

d. Using the TU-7 Vertical Position control, center the display for equal amplitude above and below the graticule centerline.

e. Set the B COUPLING switch to DC.

f. Adjust B INT TRIG DC LEVEL R9 (see Fig. 5-7| ro obtain a stable display. (W ith the B SLOPE switch set to + , the sweep trace should start on the po .i- tive-going rise of the calibrator waveform.)

18. Check Internal Triggering — B Sweep Trigger a. Set the B COUPLING switch to AC.

b. Adjust the TU-7 V ariable control until the display is

2 mm peak-to-peak in amplitude.

c. Disconnect the jumper clip lead.

d. Adjust the B TRIGGERING LEVEL control to obtain a stable display.

e. Check for stable time-base triggering on the — slope when the B SLOPE switch is set to — and on the F slope when the SLOPE switch is set to + . If neces­ sary, readjust the B TRIGGERING LEVEL control io obtain a stable display when making the check f>r each SLOPE switch position.

19. Check B TRIGGERING LEVEL Control Zero Set - -

B Sweep Trigger a. Check that the B TRIGGERING LEVEL control is s>:t to 0 and the SLOPE switch is set to + .

b. Connect the VO M between the R17/C18/R18 junc­ tion and ground.

c. Carefully adjust the B TRIGGERING LEVEL control 'o obtain a reading o f exactly zero volts on the V O f L d. If the B TRIGGERING LEVEL knob is set properly c n the control shaft, the white dot on the knob should be directly below the 0 on the front panel. If the white dot does not point exactly to 0, disconnect the

VOM, loosen the setscrew in the knob, and repos i­ tion the knob.

e. After tightening the knob, set the knob to 0, recon­ nect the VOM, and repeat steps (c) and (d).

NOTE

A dc-coupled test oscilloscope w ith a X I 0 probe can be used in place o f the V O M to perform this step, if desired.

As a n othe r m ethod, the TRIGGERING LEVEL knob can be checked fo r correct po sition b y re p e a tin g step i8 e . This m ethod does not require the use o f a test oscilloscope o r V O M . W hen p e rfo rm in g step

I8 e , the TRIGGERING LEVEL knob should p o in t to

0 when stab le trig g e rin g is o b ta in e d .

f. Disconnect the V O M or X I0 probe, whichever is used.

g. Disconnect the coaxial cables, T connector, and set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to OFF.

2 0 . Adjust S W P /M A G REGIS R569 — Horizontal

Amplifier a. Set the Main Time Base (B) front-panel controls to these settings:

TRIGGERING LEVEL

MODE

SLOPE

COUPLING

SOURCE

TIME/CM

About 2 5 ' clockwise from 0.

AUTO

+

AC

NORM INT

1 mSEC

All front-panel control settings up to this point in the procedure are shown in Fig. 5-8.

b. Apply 100-/tsec, 1-msec, and 5-msec time markers from the time-mark generator through a coaxial cable to the TU-7 Ext Input connector.

c. Set the TU-7 Variable control so the display is about

4 cm in amplitude.

d. Center the display vertically using the TU-7 Vertical

Position control.

e. Adjust, if necessary, the B TRIGGERING LEVEL con­ trol to obtain stable triggering on the 5-msec time marks. Fig. 5-9a shows the time markers displayed with respect to the graticule markings. Use the

HORIZONTAL POSITION control to position the center 5-msec time marker to the center of the grati­ cule as shown in the illustration.

f. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to X10. Position the 5-msec time marker to graticule center (see Fig.

5-9b) and then set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to

XI OFF.

g. Adjust SW P/M AG REGIS R569 (see Fig. 5-2) to position the center 5-msec time marker to graticule center. If necessary, repeat steps 20f and 20g until there is no movement of the 5-msec time marker as the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch is changed from X10 to XI OFF.

21. Adjust X I 0 CAL R544 — Horizontal Amplifier a. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to X10.

b. Adjust X I0 CAL R544 (see Fig. 5-2) so there is 1 marker/cm from the 1-em to 9-cm graticule lines.

For accurate adjustment, set X I0 CAL R544 so the

2nd and 10th markers at the 1-em and 9-cm graticule

5-13

Calibration— Typo 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 lines respectively coincide exactly with the 1 -cm and

9-cm graticule lines.

NOTE

The fo llo w in g hints should help you to o b ta in the best results w hen checking and ad justing the tim e- base sweep rates:

It is q u ite d iffic u lt to detect sm all sw e ep -ra te errors on the ord er o f 1*/. o r 2 % unless measuring over most o f the g ra tic u le w id th . It is th e re fo re re ­ com m ended th a t the sweep rates be checked for correct lin e a rity a n d tim in g using th e center 8 cm and the m iddle 8 0 % o f the d is p la y as shown in

Fig. 5 -1 0 . M easuring over a distance o f 8 cm, the adjustm ent can be m ade m ore accurately. Later in the procedure when checking the no na djusfoble sweep rates w ith o u t using the DELAY-TIME MULTI­

PLIER c o n tro l, a 1.6-mm e rro r w o u ld in d ica te a

2 % sw e ep -ra te e rro r as shown in Fig. 5 -1 1 . The m arker peak provides an exce lle n t reference po in t p a rtic u la rly if the a m p litu d e is such th a t the base line is b e lo w the crt v ie w in g area and the tips o f the markers are lo c a te d in the center o f the crt.

W hen using the sine waves fo r markers a t the h ig h e r sweep rates, set the TU -7 V a ria b le and

V ertica l Position controls so the lo w e r h a lf o f the d is p la y is po sitioned b e lo w the crt and the tips of each cycle are near the center o f the crt. By in ­ creasing the a m p litu d e o f the d is p la y in this m an­ ner each m arker o r cycle tip appears much n a r­ row er.

The ad ju sta ble sweep rates should be set fo r m a x i­ mum accuracy. W hen adjusting the tim in g c a p a c i­ tors, use a screw driver having a m etal tip and a no n m e ta llic shank to m inim ize c ap acitive d is tu rb ­ ances to the circuit. This w ill also lessen the chance o f a c c id e n ta lly g ro u n d in g connections elevated above o r b e lo w gro un d.

2 2 . Adjust X I CAL R566 — Horizontal Amplifier a. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to XI OFF.

b. Adjust XI CAL R566 (see Fig. 5-2) so the 1-m.ec markers are spaced 1-cm apart and the 1-m.ec markers at the 1-cm and 9-cm points coincide * it h the graticule lines.

c. Due to some interaction between the X10 CAL and

XI CAL adjustments, repeat steps 21 and 22 until the timing is correct.

2 3 . Check M A G O N Neon — Horizontal Am plifier a. Check that the M A G O N neon lights when ihe

SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch is set to each one of these positions: X2, X5, and X I0.

b. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to XI OFF.

2 4 . Adjust B SWEEP LENGTH R125 — B Sweep Gen­ erator a. Check that the display is positioned to start at the left side of the graticule or 0-cm line.

5 -1 4

1 -cm

(a ) SWEEP MAGNIFIER crt X I OFF.

Fig. 5-9. Tim*-mork«r displays.

9-cm b. Adjust B SWEEP LENGTH R125 (see Fig. 5-2) for sweep length o f 10.5 cm. When the adjustment is made correctly, there w ill be five 100-psec time marks after the 5-msec time mark located at the

10-cm graticule line.

Fig. 5-10. Determining t weep-rate accuracy.

C a lib ra tio n — Typ« 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

Fig. 5*11 Fronf*panol control to llin g * at Hi# completion of flo p 26 j

5 -1 5

Calibration— Type 547/R M 547

2 5 . Check B VARIABLE (T IM E /C M I and UNCALIBRATED

Neon — B Sweep Timing Switch a. Set the time-mark generator for 10-msec and 5-msec time-mark output.

b. Adjust the B TRIGGERING LEVEL control to trigger on the 10-msec time markers.

c. Turn the B VARIABLE (TIME/CM) control o few de­ grees in the counterclockwise direction. The UN-

CALIBRATED neon should light as the switch on the control is activated.

d. Turn the B VARIABLE control to its fully counter­ clockwise position. A t least 25 msec o f time for a distance of 10 cm should be displayed to indicate a ratio o f 2.5 to 1. That is, the 5-msec marlers should be spaced at intervals o f 2 cm or less.

e. Set the B VARIABLE control to the CALIBRATED posi­ tion.

2 6 . Adjust DELAY START R418 — Delay Pickoff a. Apply 1-msec time markers only to the TU-7 Ext In­ put connector.

b. Set the TU-7 V ariable control so the display is about

2 cm in amplitude.

c. Set the oscilloscope front-panel controls to the lol- lowing positions:

Time Base A

TRIGGERING LEVEL

TRIGGERING

MODE

SLOPE

COUPLING

SOURCE

TIME/CM

ORIZONTAL DISPLAY ain Time Base (B)

TRIGGERING

MODE

SLOPE

COUPLING

SOURCE

TIME/CM

FULLY CW

AUTO

+

AC

NORM INT

10/tSEC

B INTENS BY 'A'

TRIG

+

AC

NORM INT

1 mSEC d. Adjust the B TRIGGERING LEVEL control for stable triggering on the 1-msec time markers.

e. Turn the BRIGHTNESS control in the counterclockwise direction and the INTENSITY control in the clockwise direction to make the brightened portion of the dis­ play easily distinguishable.

f. Set the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to ALT (B

INTENS BY 'A'-ALT-A DLYD) position.

g. Turn the oscilloscope TRACE SEPARATION control clockwise to position the delayed presentation (A display) above the intensified presentation (B dis­ play). Use the TU-7 and oscilloscope position ng controls to center the display vertically and to start at the left side of the graticule.

5-16 h. Turn the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control fully counterclockwise and check for a dial reading of

0.15. If the dial reading is not 0.15, loosen the set­ screw in the knob. Reposition the knob so the dial reading is 0.15 and then retighten the set-screw.

i. Turn the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control fully clockwise and check for a minimum dial reading of

10.15.

j. Turn the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control to read

1.00. Fig. 5-11 shows the front-panel control settings up to this point in the procedure.

k. Adjust DELAY START R418 (see Fig. 5-2) so the 2nd

1-msec time marker on the B display is brightened.

For an accurate adjustment, observe the A time-base display and set DELAY START R418 so the rising portion, starting from the 90% level o f the marker, is displayed (see Fig. 5-12). The A display is a

100X magnification of the brightened portion o f the

B display.

Fig. 5-12. A d|utting th * DELAY START R41R central fo r proper A dolayed-rwoop ilo rtin g lime.

2 7 . Adjust DELAY STOP R415 Delay Pickoff a. Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control to 9.00.

b. Adjust DELAY STOP R415 (see Fig. 5-2) so the A display starts from the 90% point on the rise of the 1-msec marker. This magnified 1-msec marker on the A display is the same marker as the bright­ ened 1-msec marker located on the B display at the 9-cm graticule line. If the adjustment is made correctly, the A display obtained in this step should appear the same as the A display obtained when performing step 26k (shown in Fig. 5-12).

c. Due to interaction between the DELAY START and

DELAY STOP adjustments, set the DELAY-TIME

MULTIPLIER control to 1.00 and repeat steps 26j through 27b until the A sweep starts at the same point on the 1st- and 9th-cm time markers, respec­ tively.

® }

2 8 . Check Incremental Accuracy — Delay Pickoff

Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control so tho A sweep starts at the 90% point on the rising portion o f the 1-msec markers for each setting as given in

Table 5-4.

2 9 . Adjust C l 86 (Unblanking Compensation Capaci­ tor) B Sweep G enerator a. Set the oscilloscope and TU-7 front-panel controls to these settings:

TU-7 Test Function Gain Set

TABLE 5-4

DELAY TIME MULTIPLIER

C o ntrol Setting Tolerance

1.00“

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

6.00

7.00

8.00

9.00

: r r f i i

0 (Adjusted)

± 2 .0 minor div.

± 2 .0 minor div.

± 2 .0 minor div.

± 2 .0 minor div.

± 2 .0 minor div.

± 2 .0 minor div.

± 2 .0 minor div.

0 (Adjusted)

A TRIGGERING LEVEL

A TIME/CM

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY

B TRIGGERING LEVEL

B MODE

B TIME/CM

BRIGHTNESS

INTENSITY

Fully clockwise

50 jiSEC

ALT (A-ALT-B)

Fully clockwise

AUTO

50 m SEC

Fully clockwise

Slightly below normal b. Adjust the TRACE SEPARATION control so the iwo traces are spaced 2 mm apart. Use the TU-7 Vertical

Position control to center the traces on the crt.

c. Readjust the BRIGHTNESS control so the B tra c : is the same brightness as the A trace along the distance from about 2 cm to 10 cm.

d. Adjust C186 (see Fig. 5-13) so the starting p o rio n o f the B trace is the same brightness as the staring portion of the A trace.

NOTE

C186 has the greatest e ffe ct on the firs t 8 mm o f the B trace.

30. Adjust C90C (10-/tsec B Sweep-Rate Timing to

DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER) - B Sweep Timing Switch a. Set the time-mark generator for a 10-^sec tine- marker output.

Calibration— Type 5 4 7 / RMS4 7 b. Set the TU-7 and oscilloscope front-panel controls as follows:

TU-7 Test Function

A TIME/CM

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY

B TRIGGERING LEVEL

B MODE

B TIME/CM

BRIGHTNESS

INTENSITY

Low Load

.1 m$EC

ALT (B INTENS BY A'-

ALT-A DLY'D)

Pushed in

TRIG

IO ji

SEC

Near midrange

Normal intensity c. Adjust the B TRIGGERING LEVEL control to obtain a stable display.

d. Set the TU-7 Variable control so the B display is about 2 cm in amplitude.

e. Turn the TRACE SEPARATION control to position the the A delayed-sweep display above the B display.

f. Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER so the 50% point on the rising portion of the 2nd 10-/isec time marker is brightened. Use the A display to accurately deter­ mine the 50% point.

g. Note the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial reading in relation to 1.00.

h. Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control to read exactly 8.00 plus the dial reading obtained in the previous step.

i. Adjust C90C (see Fig. 5-2) so the 50% point on the rising portion of the 10th time marker is the 50% starting point on the A display.

j. Since there is interaction which affects the dial reading obtained in step 30g, repeat steps 30f through 30i until the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial indicates a difference of exactly 8.00 between the 2nd and 10th time markers.

31. Adjust C90B (1 -nsec B Sweep-Rale Timing to DE­

LAY-TIME MULTIPLIER) - B Sweep Timing Switch a. Set the time-mark generator for a 1-ftsee time-marker output.

b. Set the A TIME/CM switch to .1 /tSEC and the B

TIME/CM switch to 1 ,iSEC.

c. Adjust the TU-7 Variable control so the displays are each 2 cm in amplitude.

d. Adjust the B TRIGGERING LEVEL control to trigger on the time markers.

e. Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control so the 2nd time marker on the B display is brightened storting at the 50% point on the rising portion of the marker.

Use the A display to determine the 50% point ac­ curately.

f. Note the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial reading.

® !

5 -1 7

Calibration— Type 547/R M 547

g. Sot the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control to read ex­ actly 8.00 p lu i the dial reading noted in the pre­ vious step.

h. Adjust C90B (see Fig. 5-2) so the 50% point on the rising portion of tho 10th time marker is the 50% starting point o f tho A display.

i. Due to interaction that affects the DELAY-TIME

MULTIPLIER dial reading that was obtained for the

2nd time marker, repeat steps 31 e through 31 h until the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial indicates an exact

8.00 difference between the 2nd and 10th time markers.

32 . Adjust C90A 10 5- sec 8 Sweep-Rate Timing to the

DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER) - B Sweep Timing Switch a. Set the time-mark generator for a S-mc sine-wave output.

b. Set the 8 TIME/CM switch to ,5/iSEC.

c. Adjust the TU-7 V ariable control to reduce the am p li­ tude o f the display to a suitable level.

d. Adjust the 8 TRIGGERING LEVEL control to obtain stable displays.

o. Turn the INTENSITY control clockwise to increase the brightness o f the tw o waveforms.

t Hi S ' t l . C o llb r o tio n o d | w ttm « n l i H t t l t m f. Check that the first 2 cm o f the storting portion of the B display is linear. If it is not, preset C99

(see Fig. 5-2) to obtain best linearity ot the storting portion o f the display.

g. Check that there is 2% cycles/cm for the remaining portion o f the B display. If there is not, preadiust

C90A (see Fig. 5-2) for proper timing.

h. For a more exact adjustment of C90A, position the B display with the HORIZONTAL POSITION control so the tip o f the 6th sine wove aligns with the 2-cm graticule line.

i. Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control so the brightened portion o f the B display starts ot the

50% point on the rising portion o f the 6th sine wave.

To set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control as ac­ curately as possible, use the A display to determine the 50% point.

j. Note the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial reading It should read approxim ately 2.00.

k. Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control to 7.00 plus the reading noted in the previous step. The falling portion o f the 23rd sine wave, starting at the 50% point, should be brightened as observed on the B display. Use the A display to see the 50% point clearly. If the 50% point is not obtained, adjust

C90A for tho correct point on the A display while

5 -18 ® i

maintaining a timing of 2 '/2 cycles/cm on the B display.

I. Repeat steps 32h through 32k until the DELAY-TIME

MULTIPLIER dial indicates an exact difference of

7.00 between the 50% point on the rising portion of the 6th sine wave and the 50% point on ihe falling portion of the 23rd sine wave. The I ist half cycle of the 23rd sine wave is the port on of the B display that aligns with the 9-cm gratic ile line when correct timing of 2 '/j cycles/cm is <,b- tained.

3 3 . Adjust C99 (B Swoop Output Compensation to Crt

Display) — B Sweep Generator a. Set the time-mark generator for 10-mc sine-wove output.

b. Set the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to B.

c. Set the B TIME/CM switch to .1 m

SEC.

d. Use the TU-7 Vertical Position control to center he display vertically.

e. Using the oscilloscope HORIZONTAL POSITION control, position the tip of the 2nd sine wave to align with the 1-cm graticule line.

f. Adjust C99 for correct timing of 1 cycle/cm.

g. Due to interaction between the adjustment of <99 and C90A, repeat the procedure for these adjust­ ments outlined in steps 32a through 33f until 'he desired results are obtained.

34. Check 0.2-/isec/cm Sweep Rate— B Sweep Timing

Switch a. Set the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to the ALT

|B INTENS BY 'A'-ALT-A DLY'D) position.

b. Set the B TIME/CM switch to .2 pSEC.

c. Center the display vertically. The A display shculd be located above the B display.

d. Horizontally position the displays so the 2nd : ine wave of the B display coincides with the 2 cm graticule line.

e. Set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control so the 5')% point starting on the rising portion of the 2nd line wave is brightened on the B display. Use th< A display to determine the 50% point.

f. Note Ihe DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER dial reading g. Turn the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control clockwise until the 50%, point starting on the rising portion of the sine wave at the 9-cm graticule line is brightened.

Use the A display to determine the 50%, point.

Note the dial reading.

h. The difference between the dial reading noteo in step 34f and the one noted in step 34g should be

7.00 within a tolerance o f ± 7 minor divisions.

i. Set the B TIME/CM switch to .5 /<SEC. Recheck tl e B

0.5 /isec sweep-rate timing using the DELAY-T ME

Calibration— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

MULTIPLIER control and a 5-me sine-wave input from the time-mark generator. Timing accuracy: ±1%>.

35. Check 2-/<sec through 5-sec/cm Sweep Ratei —

B Sweep Timing Switch a. Using Table 5-5 as a guide, check the Main Time

Base (B) sweep rates from 2 /isec through 50 msec.

Use the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control to deter­ mine sweep-rate accuracy. First note the dial read­ ings near the 1.00 setting of the DELAY-TIME MULTI­

PLIER dial for the sweep rate being checked. Do not move the B TRIGGERING LEVEL control after obtaining the reading. Then note the dial reading obtained near the 9.00 position for the same sweep rate. Next, determine the difference between the two dial readings. This difference should be 8.00 within a tolerance o f ± 1 % ,. Check each sweep rate in Table 5-5 using this method.

TIM E /C M

Switch

Setting

TABLE 5-5

A TIM E /C M

Switch

Setting

Tim e-M ark

G en erator

O u tp u t

2 pSEC

5 pSEC

10 m SEC*

20 pSEC

50/xSEC

.1 /iSEC

.1 m SEC

1 m SEC

1 m

SEC

1 m

SEC

.1 mSEC

.2 mSEC

.5 mSEC

1 mSEC*

10

10 m m

SEC

SEC

10 m

SEC

.1 mSEC

2 mSEC | .1 mSEC

5 mSEC .1 mSEC

10 mSEC

20 mSEC

50 mSEC

1 mSEC

1 mSEC

1 mSEC

* A d |u it* d previously.

1 M*e c

5 psec

10 Msec

10 M$ec

50 Msec

100 Msec

100M$ec

! 500 Msec

1 msec

1 msec

5 msec

10 msec

10 msec

50 msec

M arkers/C m on

B D isplay

2

1

1

2

1

1

_

1

1

1

2

1

2

1 b. Using Table 5-6 as a guide, check the sweep rates from 0.1 sec/cm through 5 sec/cm. Use the same procedure as outlined in step 35a.

When checking each of these sweep rates, set the

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to B INTENS BY A ' to check that the proper number of markers/cm are obtained and to set the DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER control so the marker at the 1-cm graticule line is brightened. Then, set the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to A DLY'D and use the DELAY-TIME MULTI­

PLIER control to determine the exact point on the marker where the delayed sweep should start. Note the dial reading. Use this same method to obtain the dial reading from 9.00. Determine the difference which should be 8.00 within a tolerance o f rfcl%,.

5 -1 9

(g)

Calibration— Type 547/R M 547

B Tim e/C m

Switch

Setting

.1 SEC

.2 SEC

.5 SEC

1 SEC

2 SEC

5 SEC

TABLE 5 -6

A Tim e/C m

Switch

Setting lOmSEC lOmSEC lOmSEC

.1 SEC

.1 SEC

.1 SEC

Tim e-M ark

G e n e ra to r

O u tp u t

100 msec

100 msec

500 msec

1 sec

1 sec

5 sec

M arkers/C m on

B Display

2

1

1

1

1

2

36. Adjust C572 and C582 (High-Spood Swoop

Length Compensation) — Horizontal Am plifier.

a. Set the oscilloscope front-panel controls to thuse settings:

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY

B SOURCE

B TIME/CM

B

EXT

.1 juSEC b. Set the time-mark generator for a 50-mc sine-wove output.

c. Connect a coaxial cable from the trigger output of « the time-mark generator to the B TRIGGER INPUT connector.

d. Set the trigger rate o f the time-mark generator lor a 10-fisec trigger output.

e. Adjust the INTENSITY control so the display is easily visible and adjust the B TRIGGERING LEVEL control to obtain a stable display.

f. Adjust the HORIZONTAL POSITION control to posi­ tion the display at start at the 0-cm line of the graticule.

g. Check that C576 and C586 (see Fig. 5-13) slug- adjusting screws are about six turns above the meial wiper contacts o f the capacitors.

h. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to X I0.

i. Adjust C572 and C582 (see Fig. 5-13) for maximum center-sweep expansion. (Use a low-capacitance alignment tool when making the adjustments.) Thr se two capacitors should be adjusted to nearly tne same physical setting.

37. Adjust C591 (High-Speed Sweep Linearity) • —

Horizontal Amplifier

Adjust C591 (see Fig. 5-13) for best center-sweep linearity of 1 cycle/2cm .

38. Adjust C576 and C 586 (High-Speed Timing A d ­ justments) — Horizontal Amplifier

Adjust C576 and C586 in equal increments for b sst timing o f 1 cycle/2cm from the 2-cm graticule line to the 8-cm graticule line.

39. Adjust C557H ( X 1 0 SWEEP MAGNIFIER Compenstatlon) — Horizontal Am plifier a. Turn the HORIZONTAL POSITION control eta k- wise so the start o f the sweep (or display) can oe seen. Then, position the tip o f the 4th cycle from the start o f the sweep to coincide with the 4-cm graticule line.

b. Adjust C557H (see Fig. 5-2) for best timing o f 1 cycle/2cm from the 4-cm to 10-cm graticule lines.

c. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to OFF.

d. Using the HORIZONTAL POSITION and VERNIER controls, position the display to the left so the 10th- cm portion o f the sweep coincides with the 7-em graticule line.

e. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to X 10 .

f. Note the timing error o f the display from the 1-cm to the 9-cm graticule lines; it should be within 5%.

4 0 . Check Timing Accuracy — Horizontal Amplifier

Check the timing accuracy of the display between the 4th cm and 80fh cm of the sweep. Magnified- timing in this region must be within 5% or less. If, in the 20th cm region some nonlinearity is observed, readjust C591 to make the sweep more linear.

NOTE

If the adjustm ents in steps 36 throu gh 40 are accurate, the m a g n ifie d sweep tim in g can be a d ­ justed to be tte r th a n ± 5 % .

4 1 . Adjust C557F < X 5 SWEEP MAGNIFIER Compensa­ tion) — Horizontal Amplifier a. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to X 5 .

b. Adjust C557F (see Fig. 5-2) for 1 cycle/cm after the first 2 cm from the start o f the sweep.

4 2 . Adjust C557D ( X 2 SWEEP MAGNIFIER Compen­ sation) — Horizontal Amplifier a. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to X 2 .

b. Adjust C557D (see Fig. 5-2) for 2 '/2 cydes/cm after the first cm from the start of the sweep.

4 3 . Adjust A SWEEP DC LEVEL R470 — Alternate

Sweep Switching a. Set the time-mark generator for 100-^sec time- marker output.

b. Set the front-panel controls of the oscilloscope to these settings (some of the controls need not be changed since they are already set properly):

A and B TRIGGERING

TRIGGERING LEVEL

MODE

SLOPE

COUPLING

SOURCE

A and B TIME/CM

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY

SWEEP MAGNIFIER

Pushed in

AUTO

+

AC

NORM I NT

1 mSEC

ALT (A-ALT-B)

X I OFF

5 -2 0 @5

c. Set the TU-7 Variable control so the markers are

3 cm in amplitude.

d. Adjust the HORIZONTAL POSITION control so both sweeps start near the center o f the crt.

e. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to X 1 0 (re- center start of sweep if necessary).

f. Adjust A and B TRIGERING LEVEL controls to start each sweep on a time marker.

g. Adjust TRACE SEPARATION control to superimpose the two displays. Fig. 5-14 shows the front-panel setup thus far in the procedure.

h. Adjust A SWEEP DC LEVEL R470 (see Fig. 5-2) so the start of the A sweep coincides with the stari of the B sweep.

4 4 . Adjust A SWEEP LENGTH R325 — A Sweep Gen­ erator a. Set the HORIZONTAL POSITION and VERNIER con­ trols so the end of the B sweep is located near the center of the crt.

b. Set the A SWEEP LENGTH R235 (see Fig. 5-2) so the

A sweep length equals the sweep length o f fho B sweep.

4 5 . Adjust A SWP CAL R290Y — A Sweep Timing

Switch

Adjust A SWP CAL R290Y (see Fig. 5-2) so that each time marker on the A sweep display coincides v ith the corresponding time marker on the B sweep dis­ play.

4 6 . Check A VARIABLE (T IM E /C M ) an d UNCALI­

BRATED Neon — A Sweep Timing Switch a. Set the time-mark generator for a 10-msec end

5-msec time-marker output.

b. Set the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to A and <he

SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to X I OFF.

c. Set the HORIZONTAL POSITION control to posi­ tion the display to start at the 0-cm graticule line.

d. Adjust the TU-7 Variable control so the 10-m.ec markers are about 3-cm in amplitude.

e. Adjust the A TRIGGERING LEVEL control to trigger the sweep on the 10-msec markers.

f. Turn the A VARIABLE (TIME/CM) control a fr w degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Ch«ck that the UNCALIBRATED neon lights as the switch jn the control is activated.

g. Turn the A VARIABLE control to its fully count rr- dockwise position. A t least 25 msec of time for a distance o f 10 cm should be displayed to indicate a ratio o f at least 2.5 to 1.

h. Set the A VARIABLE control to the CALIBRATED posi­ tion.

Calibration— Typo 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

47 . Adjust C290C (10-/r$ec A Sweep-Rate Timing) —

A Sweep Timing Switch a. Set the time-mark generator for a 10-ftsec time marker output.

b. Set the oscilloscope front-panel controls to the follow ing settings:

A and B TIME/CM 10/iSEC

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY ALT (A-ALT-B) c. Set the TU-7 Variable control so the markers are about 3 cm in amplitude.

d. Adjust the A and B TRIGGERING LEVEL controls to trigger on the 10-^sec time markers.

e. Check that the TRACE SEPARATION control is set to superimpose the displayed waveforms.

f. Adjust C290C (see Fig. 5-2) so that each time marker displayed by the A sweep coincides with the corres­ ponding time marker on the B sweep.

NOTE

For b e tte r accuracy, po sition the 2nd m arker to g ra tic u le center using the HORIZONTAL POSITION c o n tro l. Then set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to

X 1 0 . A djust the A and B TRIGGERING LEVEL controls c a re fu lly so the tips o f the 2nd markers coincide. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to

X I OFF and po sition the 10th m arker to gra ticu le center. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to X 10.

If th e 10th A d is p la y m arker does n o t coincide w ith the 10th B d is p la y m arker, readjust C290C fo r p ro ­ per m atching o f markers.

g. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to X I OFF.

h. Position the sweeps to start a t the 0-cm graticule line.

4 8 . Adjust C290B (1-/4tec A Sweep-Rate Timing) —

A Sweep Timing Switch a. Set the time-mark generator for a l-/tsec time- marker output.

b. Set the A and B TIME/CM switches to 1 /iSEC.

c. Set the TU-7 V ariable control so the markers are about 3 cm in amplitude.

d. Adjust C290B (see Fig. 5-2) so that each time marker displayed by the A sweep exactly coincides with the corresponding time marker on the B sweep.

NOTE

If exa ct m atching o f markers can no t be o b ta in e d by ad justing C290B, proceed to the ne xt step since

C299 affects the lin e a rity o f the A sweep fo r the firs t one h a lf o f the sweep. Repeat steps 48 and

49 u n til A sweep tim in g matches th e B sweep tim ­ ing as close as possible.

(To o b ta in best accuracy when ad justing C290B and C299, use the same basic procedure as d e ­ scribed in the NOTE fo llo w in g step 4 7 f ) .

&

5-21

Calibration— Type 547/R M 547

5 -22

Fig. 5*14. Front-panel control to ttin g * a t tho completion o f tto p 43g.

4 9 . Adjust C 299 (A Sweep Output Compensation) —

A Sweep Generator a. If the markers do not coincide accurately when ad­ justing C290B due to some nonlinearity in th< r A sweep, adjust C299 (see Fig. 5-13) for best linearity for the first half of the A sweep.

b. Readjust C290B for correct matching o f marker , at the end of the A sweep. Adjust C290B and C299 for best matching o f the A display to the B display.

c. Check that the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch is ser to

X I OFF and the displays are positioned to start at the 0-cm graticule line.

50 . Ad|ust C 290A (0 .5 -/i*e e A Sweep-Rate Timing) —

A Sweep Timing Switch a. Set the time-mark generator for a 5-mc sine-wave output.

b. Set the A and B TIME/CM switches to .5 /tSEC c. Use the TU-7 Variable control to reduce the am pli­ tude of the displays to about 4-cm.

d. Adjust the A and B TRIGGERING LEVEL control: for two stable sine-wave displays whose first few cycles coincide.

e. Adjust C290A (see Fig. 5-2) so that each cycle offer the first 5 cycles of the A display exactly coincides with the corresponding cycles of the B display. Use the X 1 0 position of the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to magnify the display to make the adjustment more accurate.

5 1 . Readjust C299 (0 .1 -/ite c A Sweep-Rate Timing) —

A Sweep G enerator a. Set the time-mark generator for a 10-mc sine wave output.

b. Set the A and B TIME/CM switches to .1 p'lEC.

c. Adjust the A and B TRIGGERING LEVEL comrols for two stable sine-wave displays whose first few cycles coincide.

d. Readjust C299 to make the A display match the B display. Use the X I0 position o f the SWEEP

MAGNIFIER switch for more exact adjustment.

e. Repeal steps 50a through 51d for the most accurate matching of the A sweep to the B sweep.

5 2 . Check 0.1-ytsec/cm Through 5-soc/cm Sweep

Rates — A Sweep Timing Switch a. Check that the A TIME/CM switch is set to .1 p iEC.

b. Starting with the 0.1-/isec/cm sweep rate, check each of the Time Base A sweep rates using T.ible

5-7 as a guide. Tolerance for the fixed (nonadiust- able) sweep rates is ± 2 % .

NOTE

If you pre fe r, leave th e HORIZONTAL DISPLA/ switch a t A-ALT-B a n d com pare the sw eep-rate

Calibration— Typo 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 tim in g o f A w ith B on sweep rates from 0.1 fis e c / cm to 5 0 m $ e c /c m . Sweep rates slo w er th a n 50 msec/cm can best be checked by setting the HORI­

ZONTAL DISPLAY switch to A and checking the A sw eep-rate tim in g w ith the g ra tic u le . A t the slow er sweep rates position the base o f the m arker dis­ p la y d o w n w a rd out o f view and observe the tips o f the mrakers.

c. After checking the sweep rates, disconnect the time- mark generator and interconnecting cables from the oscilloscope/TU-7 combination.

TABLE 5 -7

A and B

TIM E /C M

Switch Settings

5 mSEC

10 mSEC

20 mSEC

50 mSEC

.1 SEC**

.2 SEC**

.5 SEC**

1 SEC**

2 SEC**

5 SEC**

.i m

SEC*

.2 pSEC

.5 m SEC*

1 m SEC*

2 mSEC

5 yiSEC lOpSEC*

20 MSEC

50 m

SEC

.1 mSEC

.2 mSEC

.5 mSEC

1 mSEC*

2 mSEC

Tim e-M ark

G e n e ra to r

O u tp u t

10 me

5 me

1 Msec

1 m sec

1 Msec

5 Msec

10 Msec

10 M*ec

50 Msec

100 Msec

100 M*ec

500 Msec

1 msec

1 msec

5 msec

10 msec

10 msec

50 msec

100 msec

100 msec

500 msec

1 sec

1 sec

1 sec

Check

For

1 cycle/cm

1 cycle/cm

1 m arker/2cm

1 marker/cm

2 markers/cm

1 marker/cm

1 marker/cm

2 markers/cm

1 marker/cm

1 marker/cm

2 markers/cm

1 marker/cm

1 marker/cm

2 markers/cm

1 marker/cm

1 marker/cm

2 markers/cm

1 marker/cm

1 marker/cm

2 markers/cm

1 marker/cm

1 marker/cm

2 markers/cm

1 marker/cm

'A d ju s t previously (or exact timing.

" S e t HORIZONTAL DISPLAY twitch to A ond the A TIME/CM switch to this setting.

5 3 . Adjust EXT HORIZ DC BAL R519 — (External)

Horizontal Amplifier a. Set the front-panel controls o f the oscilloscope and

TU-7 to the follow ing settings:

Oscilloscope

A TRIGGERING LEVEL

A MODE

A SLOPE

A COUPLING

Fully clockwise, pushed in

AUTO

+

AC

5 -2 3

&

Calibration— Typo 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

A SOURCE

A TIME/CM

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY

VAR 10-1

B TRIGGERING LEVEL

EXT

1 mSEC

EXT X I

Fully clockwise

Fully counterclockwist

Vertical Position

Test Function

Variable

Type TU-7

Centered

Low Load

2.5

b. Connect the single binding-post adapter to the TU 7

Ext Input connector.

c. Connect an interconnecting lead from the adapter .it the TU-7 Ext Input connector to the SWEEP A con­ nector on the oscilloscope.

d. Connect an interconnecting lead from the HORlZ

INPUT connector to ground.

e. Using the HORIZONTAL POSITION control, p o r ­ tion the vertical free-running sweep to the center of the graticule. Adjust the INTENSITY control, if necessary, to make the trace visible.

f. Adjust EXT HORlZ DC BAL R5I9 (see Fig. 5-2) for no horizontal shift o f the vertical trace as the VAR

10-1 control is turned.

g. Disconnect the interconnecting lead from the HORlZ

INPUT connector to ground.

54 . Adjust C 5 24 Output Compensation — (External)

Horizontal Am plifier a. Connect a BNC T connector to the oscilloscope CAL

OUT connector.

b. Connect a coaxial cable from one end of the BNC T connector to the A TRIGGER INPUT connector.

c. Connect another coaxial cable from the other end of the BNC T connector through the coaxial con­ nector adapter to the HORlZ INPUT connecte r.

d. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to 5

VOLTS and adjust the A TRIGGERING LEVEL con­ trol to obtain a stable display.

e. Check that the VAR 10-1 control is set fully clock­ wise.

f. Set the HORIZONTAL POSITION control so the display is centered on the crt.

g. Set the TU-7 variable control so several cycles of the calibrator waveform arc displayed (see Figs. 15a a rd

15b).

h. Adjust C524 (see Fig. 5-13) for the least distorted calibrator waveform (see Fig. 5-15a); that is, f >r minimum fast spike or rolloff.

55. Check G ain — (External) Horizontal Amplifier a. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to .1 VOLTS and check that the VAR 10-1 control is set fully clockwise.

b. Adjust the A TRIGGERING LEVEL control to obtain a stable display.

c. The calibrator waveform displayed on the crt should be greater than 1 cm in amplitude.

-*“t ♦ ♦

1

1

,

1

L

—

L

( a ) T y p ic a l d l t p l a y w ith C 5 2 4 p r e p a r l y a d u t t e d .

1

J

1

. . .

J

1

I l b ) C 5 2 4 m i s a d j u s t e d .

1

1

,1

I

1

1

1

1

-

Fig. 5-13. Typical waveform displays with C524 both properly adjusted and mlsadjusted.

5 6 . Check VAR 10-1 Control Range — (External)

Horizontal Am plifier a. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to .5 VOLTS.

b. Note the waveform amplitude in cm.

e. Turn the VAR 10-1 control fully counterclockwise.

d. Check that the waveform amplitude is 1/10, or less of that noted in step 56b.

e. Turn the VAR 10-1 control fully clockwise.

5 -2 4

57 . Adjust C503C ( X I O Attenuator Compensation) —

(External) Horizontal Amplifier a. Set the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to EXT X IO .

b. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to 5 VOLTS.

c. Adjust C503C (see Fig. 5-2) for optimum square- wave response. (Fig. 5-16 shows one form o f distor­ tion if C503C is misadjusted.) The display should exhibit no more than 5% hook on the positive-going or negative-going portion of the calibrator wave­ form. When C503C is properly adjusted, the calibra­ tor waveform should be similar to the display shovn in Fig. 5-15a.

Fig. 5-16. Distortion obtained when C503C is misad|usted.

5 8 . Check X I O Attenuation — I External I Horizontal

Amplifier a. Set the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to EXT >< 1 and check that the VAR 10-1 control is set fully clockwise.

b. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to 5

VOLTS.

c. Note the waveform amplitude in cm.

d. Set the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to EXT X IO .

e. Set the AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR switch to 5 VOLTS and check the amplitude of the display. The signal amplitude should be within ± 3 % of that amplitude noted in step 58c.

f. Set the HORIZONTAL DISPLAY switch to B.

g. Disconnect the adapters, interconnecting lead arid coaxial cables.

59 . Check a n d /o r Adjust High-Frequency Compensa­ tion — Vertical Am plifier

NOTE

For optim um adjustm ent o f frequency response a m odified Test P lug-in (Load P ulser), 0 6 7-0 521 -01 is recom m ended. The adjustm ent may also be ac­ com plished w ith the Test Plug-in (Load Pulser),

0 6 7 -0 5 2 1 -0 0 . Both m ethods are described be lo w .

Calibration— Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7

Method 1 (Using Test Plug-in 0 6 7 -0 5 2 1 -0 1 )

1. Same procedure as Step 59 a through g, except set the

B TIME/CM switch to .1 /(.Sec and set the 067-0521-01 Repe­ tition Rate switch to 4 kHz.

2. Adjust R1091 for the best square corner on the top of the display.

3. Set the 067-0521-01 Repetition Rate switch to 15 kHz and the B TIME/CM switch to 20/iSec.

4. Adjust R1077 for the best square corner on the top of the display.

5. Set the 067-0521 -01 Repetition Rate switch to 80 kHz and the B TIME/CM switch to .1 /iSec.

6. Continue with Step 59 h, i, j and k.

Method 2 (Using Test Plug-in 0 6 7 -0 5 2 1 -0 0 )

1. Same procedure as Step 59 a through g, except set the 067-0521-00 Repetition Rate switch to low.

2. Adjust R1091 for the best square corner on the top of the display.

3. Set the 067-0521-00 Repetition Rate switch to Med and the B TIME/CM switch to 10/xSec.

4. Adjust RIO77 for the best square corner on the top of the display.

5. Set the B TIME/CM switch to .1 /iSec.

6. Continue with Step 59 h, i, j and k.

a. Set the front-panel controls o f the oscilloscope to the following positions:

B TRIGGERING LEVEL

B SOURCE

B TIME/CM

SWEEP MAGNIFIER

BRIGHTNESS

AMPLITUDE CALIBRA­

TOR

Near 0

NORM INT

.1 /iSEC

X I

Fully clockwise

OFF b. Set the TU-7 front-panel controls as follows:

Vertical Position

Test Function

Centered

-|- Pulse c. Using the oscilloscope HORIZONTAL POSITION control, position the display to start near the graticule center.

d. Set the TU-7 Am plitude and Vertical Position con­ trols so the display is vertically centered on the ert and the amplitude of the step-waveform is exactly

4 cm. (See Fig. 5-17 for complete front-panel setup at this point in the procedure.) e. Using the TU-7 Vertical Position control, position the waveform downward about 2 mm for better visibility (away from the graticule lines).

f. Adjust the INTENSITY control to increase the bright­ ness of the display to normal viewing level.

5 -2 5

Calibration— Typo 547/R M 547

5 -2 6 fig

5-17. Front-pan*! control M ttin g i at the completion o f clop S9d.

C a lib ra tio n — Type 5 4 7 /R M 5 4 7 r

. . ♦.

:

_____ la ) Normal waveform; tw e tp ra t*

I* 0.1 pt*c/cm .

n*rm ol * O v ( t* m ; iw * * p ra t*

I* 10 nt*</cm.

Fig 5 -1 1 l a l Vertical A m plifier high-frequency o d ju ttm e nii and

Trontienf le tp o n t* Comp*n«otian tw itch location!. lb ) 111 57 location.

I d Iffe c t on waveform w h*n C l 106 it m ltod|utted; >w**p ra t* i t 0.1 p to c/

Fig. 5-10. Check o f c o m p u ta tio n odju ttm o nlt fo r optimum V *rticol

A m plifier tra n tie n t retponte.

Fig 5-20. M eoturing th * rite tim * o f a normal waveform when

5W 1000 I t actuated; tweep ra t* i t 1 0 n t*c /c m .

5 -2 7

Calibration— Type 547/R M 547

g. Adjust the FOCUS and ASTIGMATISM controls to produce a well-defined leading top corner on Ihe step waveform.

h. Examine the waveform for clean transient response.

Typical waveform should appear similar to Fig.

5-18a.

TABLE 5 -8

Vertical Am plifier High-Frequency Adjustments

A djustm ent

LI 157

'C l 027

’ Cl 029

C l 076

Cl 105

0 1 0 6

0 1 2 6

R1076

R1106

For Location

See Fig.

5-19B

A p p ro x im a te

A rea A ffe c te d *

0-100 nsec, adjust for mini­ mum wrinkle.

10% to 100% on the rising portion of the step function.

Located on terminals of

VERT G A IN

POT R1010

5-4

5-19a

5-19a

5-19a

5-19a

5-19a

5-19a

5-19a

Termination bump at 340 ns.

0-15 nsec

1 nsec to 4 nsec

5 nsec to 35 nsec

20 nsec to 80 nsec

0 to 10 nsec

2 nsec to 20 nsec

’ Distance measured to the rig h t starting from 90% point on the ritln g portion of H it waveform. For example on Fig. 5*18c.

'Adjust C l0 2 7 fo r o system rlsetime o f 6.93 nsoc o r fastor; bot«*d on o 3 nsec rlsetime pulse from the TU-7. ( If C l027 It adjusted fo r o ritetime considerably fa tte r than 6.93 ntec and aberration! are d ifficu lt to tmooth out with remaining adjuctmentf, then make the tyttem risetime slower, towards 6.93 ntec, by readjusting C l027.

Minimize the aberration! by readjusting a ll of the adjustments be­ low Cl 027 in Table 5-6.1 This adjustment applicable for SN

4750-up.

’ If there is no termination bump, adjust C l 029 for a low o f C if possible, or for the fattest risetime.

i. Set the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch to X 10 .

j. Measure the risetime of the rising portion of the waveform from the 10% point to the 90% point (see

Fig. 5-18b). The system riselime should not be any slower than 6.93 nsec based on a 3-nsec risetime pulse from the TU-7. (Take into consideration sweep-timing error, if any, a n d /o r geometry in the area where the measurement is made.) k. If the aberrations appear excessive a n d /o r the rise­ time is slower than 6.93 nsec, set the SWEEP M A G ­

NIFIER switch to X I and adjust the high-frequency adjustments using Table 5-8 as a guide. Since the adjustments interact, it is necessary to repeat the adjustment procedure several times to obtain a waveform with good transient response. When making the adjustments, keep the step waveform vertically centered on the crt.

NOTE

To check the o v e ra ll level and m aintain a f la t to p when m aking the adjustm ents, use the d iffe re n t

SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch positions.

60. Check Transient Response Compensation Switch

S W 1000 — Vertical Am plifier a. Check that the B TIME/CM switch is set to .1 /iSEC and the SWEEP MAGNIFIER switch is set to X 10.

b. Depress Transient Response Compensation Switch

SW1000 (located at the bottom o f the plug-in com­ partment rear panel). Check the risetime of the step waveform from the 10% to 90% points on the rising portion of the waveform (see Fig. 5-20). O ver­ all risetime should not be any slower than 10 nsec.

5-28

® !

SECTION 6

PARTS LIST an d DIAGRAMS

PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION

Replacement parts are available from or through your local Tektronix Field Office.

Changes to Tektronix instrument, are sometimes made to accommodate improved components as they become available, and to give you the benefit of the latest circuit improvements developed in our engineering department. It is therefore important, when ordering parts, to include the following information in your order: Part number including any suffix, instrument type, serial number, and modification number if applicable.

If a part you have ordered has been replaced with a new or improved part, your local Tektronix Field O ffice w ill cont-ict you concerning any change in part number.

a or amp

BHS

c

cer cm comp cps erf

CSK dia div

EMC

EMT ext f

F & 1

FHS

Fil HS g or G

Ge

GMV h hex

HHS

HSS

HV

ID ined int k or K kc m me

ABBREVIATIONS A N D SYMBOLS

amperes binding head steel carbon ceramic centimeter composition cycles per second cathode-ray tube counter sunk diameter division electrolytic, metal cased electroyltic, metal tubular external farad focus and intensity flat head steel fillister head steel giga, or 10’ germanium guaranteed minimum value henry hexagonal hex head steel hex socket steel high voltage inside diameter incandescent internal kilohms or kilo (TO5) kilocycle m illi, or 10 1 megacycle mm meg or M met.

A

n

n

O D

OHS

P

PHS piv piste

PMC poly

Prec

PT

PTM

RHS rms sec

Si

S /N t or T

TD

THS tub.

v or V

Var w w / w /o

W W millimeter megohms or mega (10‘ ) metal micro, or

10

nano, or 10 9

4 ohm outside diameter oval head steel pico, or 10 12 pan head steel peak inverse voltage plastic paper, metal cased polystyrene precision paper tubular paper or plastic, tubular, molded round head steel root mean square second silicon serial number tera, or 10IJ toroid truss head steel tubular volt variable watt with without wire-wound

X000

000X

•

000-000

Use 000-000

o

SPECIAL NOTES AN D SYMBOLS

Part first added at this serial number.

Part removed after this seiial number.

Asterisk preceding Tektronix Part Number indicates manufactured by or for Tektronix, or reworked or checked components.

Part number indicated is direct replacement.

Internal screwdriver adjus'ment.

Front-panel adjustment or connector.

6-1

Port* L ilt— T yp * 547

EXPLODED VIEW

6-2

REF.

NO.

PART NO.

1 387-0757-00

354-0056-00

2 129-0020-00

355-0503-00

200-0072-00

210-0445-00

210-0206-00

3 131-0274-00

4 214-0335-00

210-0593-00

361-0059-00

210-0849-00

210-0801-00

210-0201-00

210-0442-00

5 210-0202-00

210-0407-00

6 366-0115-00

213-0004-00

7 262-0599-00 100

262-0731-00 2890

260-0536-00

210-0413-00

210-0012-00

8 129-0064-00

358-0181-00

210-0457-00

9 378-0518-00 100

378-0513-00 7210

10 366-0032-00

213-0004-00

11 366-0159-00

213-0004-00

210-0413-00

210-0012-00

210-0207-00

12 331-0091-00

13 366-0215-00 100

366-0215-01 2500

14 366-0261-00 100

366-0283-00 1970

214-0395-00

IFF.

SERIAl/MODil NO.

DISC.

2889

7209

2499

1969

Parts List— Type 547

EXPLODED VIEW

DESCRIPTION i

2

1

1

1

1

2

7

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

1

2

2

2 i

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

9

9

1

1

1

1

1

1

PLATE, front subpanel

Includes:

RING, ornamental

POST, binding, assembly

Each Consisting O f:

STEM, adapter

CAP

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

NUT, hex, 10-32 x ’/ 8 inch

LUG, solder, SE10, long

CONNECTOR, chassis mount, BNC

BOLT, current loop

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, current loop, hex, 5-40 x '/, inch

SPACER, current loop

WASHER, fiber, # 4

WASHER, 5S x */3, inch

LUG, solder, SE4

NUT, hex, 3-48 x 3/«* inch

LUG, solder, SE6

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

NUT, hex, 6-32 x ’/4 inch

KNOB, AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR, large charcoal

Includes:

SCREW, set, 6-32 x 3/ u inch HSS

SWITCH, AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR, wired

SWITCH, AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR, wired

Includes:

SWITCH, unwired

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, hex, 3/s-32 x ’/ 2 inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, ’/ , x '/, inch

POST, binding

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

BUSHING, nylon, charcoal

NUT, keps, 6-32 x 5/is inch

JEWEL, pilot light, red

JEWEL, pilot light, green

KNOB, VERNIER, small red

Includes:

SCREW, set, 6-32 x 3/ u inch HSS

KNOB, HORIZONTAL POSITION, large charcoal

Includes:

SCREW, set, 6-32 x ’/is inch HSS

Mounting Hardware For Pot:

NUT, hex, ’/s-32 x ’/ j inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, 3/e * ’/ j inch

LUG, solder, 3/t inch

DIAL, DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER

KNOB, lever

KNOB, lever

KNOB, BRIGHTNESS, gray delrin

KNOB, BRIGHTNESS, gray delrin

Includes:

SPRING, wire

6-3

Part* list— Type 547

RIF.

NO.

15

16

17

18

260-0531-00

19 384-0287-00

376-0014-00

361-0233-00 X I2690

361-0234-00 X I2690

20 406-0898-00

21

210-0255-00

22 352-0061-00

23

24 136-0026-00

25

PART NO.

333-0754-00

213-0088-00

366-0038-00

213-0004-00

366-0144-00

213-0004-00

262-0596-00

262-0596-01

210-0449-00

210-0006-00

348-0003-00

210-0407-00

210-0006-00

210-0803-00

210-0413-00

210-0012-00

211-0008-00

210-0004-00

210-0406-00

210-0413-00

210-0013-00

212-0004-00

212-0023-00

210-0804-00

211-0507-00

210-0803-00

260-0199-00

210-0473-00

210-0902-00

354-0055-00

210-0414-00

352-0067-00

211-0109-00

210-0406-00

100

5310

SIRIAL/MOOIL NO.

IFF.

DISC.

EXPLODED VIEW (C o n fd )

0

T r .

5309

1

3

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

1

3

3

2

.

2

1

1

1

2

2

2

3

2

2

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

1

2

DESCRIPTION

PANEL, front

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x % inch PHS

KNOB, VARIABLE, small red

Each Includes:

SCREW, set, 6-32 x 3/ u inch HSS

KNOB, "B " TIME/CM OR DELAY TIME, large charcoal

Includes:

SCREW, set, 6-32 x 3/, 4 inch HSS

SWITCH, "B " TIME/CM OR DELAY TIME, wired

SWITCH, "B " TIME/CM OR DELAY TIME, wired

Includes:

SWITCH, unwired

ROD, extension

COUPLING, pot

RESTRAINT, shaft coupling

RESTRAINT, shaft coupling

BRACKET, time/cm switch "B"

Mounting Hardware

NUT, hex, 5-40 x % inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

GROMMET, s/i« ' nch (not shown)

Mounting Hardware For Capacitor: (not shown)

NUT, hex, 6-32 x ’/4 inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

WASHER, 6L x % inch

Mounting Hardware For Pot:

NUT, hex, V«‘ 32 x '/2 inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, 3/« x ’/ j inch

LUG, solder

HOLDER, component

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 4-40 x >/4 inch BHS

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 4

NUT, hex, 4-40 x 3/ 14 inch

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, hex, 3/,-32 x ’/ , inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, s/ , x " / 14 inch

SCREW, 8-32 x s/ u

inch BHS

SCREW, 8-32 x 3/, inch BHS

WASHER, 8S x 3/, inch

SCREW, 6-32 x !/ i4 inch BHS

WASHER, 6L x 3/, inch

SWITCH, POWER O N , toggle

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, switch, ,5/jj-3 2 x % 4 inch

WASHER, .470 I D x 3y3J inch OD

RING, locking switch

NUT, hex, ' s/ j 2- 3 2 x y , 4 inch

SOCKET, light

HOLDER, neon, single

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SCREW, 4-40 x V , inch FHS

NUT, hex, 4-40 x 3/ | 4 inch

6 -4

®

REF.

NO.

PART NO.

26 262-0598-00

260-0493-00

213-0141-00

260-0494-00

213-0141-00

260-0495-00

213-0141-00

260-0542-00

213-0141-00

406-0943-00

210-0586-00

210-0201-00

27 366-0153-00

213-0004-00

210-0583-00

210-0940-00

210-0046-00

28 131-0106-00

210-0413-00

210-0012-00

29 366-0160-00

213-0004-00

30 366-0038-00

213-0004-00

31 262-0600-00

260-0534-00

210-0413-00

210-0013-00

Port* Lift— Type 5 4 7

EFF.

SERIAl/MODEL NO.

DISC.

EXPLODED VIEW ( C o n fd )

Q

T r.

DESCRIPTION

2

1

-

2

1

.

1

-

1 SWITCH, TRIGGERING "B ", wired

.

Includes:

SWITCH, MODE, slide

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x

SWITCH, COUPLING, slide

'/4 mounting hardware: (not included) inch PHS phillips

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x % inch, PHS phillips

SWITCH, SOURCE, slide

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

2

1

-

4

-

2

1

1

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x '/4 inch PHS phillips

SWITCH, SLOPE, slide

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x

BRACKET, lever switch

'/, inch PHS phillips

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, keps, 4-40 x '/4 inch

LUG, solder, SE4

1

-

1

-

KNOB, VAR 10-1, small charcoal

Includes:

SCREW, set, 6-32 x 3/ l4 inch HSS

Mounting Hardware For Miniature Pot:

NUT, hex, y„-32 x y 14 inch 2

1

1

WASHER, y4 ID x % inch OD

LOCKWASHER, internal, .400 O D x .261 inch ID

3 CONNECTOR, chassis mount, 1 contact, BNC

.

Each Includes:

1

-

1

1

1

NUT, hex, V,-32 x

'/ a inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, 3/t x '/j inch

1 KNOB, HORIZONTAL DISPLAY, large charcoal

Includes:

SCREW, set, 6-32 x 3/ u inch HSS

KNOB, SWEEP MAGNIFIER, small red

1

Includes:

SCREW, set, 6-32 x J/ )4 inch HSS

1 SWITCH, HORIZONTAL DISPLAY, front, wired

.

Includes:

1

-

SWITCH, unwired

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

1 NUT, hex, 3/,-32 x '/, inch

1 LOCKWASHER, internal, V« x n/ l4 inch

6 -5

Port* List— Typ* 547

REF.

NO.

32

PART NO.

262-0601-00

260 0535-00 100

260-0796-00 4270

33 406-0902-00

34

35

36

37

38

210-0413-00

210-0013-00

210-0207-00

366-0220-00

213-0004-00

210-0590-00

210-0840-00

210-0013-00

39 366-0254-00

40

41

42

210-0413-00

210-0840-00

210-0012-00

406-0897-00

210-0406-00

210-0004-00

213-0088-00

211-0507-00

210-0457 00

366-0117-00

213-0004-00

213-0004-00

366-0220-00

213-0004-00

366-0220-00

213-0004-00

366-0144-00

213-0004-00

IFF,

SERIAL/MODEL NO.

DISC.

EXPLODED VIEW (Conf’dJ

~S~

T

Y.

4269

DESCRIPTION

-

2

-

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

-

1

1

1 SWITCH, HORIZONTAL DISPLAY, rear, wired

Includes:

1 SWITCH, unwirod

SWITCH, unwired

BRACKET, switch mounting

.

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, hex, 3/i-32 x '/ j inch

WASHER, .390 ID x y 14 inch OD

LOCKWASHER, internal, 3/b x

’/ j inch

BRACKET, trimmer

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, hex, 4-40 x J/ , 4 inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 4

Mounting Hardwaro For Each Capacitor:

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x inch PHS phillips

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x s/ , 4 inch BHS

2 NUT, keps, 6-32 x 5/u inch

2 KNOB, TRIGGERING LEVEL, large charcoal

1

Each Includes:

SCREW, set, 6 32 x 3/ 14 inch HSS

1

1

Mounting Hardware For Each Pot:

NUT, hex, %-32 x '/, inch

1

LOCKWASHER, internal, 3/ i x " / u inch

LUG, solder, 3/8 inch

1 KNOB, SCALE ILLUM, small charcoal

1

Includes:

SCREW, set, 6-32 x 3/ )4 inch HSS

Mounting Hardware For Each Pot:

1

1

NUT, hex, 3/#-32 x

7/ u

inch

WASHER, .390 ID x */,4 inch OD

1 LOCKWASHER, internal, 3/, x " / )4 inch

1 KNOB, ASTIGMATISM, small charcoal

1

Includes:

SCREW, set, 6-32 x 3/, 4 inch HSS

1 KNOB, FOCUS, small charcoal

1

Includes:

SCREW, set, 6-32 x 3/ | 4 inch HSS

1 KNOB, INTENSITY, small charcoal

1

Includes.-

SCREW, set, 6-32 x 3/ l4 inch HSS

1 KNOB, "A " TIME/CM, large charcoal

1

Includes:

SCREW, set, 6-32 x 3/ 14 inch HSS

6-6

(I)

Part* list— Type 547

260-0530-00

44 384-0288-00

376-0014-00

361-0233-00 X I2690

361 0234-00 X I2690

45 406-0899-00

210-0449-00

210-0006-00

348-0003-00

210-0407-00

210 0006-00

210-0803-00

46

210 0413-00

210-0012-00

210-0255-00

210-0583-00

210-0046-00

47 352-0061-00

211-0008-00

210-0004-00

210-0406-00

212-0001-00

210-0804-00

210-0413-00

2100013-00

48 200 0382-00 100

200 0896-02 10000

354-0116-00

49

210-0424-00

50 387-0917 (JO 100

386-0212-00 2070

386-1459 00 10000

51

52 354-0204-00 100

354 0321-00 10000

331-0191-00 X10000

53 200-0269-00 100

200-0745 00 8140

54 136-0035-00

211-0534-00

210-0457-00

166-0328-00 X390

55 200-0534-00

56 378 0541-00

57 352-0064-00

211-0109-00

210-0406-00

MF.

NO.

FART NO.

43 262-0595-00 100

262-0595-01 5310

SERIAL/MODIL NO.

IFF.

DISC.

5309

EXPLODED VIEW (C o a l'd )

9999

2069

9999

9999

8139

DCSCRIPTION i i i i l

i

-

1

2

SWITCH, " A " TIME/CM, wired

SWITCH, " A " TIME/CM, wired

Includes:

SWITCH, unwired

ROD, extension

COUPLING, pot

RESTRAINT, shaft coupling

RESTRAINT, shaft coupling i i

2

-

2

1

BRACKET, time/cm switch "A "

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, hex, 5-40 x '/4 inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

GROMMET, s/ 14 inch (not shown)

Mounting Hardware For Capacitor: (not shown)

NUT, hex, 6-32 x '/„ inch

-

3

3

1

-

2

1

1

-

1

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

WASHER, 6L x % inch

Mounting Hardware For Pot:

NUT, hex, %-32 * '/ 2 inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, 3/t x '/j inch

LUG, solder

Mounting Hardware For Miniature Pot:

NUT, hex, y4-32 x 3/ 14 inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, .400 OD x .261 inch ID 1

1

-

2

HOLDER, component

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 4-40 x % inch BHS

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 4 2

2

-

NUT, hex, 4 40 x 3/ i

4 inch

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

3

3

SCREW, 8-32 x ’/4 inch BHS

1

WASHER, 8S x ’/ , inch

NUT, hex, y a-32 x '/ } inch

1 LOCKWASHER, internal, 3/ , - 3 2 x " / 14 inch

1 COVER, graticule

1 COVER, graticule

Includes:

1 RING, ornamental

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

4 NUT, knurled, %-24 x V,4 inch

1 PLATE, light reflector

1 PLATE, light reflector

1 PLATE, light conductor

SEE STANDARD ACCESSORIES PAGE

1 RING, CRT shockmount

1 RING, CRT shockmount

1 MASK, graticule (not shown)

2 COVER, pot

2 COVER, pot

2 SOCKET, graticule light

-

1

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x 5/ , 4 inch PHS with lockwasher

1 NUT, keps, 6-32 x s/ , 4 inch

2 SLEEVE, insulating

1 COVER, neon holder

9 FILTER, lens, neon light

3 HOLDER, neon, double

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SCREW, 4-40 x % inch FHS

NUT, hex, 4-40 x 3/, 4 inch

6 -7

Partt Lift— Type 5 4 7

HF

NO.

PART NO.

58 214-0433-00 100

354-026200 2070

378-0594 00 10000

59 131-0283-00

EFf.

SERIAl/MODEl NO.

DISC.

2069

9999

61

63

64

214-0357-00

200-0110-00

432-0046-00

60 200 0112-00

200 0111-00

386-0647-00

134 0031-00

262 0597-00

260-0493 00

213-0141-00

260-0494-00

213-0141-00

260-0495-00

213-0141-00

260-0542-00

213-0141-00

406 0943-00

210-0586-00

210-0201-00

62 387-0755-00

212-0040-00

212-0004 00

210 0458-00

344-0097-00

387 0754-00

212-0040-00

212 0010-00

212-0004-00

210-0804-00

2100458-00

EXPLODED VIEW

I C o n f d )

Q

T

Y.

DESCRIPTION i i i

SPRING, light reflector

RING, light plate reflector

REFLECTOR, light plate i i

i i

CONNECTOR, cable, assembly

Includes:

CONNECTOR, CRT anode spring

CAP, CRT anode

BASE i

i

COVER, CRT anode and plate assembly

Consisting of:

COVER, CRT anode

PLATE, CRT anode i

i i

PLUG, CRT contact (not shown)

SWITCH, TRIGGERING, "A " , wired

Includes: l

-

2

1

-

2

2

1

-

1

-

SWITCH, MODE, slide

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x '/4 inch PHS

SWITCH, COUPLING, slide

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x '/4 inch PHS

SWITCH, SOURCE, slide

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x '/, inch PHS

SWITCH, SLOPE, slide

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

-

4

2

1

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x '/ , inch PHS

BRACKET, levor switch

Mounting Hordware: (not included)

NUT, keps, 4-40 x '/4 inch

3

4

2

1

2 LUG, solder, SE4

1 PLATE, plug-in housing, bottom

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

2 SCREW, 8-32 x % inch FHS

2 SCREW, 8-32 x V,4 inch BUS

4 NUT, kops, 8-32 x n/ j i inch

2 CLIP, grounding

1 PLATE, plug-in housing, top

• Mounting Hardware: (not included) t

SCREW, 8-32 x V, inch FHS

SCREW, 8-32 x V, inch BHS

SCREW, 8-32 x

5/ u

inch BHS

WASHER, 8S x y „ inch

NUT, keps, 8-32x ” / j } inch

6-8

P arti List— Type 5 4 7

REF.

NO

65

6 6 214-0400-00

358-0218-00

6 7 387-0871-00

68 387-0804-00

69 214-0359-00 100

220-0486-00 6930

70 406-0903-00

71

74

75

211-0034-00

210-0001-00

210-0405-00

72 384-0270-00

214-0333-00

73 260-0601 -00

212-0004-00

212-0023-00

210-0804-00

212-0039-00

210-0458-00

76 351-0058-00

77 122-0109-00

78

387-0761-00

387-0761-04

134-0027-00

214-0361-00

211-0504-00

366-0271-00

387-0753-00

211-0559-00

210-0457-00

406-0995-00

100

12800

212-0001-00

210-0458-00

210-0804-00

79

211-0507-00 100

211-0596-00 1560

210-0811-00 X I560

210-0803 00 X I560

210-0457-00

80 337-0620-00

81

PART NO.

211-0510-00

260-0516-00

211-0504-00

252-0564-00

SERIAL/MODEl NO.

CFF.

DISC.

EXPLODED VIEW fConf'dj

■ < r

T y.

12799

6929

1559

DESCRIPTION

1 PLATE, cabinet side, left

1 PLATE, cabinet side, left

1

2

Includes:

PLUG, steel

LATCH, quarter turn, assembly

1

1

Each Consisting Of:

PIN, securing, index

1

1

BUSHING, latch bearing

PLATE, latch index

1

1

PLATE, latch locking

SPRING, latch

NUT, push-on

1 BRACKET, micro switch mounting

2

2

2

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x

1 SWITCH

% inch BHS

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 2-56 x ’/ , inch RHS

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 2

2 NUT, hex, 2-56 x 3/i<s inch

1 ROD, micro switch

1 SPRING, micro switch rod

1 SWITCH, COMPENSATION, push

2

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x % inch BHS

1 KNOB, COMPENSATION, push

1

3

1 PLATE, plug-in housing, back

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

4 SCREW, 8 32 x 5/ u inch BHS

SCREW, 8-32 x % inch BHS

WASHER, 8S x 3/8 inch

1

1

SCREW, 8-32 x % inch PHB

NUT, kcps, 8-32 x " / jj inch

4 GUIDE, shoe

1 ANGLE, rail, top left

4

2

-

4

4

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 8-32 x % inch FHS

NUT, keps, 6-32 x 5/i* inch

1 BRACKET, support

Mounting Hardware:

SCREW, 8-32 x '/ , inch BHS

NUT, keps, 8-32 x 1 '/ jj

inch

2

-

-

4

IT

3

3

WASHER, 8S x % inch

Mounting Hardware For Trace Rotator Coil:

SCREW, 6-32 x V h

inch BHS

SCREW, 8-32 x J/s inch THS

3

3

3

WASHER, fiber, # 6

WASHER, 61 x ’/ , inch

NUT, keps, 6-32 x * / „ inch

1 SHIELD, CRT

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x % inch BHS

POLYETHYLENE, extruded channel, cushion (8*/«)

6 -9

Port* Liit— Type 547

REF.

NO.

PART NO.

82 354-0215-00

354-0211-00

211-0560-00

210-0407-00

83 124-0160-00

84 214-0207-00

211-0576-00

210-0949-00

85 343-0089-00 100

343-0089-00 5210

8<5 348-0051-00

87 136-0168-00

136-0117-00

131-0178-00

387-0393-00

213-0086-00

88 348-0006-00

89 406-0994-00

212-0004-00

210-0804-00

210-0457-00

90 406-0936-00

212-0004-00

210-0804-00

210-0457-00

9!

358-0166-00

92 441-0477-00 100

441-0477-01 12480

212-0002-00

212-0004-00

210-0804-00

93 131-0018-00

211-0016-00

166-0107-00 100

166-0030-00 3170

210 0004-00

210-0406-00

94 441-0475-00

212-0002-00

212-0004-00

212-0008-00

210-0804-00

210-0458-00

SERIAL/MODEL NO.

EFF.

DISC.

5209

12479

3169

EXPLODED VIEW (Cont'dj

DESCRIPTION i

1 RING, CRT clamping, assembly

Consisting Of:

RING, clamping i

1 SCREW, 6-32 x 1 inch RHS

NUT, hex, 6-32 x '/4 inch

1 STRIP, liner, CRT clamp

1 NUT, adjusting, securing

-

2

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x 7/a inch socket head

4 WASHER, % 4 ID x '/, inch OD

10 CLAMP, cable, large

1

8

9 CLAMP, cable, large

2 GROMMET, ’ V ia inch

1 SOCKET, CRT, assembly

Includes:

SOCKET, CRT, raw

1

CONNECTOR, cable end, CRT

PLATE, back, CRT socket

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

2 SCREW, thread cutting, 2-32 x 7/ ]4 inch PHS

5 GROMMET, % inch

1

2

1 BRACKET, CRT mounting

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 8-32 x 5/, 4 inch BHS

WASHER, 8S x 3/a inch

5

2

1 NUT, keps, 8-32 x 11/ ] ] inch

1 BRACKET, CRT

• Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 8 32 x V,4 inch BHS

WASHER, 8S x 3/„ inch

3 NUT, keps, 8-32 x " / j , inch

3 BUSHING, plastic, black

4

5

1 CHASSIS, sweep deck

1 CHASSIS, sweep deck

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 8-32 x '/4 inch FHS

SCREW, 8-32 x 5/ 14 inch BHS

I

5

-

WASHER, 8S x % inch

CONNECTOR, chassis mount, 16 contact, female

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

2

2

SCREW, 4-40 x % inch RHS

TUBE, spacing, 7/32 inch

1

3

1

2

2

2

-

TUBE, spacing, 3/ , 4 inch

2 LOCKWASHER, internal, # 4

2 NUT, hex, 4-40 x 3/ l4 inch

1 CHASSIS, high voltage

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 8-32 x

'/ , inch FHS

SCREW, 8-32 x s/ 14 inch BHS

SCREW, 8-32 x '/j inch BHS

WASHER, 8S x 3/ , inch

NUT, keps, 8-32 x ” / 32 inch

6-10

©

Parts List-— Type 5 4 7

RW

NO

95

210-0458-00

210-0863-00

210-0804-00

96 348-0055-00

97 136-0011-00

211-0538-00 X2630

210-0407-00

210-0006-00

98 343-0095-00

210-0406-00

99 385-0129-00

213-0104-00

100 136-0095-00 100

136-0182-00 1160

136-0181-00 1160

136-0181-00 12480

136-0235-00 12480

104 385-0024-00

105

211-0008-00

210-0004-00

213-0113-00

211-0507-00

210-0863-00

210-0803-00

211-0507-00

210-0202-00

213-0088-00

106

213-0088-00

107 210-0201-00

100

354-0234-00 1160

101 426-0121-00

102

103

108

PART NO.

343-0013-00

361-0007-00

131-0235-00

358-0136-00

343-0003-00

213-0044-00

136-0015-00

213-0044-00 i f f .

SERIAl/MODEL NO.

DISC.

EXPLODED VIEW ( C o n i'd i

" 0

T

Y.

1159

12479

1159

DESCRIPTION

1 CLAMP, cable, 3/« inch

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

1 NUT, keps, 8-32 x n/ j } inch

1

1

WASHER, ‘D" type, # 1 0

WASHER, 8S x % inch

5 GROMMET, plastic

1 SOCKET, STM8

-

2

2

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x J/ 14 inch FHS

NUT, hex, 6-32 x ’/„ inch

2 LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

1 CLAMP, tube

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

1

1

1

SCREW, 4-40 x '/„ inch BHS

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 4

NUT, hex, 4-40 x J/ , 4 inch

1 ROD, nylon

• Mounting Hardware: (not included)

1 SCREW, thread forming, 6-32 x % inch THS

35 SOCKET, 4 pin transistor

6 SOCKET, 4 pin transistor

29 SOCKET, 3 pin transistor

27 SOCKET, 3 pin transistor

2 SOCKET, 6 pin transistor

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not incl w/socket)

2

1

1

SCREW, thread forming, 2-36 x 5/ m inch PHS

RING, locking, transistor socket

HOLDER, toroid

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

1 SPACER, nylon, .063 inch

4 CONNECTOR, terminal

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

1

1

BUSHING, teflon

CLAMP, cable, '/4 inch

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

1

1

SCREW, 6-32 x 5/u inch BHS

WASHER, "D " type, # 1 0

1 WASHER, 6L x % inch

2 ROD, aluminum

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

1 SCREW, 6-32 x y 14 inch BHS

1

2

LUG, solder, SE6

Mounting Hardware For Capacitor:

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x ’/4 inch PHS

1

Mounting Hardware For Each Coil:

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x ’/< inch PHS

22 LUG, solder, SE4

1

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SCREW, thread forming, 5-32 x J/ M inch PHS

25 SOCKET, STM9G

.

2

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SCREW, thread cutting, 4-40 x inch PHS

6-11

Port* List— Type 547

NO.

109

PART NO.

119-0030-00

380-0049-00

200-0482-00

200-0482-02

131-0271-00

211-0011-00

211-0513-00

211-0517-00

210 0201-00

210-0407-00

210-0406-00

100

5000

N O

210-0457-00

214-0317-00

214-1138-00

111

112

113

352-0062-00

343-0097-00

211-0008-00

211-0012-00

210-0406-00

210-0599-00

214-0368-00

210-0627-00

670-0401-00

670-0401-01

114

115

388-0553-00

388-0553-01

136-0150-00

136-0183-00

343-0088-00

116

211-0507-00

210-0801-00

129-0069-00

117

361-0007-00

4 4 1 0 4 7 6 -0 0

118

119

120

212-0004-00

210-0804-00

210-0458-00

131-0335-00

1 3 1 0 3 3 6 -0 0

175-0588-00

1 7 5 0 5 9 2 -0 0

1 7 5 0 5 9 5 0 0

343-0088-00

121

2 1 0 0 5 8 3 -0 0

210-0940-00

3 4 8 0 0 0 4 -0 0

100

11120

100

10730

100

10730

100

1410

S H IA I7M O D E I NO.

EFP.

DISC.

4999

11119

10729

10729

1409

EXPLODED VIEW (Cont'dJ

1

1

2

1

1

2

2

1

1

4

T T

T r .

1

1

1

4

2

2

4

4

4

6

6

1

1

1

1

1

4

2

1

1

9

1

1

1

DESCRIPTION

1

1

1

2

2

4

1

1

3

.

1

1

7

DELAY LINE, assembly

Includes:

HOUSING, delay line

COVER, delay line housing

COVER, delay line Housing

CONNECTOR, right hand

SCREW, 4-40 x s/ u inch BHS

SCREW, 6-32 x 3/e inch BHS

SCREW, 6-32 x 1 inch BHS

LUG, solder, SE4

NUT, hex, 6-32 x ’/4 inch

NUT, hex, 4-40 x '/, inch

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, keps, 6-32 x 5/u inch

HEAT SINK, insulator disc

HEAT SINK, transistor

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

HOLDER, transistor heat sink

CLAMP, transistor heat sink

SCREW, 4-40 x % inch BHS

SCREW, 4-40 x »/, inch BHS

NUT, hex, 4-40 x 3/i« inch

NUT, sleeve

SPRING, transistor heat sink holder

RIVET

ASSEMBLY, circuit board, upper vertical am plifier

ASSEMBLY, circuit board, upper vertical am plifier

Includes:

BOARD, circuit

BOARD, circuit

SOCKET, 3 pin transistor

SOCKET, 3 pin transistor

CLAMP, cable, small

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x »/u inch BHS

WASHER, 5S x ’/ „ inch

POST, capacitor tie

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SPACER, nylon, .063 inch

CHASSIS, output vertical am plifier

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 8-32 x */,« inch BHS

WASHER, 8S x % inch

NUT, keps, 8-32 x " / ji inch

CONNECTOR, deflector lead, asembly, brown

CONNECTOR, deflector lead, assembly, blue

WIRE, CRT lead, .833 foot, striped orange, with connector

WIRE, CRT lead, .960 foot, striped green, with connector

WIRE, CRT lead, .960 foot, striped red, with connector

CLAMP, cable, small

Mounting Hardware For Each Miniature Pot:

NUT, hex, ’/4-32 x «/,„ inch

WASHER, '/„ ID x % inch OD

GROMMET, s/» inch

6-12

Part* U*t— Type 5 4 7

PAKT NO.

122 355-0043-00

212-0507-00

210-0010-00

123 200-0257-00

124 432-0047-00

211-0588-00

210-0006-00

210-0407-00

386-0252-00

125 210-0204-00

213-0044-00

126 432-0048-00

211-0588-00

210-0006-00

210 0407-00

386-0255-00

127

212-0037-00

210-0008-00

210-0809-00 100

210-0808-00 10690

210-0462-00

212-0004-00

128

211-0553-00

210-0601-00

210-0478-00

211-0507-00

129

211-0544-00

210-0478-00

211-0507-00

130 432-0047-00

211-0514-00

210-0006-00

210-0407-00

386-0253-00

131 348 0002-00

132 348-0005-00

133 380-0048-00

211-0507-00

134

211-0521-00

210-0801-00

358-0228-00

IFF.

S E K IA l/M O D fl NO.

DISC.

10689

EXPLODED VIEW [Conf'dJ

DESCRIPTION

-

3

-

2

2

2

4 STUD, graticule, replacement (not shown)

• Each Includes:

2

2

1

1

SCREW, 10-32 xV« inch BHS

LOCKWASHER, internal # 1 0

1 COVER, capacitor

1 BASE, small capacitor mounting

-

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x 3/4 inch HHS

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

2 NUT, hex, 6-32 x % inch

1 PLATE, fiber, small capacitor

11 LUG, solder, DE4

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

1 SCREW, thread cutting, 5-32 x 3/, 4 inch PHS

3 BASE, large capacitor mounting

-

2

2

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x 3/4 inch HHS

2

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

NUT, hex, 6-32 x % inch

3 PLATE, metal, large capacitor

Mounting Hardware For Each 25 W att Resistor:

1

1

1

1

1

SCREW, 8-32 x l 3/4 inches Fil HS

LOCKWASHER, internol, # 8

WASHER, resistor centering

WASHER, resistor centering

NUT, hex, resistor mounting

1

1

1 SCREW, 8-32 x */M inch BHS

1 Mounting Hardware For Each 10 W a lt Resistor:

SCREW, 6-32 x 1 y2 inches RHS

1

1

-

EYELET

NUT, hex, resistor mounting

SCREW, 6-32 x s/ 14 inch BHS

Mounting Hardware For Each 5 W att Resistor:

2

2

-

1

1

SCREW, 6-32 x J/4 inch THS

NUT, hex, resistor mounting

1 SCREW, 6-32 x s/ , 4 inch BHS

1 BASE, small capacitor mounting

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x »/4 inch BHS

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

2 NUT, hex, 6-32 x % inch

1 PLATE, metal, small capacitor

2 GROMMET, '/„ inch

5 GROMMET, '/, inch

1 HOUSING, high voltage

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x s/ , 4 inch BHS

Mounting Hardware For High Voltage Transformer:

SCREW, 6-32 x 1'/, inches RHS

WASHER, 5S x » /„ inch

BUSHING, insulator

<D

6 -1 3

REF.

NO.

PART NO.

135 166-0319-00

13 6 337-0566-00

211-0504-00

211-0541-00

137 210-0261-00

211-0587-00

138 200-0475-00

139 211-0521-00

210-0801-00

140 166-0357-00

141 392-0147-00

211-0507-00

142 210 0966-00

143 384-0542-00

211-0507-00

144 385-0170-00

213-0041-00

145 337-0570-00

211-0504-00

146 129-0072-00

131-0309-00

361-0007-00

147 136-0013-00

210-0407-00

210-0006-00

148 214-0435-00

149

210-0471-00

210-0046-00

358-0054-00

150 337-0588-00

211-0504-00

151 • 136-0008-00

213-0044-00

152

210-0444-00

210-0840-00

210 0012-00

210-0207-00

153 348-0031-00

154 385-0134-00

213-0104-00

155 432-0047-00

211-0588-00

210-0006-00

210-0407-00

386-0253-00

6 -1 4

Part* lift— Type 547

EFF.

SERIAl/MODEl NO.

DISC.

EXPLODED VIEW (ConfdJ

"ST

T

Y.

DESCRIPTION

2 SLEEVE, high voltage

1 SHIELD, high voltage

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

4

1

SCREW, 6-32 x '/, inch BHS

SCREW, 6-32 x

' / ,

inch FHS phillips

2 LUG, solder, high voltage

-

1

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x 7/J2 inch HHS

1 COVER, high voltage

-

2

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6 32 x 1 '/, inches RHS

2 WASHER, 5S x ’/ „ inch

1 SLEEVE, high voltage anode lead

1 BOARD, high voltage, with ceramic strips

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

1 SCREW, 6-32 x s/ 14 inch BHS

2 WASHER, insulating, rubber, 7/ u ID x 7/8 inch OD

2

-

ROD, capacitor 'm ounting

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

1 SCREW, 6-32 x 5/, 4 inch BHS

1 ROD, spacer, nylon

-

1

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, thread cutting, 6-32 x 3/, inch THS phillips

1 SHIELD, horizontal preamplifior

2

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x 'A inch BHS

1 POST, diode lie-off

-

-

1

Includes:

CONNECTOR, terminal

-

1

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SPACER, nylon, .063 inch

2 SOCKET, STM8

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

2

.

NUT, hex, 6-32 x ’/„ inch

2 LOCKWASHER, intorna), # 6

2 HEAT SINK, transistor

Mounting Hardware For Each Miniature Pot:

1

2

NUT, hex, 'A - 3 2 x 5/i4 inch x ” /

3 j inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, .261 inch ID x .400 OD

1 BUSHING, banana jack

1 SHIELD, sweep generator

-

2

Mounting Hardware.- (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x 'A inch BHS

7 SOCKET, STM7G

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

2

-

1

1

1

1

SCREW, thread cutting, 5-32 x 3/i<s inch PHS phillips

Mounting Hardware For Each Pot:

NUT, hex, 3/b-32 x ' / 2 inch

WASHER, .390 ID x »/,4 inch OD

LOCKWASHER, internal, 3/8 x '/2 inch

LUG, solder, % inch

14 GROMMET, poly snap-in

3 ROD, delrin

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

2

2

1 SCREW, thread forming, 6-32 x % inch THS

1 BASE, small capacitor mounting

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

2

1

SCREW, 6 32 x % inch HHS

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

NUT, hex, 6-32 x 'A inch

PLATE, metal, small capacitor

Part* List— Typ * 547

RIF.

NO.

PART NO.

156 384-0613 00

157 134-0033-00

158 214-0370-00

212-0004-00

210-0804-00

159 337 0008-00

160 376-0007-00

213 0005 00

161 262-0602-00

260-0496-00

162 260-051600

211-0034-00

210-0850-00

210-0001-00

210-0405-00

210-0586-00

163 343-0005-00

210-0457-00

210-0863-00

164 385-0170-00

213-0068-00

165 387-0756 00 100

386-1093-00 4390

386-1093-03 12800

214-0361-00

214-0400-00

358-0218-00

387-0871 00

387-0804-00

214-0359-00 100

220-0486-00 6930

166 122-0108-00 100

122-0108-02 6730

212-0039-00

210-0458-00

348-0052-00 X2020

212-0071-00 X2020

212-0090-00 8150

167 387-0759-00

212-0040-00

210-0458-00

212-0001-00

212-0004-00

168 441-0478-00

212-0040-00

210-0458-00

212-0001-00

SERIAl/MODEL NO.

IFF.

DISC.

4389

12799

6929

6729

8149

EXPLODED VIEW (ConfdJ

DESCRIPTION

2

1

1 ROD, anchor

.

Includes:

PLUG, banana, male, push in type

-

PIN, locating

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

2 SCREW, 8-32 x 5/ l4 inch BHS

2 WASHER, 8S x % inch

1 SHIELD, tube

1 COUPLING

Includes:

2 SCREW, set, 8-32 x % inch HSS

1 SWITCH, single sweep

Includes:

1

1

-

SWITCH, unwired

SWITCH, reset, push

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 2-56 x 'A inch RHS 2

2

2

2

-

WASHER, # 2 flat

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 2

NUT, hex, 2-56 x 3/ „ inch

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

2 NUT, keps, 4-40 x '/4 inch

1 CLAMP, cable, 7/ )4 inch

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

1

1

NUT, keps, 6-32 x s/ u inch

WASHER, "D " type, #10

1 ROD, spacer, nylon

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

1 SCREW, thread cutting, 6-32 x 5/i< inch FHS

1

1

1

1

1 PLATE, cabinet, bottom

1 PLATE, cabinet, bottom

1 PLATE, cabinet, bottom

.

Includes:

4

-

1

LATCH, quarter turn, assembly

Each Consisting Of:

PIN, securing, index

BUSHING, latch bearing

PLATE, latch index

PLATE, latch locking

1

SPRING, latch

NUT, push-on

2 ANGLE, rail, bottom

2 ANGLE, rail, bottom

.

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

4

-

SCREW, 8-32 x »/, inch THS

4 NUT, keps, 8-32 x

" / jj

inch

4 FOOT, rubber (not shown)

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

5

5

7

2

-

SCREW, 8-32 x 1 inch, Fil HS

2 SCREW, 8-32 x 0.875 inch, Fil HS

1 PLATE, vertical bulkhead

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

4

4

SCREW, 8-32 x 3/, inch THS

NUT, keps, 8-32 x

,,/ 3J inch

3

2

SCREW, 8-32 x % inch BHS

SCREW, 8-32 x 5/u inch BHS

1 CHASSIS, power

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 8-32 x 3/, inch THS

NUT, keps, 8-32 x

" / jj

inch

SCREW, 8-32 x '/„ inch BHS

©

6 -1 5

Part* List— Type 547

REF.

NO.

PART NO.

210-0804-00

169 337-0574-00

211-0504-00

210-0803-00

210-0457-00

170 136-0022-00

213-0044-00

171

213-0044-00

172 406-0023-00

211-0507 00

210-0006-00

210-0407-00

173

210-0444-00

210-0840 00

210-0012 00

174 348-0003-00

175 210 0259 00

213-0055-00

176 441-0474-00 100

441-0474-01 12480

177 213-0172 00

354-0311-00 100

178 131-0269-00

179 358-0214-00

212 0008-00

180 210 0255-00

181 381-0215-00

212-0008-00

182 387-0762 00 100

387 0762-04 12800

214-0361-00

214-0400-00

358-0218 00

387-0871-00

387-0804-00

214-0359-00 100

220-0486-00 6930

183 384-0614-00

184 361-0052-00 100

358-0237-00 175

212-0010-00

185 358-0042-00 100

361-0052-00 175

186 343-0003-00

212-0008-00

210-0863-00

187 406-0928 00 100

406-0928-02 6730

EFF.

SERIAL/MODEL NO.

DISC.

12479

7529X

12799

6929

174

174

6729

EXPLODED VIEW (C a n t'd )

DESCRIPTION

1

1

7 WASHER, 8S x V, inch

1 SHIELD, upper calibrator switch

-

Mounting Hardware: (not included!

SCREW, 6-32 x '/„ inch BHS

1

WASHER, 6L x V. inch

NUT, keps, 6-32 x 5/i« inch

1 SOCKET, STM9, shielded

-

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

2

-

SCREW, thread cutting, 5-32 x 3/ l6 inch PHS

Mounting Hardware For Thermal Cutout:

2 SCREW, thread cutting, 5-32 x 3/| 4 inch PHS

2 BRACKET, pot

2

2

2

-

-

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x */M inch BHS

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

NUT, hex, %-32 x '/j x s/« inch long

Mounting Hardware For Pot:

NUT, hex, 3/ 8-32 x

'/2 x Vb inch

WASHER, .390 ID x V,4 inch OD

1

1

1 LOCKWASHER, internal, % x '/2 inch

5 GROMMET, 5/ 14 inch

-

1 LUG, solder, # 2

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

1 SCREW, thread cutting, 2 - 3 2 x 3/,4 inch PHS

1 CHASSIS, delayed sweep

1 CHASSIS, delayed sweep

-

2

2

2

Includes:

THUMBSCREW, 6-32x0.812 inch

RING, rubber, 0.078 inch ID

2

CONNECTOR, receptacle

BUSHING, insulator

-

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

3 SCREW, 8-32 x '/, inch BHS

1 LUG, solder, pot

1 BAR, stop

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

1 SCREW, 8-32 x '/2 inch BHS

1 PLATE, cabinet, right side

1 PLATE, cabinet, right side

2

Includes:

LATCH, quarter turn, assembly

Each Consisting Of:

PIN, securing, index 1

1

1

BUSHING, latch bearing

1

1

PLATE, latch index

PLATE, latch locking

1

SPRING, latch

NUT, push-on

1 ROD, chassis hinge

MountingHardware: (not included)

1 SPACER, hinge pin

1

1

BUSHING, hinge rod

SCREW, 8-32 x 5/, inch BHS

1 BUSHING, nylon

1 SPACER, hinge pin

1 CLAMP, cable, '/4 inch

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

1

1

SCREW, 8-32 x 5/8 inch BHS

WASHER, "D " type, # 1 0

1 BRACKET, transformer

1 BRACKET, transformer

6 -1 6

©

Parts List— Type 5 4 7

REF.

NO.

PART NO.

210-0564-00

210-0010-00

188 381-0221-00

212-0033-00

210-0458-00

212-0509-00 100

212-0559-00 6730

212-0534-00

210-0010-00 100

210-0010-00 6730

189 348-0012-00

190

212-0524-00

210-0812-00

210-0010 00

210-0564-00

191 384-0612-00

192 202-0102-00

210-0457-00

193 426-0193-00

212-0039-00

194 147-0026 00

210-0458-00

195 214-0210-00

214-0209-00

361-0007-00

196 369-0007-00

197 200-0260-00

198 200-0259-00

199 432-0048-00

211 0588-00

210-0006-00

210-0407-00

386-0254-00

200 387-0758-00 100

387-0758-02 7980

354-0056-00

201 387-0766-00 100

387-0766-01 7980

213-0104-00

202 334-0904-00 100

213 0088 00 100

203

212-0037-00

210-0808-00

210-0462-00

212-0004-00

204 352-0002-00 100

352-0010-00

SERIAl/MODEL NO.

EFF.

DISC.

EXPLODED VIEW (Cont'd)

6729

6729

7979

7979

7979X

7979X

7979X

DESCRIPTION

2

2

NUT, hex, 10-32 x 3/s inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 1 0

2 BAR, transformer support

-

2

2

_

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SCREW, 8-32 x 3/4 inch BHS

NUT, kcps, 8 - 3 2 x " / jj inch

1 SCREW, 10-32 x 5/e inch BHS

1

1

SCREW, 10-32 x 5/s inch, 100° csk, FHS

SCREW, 10-32 x 1 inch BHS

2

1

LOCKWASHER, internal, #1 0

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 1 0

1 GROMMET, % inch

Mounting Hardware For Transformer:

4

4

SCREW, 1 0 -3 2 x 3 '/, inches HHS

WASHER, fiber, # 1 0

4

2

2

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 1 0

NUT, hex, 10-32 x 3/ ( inch

ROD, transformer standoff

1 CAN, relay cover

2

1

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, kcps, 6-32 x 5/ l4 inch

M OUNT, fan motor

4

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 8-32 x ’/ , inch THS

1 MOTOR, fan

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

4 NUT, kcps, 8-32 x n / 3 2

inch

1 SPOOL, solder, assembly

1

Includes:

SPOOL, solder

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

2

-

1 SPACER, nylon, .063 inch

1 FAN, 7 inch

1 COVER, large capacitor

1 COVER, large capacitor

2

BASE, large capacitor mounting

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x 3/„ inch HHS

4

1

1

1

1

2

2

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

NUT, hex, 6-32 x '/4 inch

2 PLATE, fiber, large capacitor

1 PLATE, rear subpanel

1 PLATE, rear subpanel

Includes:

RING, ornamental

PLATE, rear overlay

PLATE, rear overlay

2

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, thread forming, 6-32 x J/ 8 inch PHS

TAG, voltage rating

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, thread forming, 4-40 x '/4 inch PHS

Mounting Hardware For 20 W att Resistor

1

1

SCREW, 8-32 x 13/4 inches Fil HS

WASHER, resistor centering

1

1

NUT, hex, resistor mounting

SCREW, 8-32 x 5/, 4 inch BHS

1 HOLDER, fuse, assembly

1

Consisting O f:

HOLDER, fuse

6 -7 7

Part* List— Type 547

PEP.

NO

206

207

208

PART NO.

200-0015-00

210-0873-00

204-0279-00 X7980

210-0006 00

210-0407-00

200 0704-00 X7980

352-0102-00

213-0088-00

179-1214-00 X7980

205 131-0150-00 100

131-0150-01 6590

131-0572-00 7210

129-0041-00

129-0041 01

200 0185-00

200-0185-01

213-0104-00

161 0033-01

161-0033-00

358-0161-00

103-0071-01

211-0537-00

210-0457-00

210 0202 00

213-0146-00

124-0207-00

358-0324-00

213-0166-00

211 -0542-00

378-0023-00

378-0762-00

213-0104-00

214-1000-00

406-0910 00

211-0537-00

100

6590

100

6590

204 0335-00 7210

210-0003-00 100

210-0551 -00 100

211-0132-00 X6590

211-0534-00 7210

211-0015-00 100

213 0088-00 6590

213-0146-00 7210

214-0078 00 100

377-0041-00 100

377-0051-00 6590

214 1016-00 7210

X7980

X7980

EFF.

SERIAl/MODEl NO.

DISC.

EXPLODED VIEW ( C o n fd )

~ T T

T y.

6589

7209

7979X

6589

7209

6589

7209

7979X

6589X

6589X

7209

7979X

6589

7209

7979X

7979X

6589

7209

7979X

DESCRIPTION

1

-

CAP, fuse

WASHER, rubber, ’/ , I D x " / u inch OD

-

-

NUT, fuse holder

1 BODY, line voltage selector (not shown)

2

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

2 NUT, hex., 6-32 x '/< inch

1 COVER, line voltage selector (not shown)

■ consisting of:

-

2 HOLDER, plastic, fuse

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

1 SCREW, thread forming, # 4 x '/4 inch, PHS

1 CABLE HARNESS, line voltage selector (not shown)

1 CONNECTOR, chassis mounted, motor base

1 CONNECTOR, chassis mounted, motor base

1

1

2

1

1

1

2

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

-

1 CONNECTOR, chassis mounted, motor base consisting of:

POST, ground

POST, ground

COVER

COVER

B O D Y -C O N T A C T ASSEMBLY

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 4

NUT, hex., 4-40 x '/<

SCREW, sems, 4-40 x inch

'/ , inch, PHS

SCREW, scms, 6-32 x y ]4 inch, PHS

SCREW, 4 40 x

'/ , inch, RHS

SCREW, thread forming, # 4 x '/ , inch, PHS

1

1

SCREW, thread forming, # 6 x 0 .3 1 3 inch, PHS

PIN, connecting

INSERT

INSERT

INSULATOR

-

-

2

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, thread forming, 6-32 x % inch THS

1 ASSEMBLY, power cord consisting of:

1

1

1

CORD, power

BUSHING, strain relief

ADAPTER, strainn relief

2

2

-

.

1

Mountinng Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x 3/, inch, THS

NUT, keps, 6-32 x 5/, 4 inch

LUG, solder

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, thread forming, # 6 x 0 .3 1 3 inch, PHS 1

-

1 TERMINAL STRIP, ceramic, w /2 notches

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

2

2

BUSHING, sleeve

SCREW, thread forming, # 6 x 0 .7 5 inch, PHS

-

2

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x !/ u inch, THS

1 FILTER, air, foam

1 SCREEN, filter

-

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

4

4

SCREW, thread forming, 6-32 x % inch THS

CORNER, filter

1 BRACKET, shunt resistor

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

2 SCREW, 6-32 x 3/, inch THS

6-18

©

Part* list— Typ« 54 7 n r .

NO.

209 122-0019-00

210

211-0559-00

210-0457-00

380-0018-00

212-0031-00

210-0458-00

210-0402-00

211 131-0206-00

212

213 387-0853-00

214

215

216

217 344-0098-00

212-0566-00 100

212-0507-00 4420

210-0010 00 X4420

218 367-0037-00

219

220

221 441-0473-00 100

222

223

PART NO.

210-0559-00

210 0021-00

210-0260-00

260-0209-00

210-0473-00

210-0902-00

210-0414-00

129-0064-00

210-0457-00

346-0027-00

381-0217-00

381-0073-00

212-0039-00

211 0503-00

441-0473-01

212-0004-00

210-0804-00

212-0040-00

210-0458-00

337-0589-00

211-0504-00

366-0220 00

2340

213 0004-00

224 348-0063 00

225 X2340

386 0143-00

211-0510-00

210-0983-00 2340

210-0935-00 4420

210-0802-00

210 0006-00 2340

210-0202-00

210-0407-00 2340

210 0457-00 3270

SERIAl/MODEl NO.

EfF.

DISC.

4419

2339

4419

3269X

3269

EXPLODED VIEW (Conf'd)

‘ o

T

Y.

DESCRIPTION

1

1

2

2

1

2

2

2

2

4

-

1 ANGLE, frame, top right

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 6-32 x % inch FHS

4 NUT, keps, 6-32 x 5/u inch

1 HOUSING, air filter

2

2

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 8-32 x 1 '/„ inches RHS

NUT, keps, 8-32 x m

/ j i

inch

2 NUT, cap, hex, 8-32 x 5/is inch

1 CONNECTOR, receptacle

-

1

1

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, hex, 7,4-28 x V ,4 inch

LOCKWASHER, infernal

3

3

1

1 LUG, solder

1 SWITCH, CRT CATHODE SELECTOR, toggle

-

1

1

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, switch, '73,-32 x

>/tA

inch

1

WASHER, .470 ID x *V32 inch OD

NUT, hex, '73,-32 x */u inch

1 PLATE, binding post mounting

1 POST, binding

4

4

-

1

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

NUT, keps, 6-32 x 7,« inch

1 STRAP, ground

1 BAR, top support, with handle

• Includes:

CLIP, handle

4

4

2

-

-

2

4

SCREW, 1 0 -3 2 x 7 u inch RHS

SCREW, 1 0 -3 2 x 7 , inch PHS

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 1 0

HANDLE

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

BAR, retaining

SCREW, 8-32 x 7 , inch THS

Mounting Hardware For Relay:

2 SCREW, 6-32 x 7 u inch BHS

1 CHASSIS, vertical am plifier

1 CHASSIS, vertical am plifier

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, 8-32 x 7 ,4 inch BHS

WASHER, 8S x 7e inch

SCREW, 8-32 x 7is inch PHS

1 NUT, keps, 8-32 x ' '/3, inch

1 SHIELD, sweep amplifier

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

2 SCREW, 6 32 x inch PHS

1 KNOB, TRACE SEPARATION, small charcoal

.

Includes:

1 SCREW, set, 6-32 x »/,« inch HSS

1 GROMMET, plastic, '/ j inch

1 TRANSISTOR

-

Mounting hardware: (not included w/transistor)

PLATE, mica insulator

SCREW, 6-32 x 7 , inch, PHS

WASHER, shoulder

WASHER, fiber, 0.140 ID x 0.375 inch OD

WASHER, 6S x 7 ,4 inch

LOCKWASHER, internal, # 6

LUG, solder, SE 6

NUT, hex, 6-32 x '/4 inch

NUT, keps, 6-32 x s/ ] t inch

©

6 -1 9

Parts List— Typ« 547

CERAMIC STRIP & CABLE

6-20

HIGH VOLTAGE

CD CD

L

- v y V e r s s r s r s

®

Part* List— Type 547

RIF.

NO.

1 179-0771-00 100

179-0771-01 7980

2 179-0761-00 100

179-0761-01 7980

3 179 0765-00 100

179-0765-01 7980

4 179-0764 00 100

179-0764 01 7330

5 124-0089-00

6 124-0091-00

7

8 124 0088-00

355-0046-00

361-0009-00

9 179-0762-00

10 124 0094-00

11 124 0095-00

12

PART NO.

355-0046-00

361-0009 00

355-0046-00

361-0009 00

124-0090-00

355 0046-00

361 0009-00

355-0046 00

361 0009-00

355-0046-00

361-0009-00

124-0155-00

355-0082-00

361-0039-00

13 124-0157-00

355-0082-00

361-0039 00

14 124-0154-00

355-0082-00

361 0039-00

15 179-0769-00

16 179-0767-00

17 124-0120-00

355-0046-00

361-0008-00

CABLE HARNESS A N D CERAMIC STRIP DETAIL

EFF.

SERIAL/MOOIL NO.

DISC.

<■r

T

V.

DESCRIPTION

7979

7979

7979

7329

1 CABLE HARNESS, inter-connecting

1 CABLE HARNESS, inter-connecting

1 CABLE HARNESS, power

1 CABLE HARNESS, power

1 CABLE HARNESS, 110 volt

1 CABLE HARNESS, 110 volt

1 CABLE HARNESS, 150 volt adjustment

1 CABLE HARNESS, 150 volt adjustment

-

2

5 STRIP, ceramic, J/ 4 inch x 7 notches

-

Each Includes:

2 STUD, nylon

Mounting Hardware For Each; (not included)

SPACER, nylon, .313 inch

6 STRIP, ceramic, 5/4 inch x 11 notches

-

Each Includes:

2 STUD, nylon

-

.

2

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

2 SPACER, nylon, .313 inch

8 STRIP, ceramic, J/4 inch x 9 notches

Each Includes:

STUD, nylon

2

.

-

2

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SPACER, nylon, .313 inch

3 STRIP, ceramic, */4 inch x 4 notches

.

Each Includes:

STUD, nylon

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

2 SPACER, nylon, .313 inch

1 CABLE HARNESS, " A " sweep

1 STRIP, ceramic, 7/ )4 inch x 7 notches

.

Includes:

2

2

.

STUD, nylon

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SPACER, nylon, .313 inch

2

.

2 STRIP, ceramic, 7/ ]4 inch x 9 notches

• Each Includes:

STUD, nylon

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

2 SPACER, nylon, .313 inch

15 STRIP, ceramic, 7/, 4 inch x 16 notches

.

Each Includes:

2

-

STUD, nylon

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

2

-

2 SPACER, nylon, n/ 3j inch

8 STRIP, ceramic, 7/, 4 inch x 3 notches

.

Each Includes:

STUD, nylon

2

25

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SPACER, nylon, n/ j j inch

STRIP, ceramic, 7/, 4 inch x 20 notches

.

2

-

Each Includes:

STUD, nylon

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

2

-

2 SPACER, nylon, " A j

inch

1

CABLE HARNESS, focus and intensity

1 CABLE HARNESS, high voltage

1 STRIP, ceramic, 7/| 4 inch x 4 notches

.

Includes:

STUD, nylon

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

2 SPACER, nylon, .188 inch

©

6-21

Parts List— Type 547

REF.

NO.

FART NO.

18 124-0089-00

355-0046-00

361 -0008-00

19 124-0093-00

355-0046-00

361-0009-00

20 179-0763-00 100

179-0763-01 6740

21 124-0164-00

22 124-0163-00

23 124-0162-00

355-0046-00

361-0007-00

24 179-0770-00 100

179-0770-01

25 124-0156-00

2340

355-0082-00

361-0039-00

CABLE HARNESS A N D CERAMIC STRIP DETAIL (Con/'dJ

EFF.

SERtAL/MODEL NO.

DISC.

6739

2339

O f

1.

DESCRIPTION

-

4 STRIP, ceramic, J/» inch x 7 notches

.

2

Each Includes:

STUD, nylon

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

2 SPACER, nylon, .188 inch

5 STRIP, ceramic, 7/\t inch x 5 notches

-

2

Each Includes:

STUD, nylon

-

2

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SPACER, nylon, .313 inch

1

1

CABLE HARNESS, "B " sweep

CABLE HARNESS, "B " sweep

2 STRIP, ceramic, 4 notches

4 STRIP, ceramic, 2 notches

1 STRIP, ceramic, 7/u inch x 4 notches

.

1

Includes:

STUD, nylon

•

1

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

SPACER, nylon, .063 inch

1

-

CABLE HARNESS, lower vertical amplifier

1

CABLE HARNESS, lower vertical am plifier

2 STRIP, ceramic,

T/ H

inch x 13 notches

Each Includes:

2

-

STUD, nylon

Mounting Hardware For Each: (not included)

2 STUD, nylon,

" / j j inch

6 -2 2 ©

STANDARD ACCESSORIES

P arti List— Type 54 7

REF

NO

PART NO.

1 010-0129-00

2 161-0010-00 100

161-0010-03 6270

3 387-0918-00

4

378-0545-00 100

378-0567-00 2590

012-0031-00 100

012-0087-00 1590

5 012-0091-00 X1590

6 012-0092-00 X I590

7 103-0033-00

*

070-0398-00

EPF.

SERIAL/MODEL NO.

DISC.

6269

7979X

2589

1589

1589X

DESCRIPTION

<

2 PROBE, package, P6008

1 CORD, power

1 CORD, power

1 PLATE, protector

1 FILTER, light, smoke gray (installed)

1 FILTER, light, smoke gray (installed)

2 CORD, patch

3 CORD, patch

2 CORD, patch

1 JACK, BNC— post

3 ADAPTER, BNC to binding post

1 M ANUAL, instruction (not shown)

6 -2 3

NOTES

Part* U tt— Type 5 4 7

ELECTRICAL PARTS

Values are fixed unless marked Variable.

Ckt. N o.

T ektronix

Part No.

D escription

Bulbs

B89

B90W

B94

B289

B290W

B294

B550

B579

B583

B589

B602

B603

B604

BI184

B1194

150-030

150-030

150-027

150-030

150-030

150-027

150-030

150-037

150-027

150-037

150-001

150-031

150-031

150-030

150-030

Neon, NE-2V

Neon, NE-2V

Neon, NE-23

Neon, NE-2V

Neon, NE-2V

Neon, NE-23

Neon, NE-2V

Neon, ST2-27S

Neon, NE-23

Neon, ST2-27S

Incandescent, # 4 7

Incandescent, # 4 4

Incandescent, # 4 4

Neon, NE-2V

Neon, NE-2V

Pilot Light

Graticule Light

Graticule Light

C56

C57

C67

C67

C76

0 6

0 8

C43

C49

C50

C51

C53

C56

C apacitors

Tolerance ± 2 0 % unless otherwise indicated.

Tolerance o f a ll electrolytic capacitors as follows (with e<eeptions):

3V - - 50V = - 1 0 % , + 250%

5 1 V - -350V = - 1 0 % , +100%

351V - -450V = - 1 0 % , + 50%

Cl

C2

C4

C5

C6

283-001

281-523

283-002

283-000

281-512

0.005 pf

100 pf

0.01 pf

0.001 pf

27 pf

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

C8

CU

C12

CIS

C41

Use 283-057

283-001

281-523

283-067

281-523

0.1 pf

0.005 pf

100 pf

0.001 pf

100 p f

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

281-525

283-006

283-002

283 002

283-000

281-576

470 pf

0.02 pf

0.01 pf

0.01 pf

0.001 p f

11 pf

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

281-0578-00

281-0578-00

283-026

285-0835-00

290-187

290-0175-00

283-003

18 pf

18 pf

0.2 pf

0.22 p f

4.7 pf

10 p f

0.01 p f

Cer

Cer

Cer

Plastic

EMT

EMT

Cer

C83

C85

C90A

C90B

C90C

C90D

281-524

281-519

281-007

281-007

281-010

281-574

150 pf

47 pf

3-12 pf

3-12 pf

4.5-25 pf

82 pf

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Var

Var

Var

S /N Range

READY

UNCALIBRATED

READY

UNCALIBRATED

M A G O N

500 v

600 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

50 0*

500 v

25 v

100*

35 v

35 v

150 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

350 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

200 v

500 v

350 v

200 v

350 v

500 v

10%

10%

10%

10%

5%

5%

5%

2%

100-6739X

100-6739X

100-6739

6740-up

X6740-up

100-15049

15050-up

100-6739

6740-up

6 -2 5

Ckt. N o.

C90E

C90F

C90G

C90H

C90J

C90E

C90F

C90G

C90H

C90J

C90K

C92

C94

C96

C98

C99

Cl 01

C l 03

Cl 28

C130A

C l 308

C130C

Cl 300

C130E

C l 37

Cl 44

Cl 46

Cl 66

Cl 70

C175

C178

Cl 86

Cl 88

C192

C l 97

C199

C201

C202

C204

C205

C206

C211

C212

C218

C241

C243

C249

C253

C256

C256

C257

6-26

Ports list— Typo 547

Tektronix

Port N o.

*295-073

*295-0104-00

281-524

283 001

281-578

283-006

Use 281-604

281-007

281-523

283-000

281-550

281-550

281-511

283-001

281 -523

283-002

283-000

281-512

283-001

281-523

283-000

281-523

281-525

283-006

283-000

281-576

281-0578-00

281-0578-00

285-543

285-636

285-633

285-576

281-523

283-002

281-512

281-543

281-605

281-512

281-558

281 -012

283-002

283-006

283-006

18 p f

7-45 pf

0.01 p f

0.02 p f

0.02 p f

22 pf

0.005 Mf

100 pf

0.01 p f

0.001 p f

0.0022 p f

0.022 p f

0.22 p f f p f

100 pf

0.01 p f

27 pf

270 pf

200 pf

27 pf

27 pf

0.005 p f

100 pf

0.001 p f

100 pf

470 pf

0.02 p f

0.001 p f

11 pf

18 pf

18 pf

150 pf

0.005 p f

18 pf

0.02

! i f

2.2 pf

3-12 pf

100 pf

0.001 p i

120 pf

120 pf

0.001 p f

0.01 p f

0.1 /if

M

10

0.001 p f

0.01 p f

0.1 i i f l p f

10/xf

•

C a pa citors (Co n t 'd )

Description

Timing Series

Timing Scries

Vor

Var

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

MT

PTM

PTM

PTM

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

500 v

500 v

500 v

600 v

500 v

350 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

400 v

200 v lOOv lOOv

350 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

600 v

600 v

500 v

500 v

350 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

350 v

500 v

350 v

500 v

600 v

500 v

500 v

500 y

500 v

5%

± 0 .2 5 pf

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

5%

5%

5%

S /N Range

100-5309

5310-up

100-6739X

100-6739X

100-6739

6740-up

X6740-up

Parts List— Typo 547

C337

C344

C346

C360

C365

C369

C370

C375

C380

C382

C392

C397

C398

C399

C406

Ckt. No.

C265

C267

C267

C276

C276

C278

C283

C290A

C290B

C290C

C290D

C290E

C290F

C290G

C290H

C290J

C290E

C290F

C290G

C290H

C290J

C292

C294

C296

C299

C301

C303

C311

C314

C328

C329

C330A

C330B

C330C

C330D

C330E

J

Tektronix

Part No.

283-000

283-026

285-0835-00

290-187

290-0175-00

283-003

281-524

281-007

281 -007

281-010

281-574

*295-073

*295-0104-00

283-001

281-528

283-006

Use 281-010

281-519

283-000

283-000

283-002

281-550

281-519

281-550

285-543

285-636

285-633

285-576

281-523

283-002

281-512

281-523

281-543

281-546

281-605

281-544

281-536

283-006

283-006

283-006

283-002

283-002

283-001

0.001 p f

0.2 pf

0.22 p f

4.7 p f

10 p f

0.01 p f

150 pf

3-12 pf

3-12 pf

4.5-25 pf

82 pf

0.001 pf '

0.01 pf

0.1 pf

1 pf

10 p f

0.001 pf 1

0.01 p f

0.1 pf l p f

10 p f

0.005 p f

82 pf

0.02 p f

4.5-25 pf

47 pf

0.001 p f

0.001 p f

0.01 p f

120 pf

47 pf

120 pf

0.0022 pf

0.022 pf

0.22 p f l p f

100 pf

0.01 p f

27 pf

100 pf

270 pf

330 pf

200 pf

5.6 pf

1000 pf

0.02 pf

0.02 p f

0.02 pf

0.01 p f

0.01 pf

0.005 pf

C a pa citors ( C o n i'd )

Description

Cer

Cer

Plastic

EMT

EMT

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Var

Var

Var

Timing Serial

Timing Series

Var

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

MT

PTM

PTM

PTM

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

500 v

25 v

100 v

35 v

35 v

150 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

600 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

400 v

200 v

100 v

100 v

350 v

500 v

500 v

350 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

600 v

600 v

600 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

1C%

10%

10%

10%

10%

2%

S /N Range

100 15049

15050-up

100-6739

6740-up

100-5309

5310-up

X I880 up

6 -2 7

Ckt. No.

C412

C424

C426

C428

C436

C438

C503A

C503C

C503D

C516

C524

C525

C538

C541

C544

C550

C439

C441

C446

C449

C454

C456

C459

C467

C475 a 77

C557D

C557F

C557H

C562

C572

C574

C5 76

C579

C582

C584

C586

C589

C591

C592

C598

C599

0500

C6I0

C617

0528

C636

6-28

Part* U d — Typ* 547

Tektronix

Part N o.

285-572

283-000

281-523

283-001

283-002

283-002

281-053

283-068

281-036

283-002

285-628

283-000

285-519

285-510

285-519

285-510

281-519

0.1 p f

0.001 p f

100 p f

0.005 pf

0.01 p f

0.01 p f

283-001

281-528

283-000

281-575

281-512

283-006

281-575

281-549

283-004

281-549

281-558

281-012

281-560

283-001

281-010

281-557

281-549

283-002

281-549

283-000

0.005 p f

82 pf

0.001 pf

39 pf

27 pf

0.02 p f

39 pf

68 pf

0.02 p f

68 pf

18 pf

7-45 pf

198 pf

0.005 pf

4.5-25 pf

1.8 pf

68 pf

0.01 p f

68 pf

0.001 pf

281-009

281-013

281-013

290-0214-00

281-022

3-12 p f

8-50 p f

8-50 p f

10 p f

8-50 pf

283-001

281-053

283-068

281-022

283-001

0.005 pf

0.35-1.37 pf

0.01 p f

8-50 pf

0.005 p f

0.35-1.37 pf

0.01 p f

3-12 p f

0.01 p f

0.033 p f

0.001 p f

0.047 p f

0.01 pf

0.047 pf

0.01 p f

47 pf

C a p a c ito r* (Cant'd)

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

D e tc rip tlo n

PTM

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

CMT

Cer

Cer

Poly

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Poly

Cer

Cer

Cer

prM

Cer

MT

MT

MT

MT

Cer

Var

Var

Var

Var

Var

Var

Var

Var

Var

Var

200 v

500 v

350 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

600 v

500 v

500 v

150 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

10%

10%

10%

1%

10%

1%

10%

10%

S /N Rang*

250 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

300 v

500 v

400 v

400 v

400 v

400 v

500 v 10%

X5680-up

Part* List— Type 547

C774

C775 a n

CB02

C803

C806

C808

C820

C821

C822

C823

C828

C829

C830

C832

C833

C834

C710

C730

C754

C756

C 76Q

C765

C 7 6 7

C768

C769

C770

C771

C772

C773A

C773B

C773C

Ckt. No.

C640

C642A.B

C650

C665

C670

C671

C680

C688

C694

C701

C709A

C709B

C709C

Tektronix

Part No.

283-022

Use 290-197

285-510

283-001

283-022

Use 290-180

285-510

285-510

281-523

Use 290-192

[

I

I Use 290-195

285-511

Use 290-179

283-002

283 002

281-549

281-505

283-003

281-604

283 006

283-002

Use 290-185

283-002

. Use 290-196

283-002

283-002

283-002

Use 290-190

283-000

285-506

285-502

283-082

283-082

281-525

283-101

C835

C836

C841

C842

C852

C854

281-536

283-082

283-082

283-002

281-556

281-556

281-511

283-096

283-006

283-082

283-082

283-082

Capacitor* (Cont'd)

0.001 p f

0.01 p f

0.01 pf

0.01 pf

500 pf

500 pf

22 pf

500 pf

0.02 -.f

0.01 pf

0.01 p f

0.01 pf

0.01 pf

0.01 pf

0.01 pf

40 pf

0.001 p f

0.0047 pf

0.001 p f

0.01 pf

0.01 pf

470 pf

0.0047 pf

0.02 p f

250 p f x 40 pf

0.01 p f

0.005 pf

0.02 p f

300 p f

0.01 pf

0.01 pf

100 pf

200 pf

10 p f I

10 p f

20 p f 1

0.01 p f

125 p f

0.01 pf

0.01 pf

68 pf

12 pf

0.01 p f

2.2 pf

0.02 p f

0.01 p f

2 x 40 p f

0.01 p f

40 p f |

20 p f

20 p f I

\

D escription

Cer

EMC

MT

Cer

Cer

EMC

MT

MT

Cer

EMC

EMC

PTM

EMC

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

EMC

Cer

EMC

Cer

Cer

Cer

EMC

Cer

Cer

MT

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

500 v

500 v

500 v

400 v

500 v

400 v

1000 v

4000 v

4000 v

500 v

6000 v

500 v

4000 v

4000 v

500 v

10000 v

10000v

1400 v

350 v/250 v

400 v

500 v

1400 v

250 v

400 v

400 v

350 v

400 v

450 v

350 v

250 v

600 v

250 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

150 v

500 v

600 v

500 v

250 v

500 v

250 v

350 v

450 v

500 v

20000v

600 v

4000 v

4000 v

4000 v

10%

10%

± 0 .2 5 pf

10%

10%

S /N Rang*

X1081-up

X260 up

6 -2 9

Ckt. No.

Cl 016

Cl 019

Cl 024

Cl 026

C l 027

Cl 027

Cl 028

Cl 029

Cl 031

C l 035

C l 035

Cl 038

Cl 038

Cl 042

Cl 048

C l 048

Cl 069

C l 069

Cl 071

C l 071

Cl 074

C l 076

C l 076

C l 077

Cl 077

Cl 087

Cl 087

C l 091

Cl 103

Cl 104

Cl 105

0 1 0 6

C l 107

0 1 1 3

0 1 1 3

C l 116

Cl 124

C l 126

Cl 127

Cl 132

0 1 3 2

C l 142

Cl 152

C858

C863

C932

C934

C 9 3 9

C941

C944

C958

C 9 6 5

Cl 000

Cl 002

Cl 014

6 -3 0

List— Type 547

T ektronix

Part N o.

2834)82

283-002

283-041

283-032

283-057

2834)06

2834)57

281-525

281-523

281-601

283-001

2834)67

281-519

Use 281-0505-00

283067

281-519

281-558

281-0061-00

283-001

281-006

281-572

283-067

283-00784)0

283-067

2834)078-00

281 -572

283-067

283-0078-00

283-067

283-00784)0

283-067

2834)078-00

281-503

281-075

281-0123-00

281-549

2814)540-00

2834)67

283-0078-00

281-0605-00

281-511

281-524

2814)75

281-075

281-600

283-067

283-0078-00

283-001

281-524

281-075

281-558

283-067

2834)078-00

2834)67

283-067

5-25 p f

5-25 pf

68 p f

51 pf

0.001 pf

0.001 p f

200 pf

22 pf

150 pf

5-25 pf

5-25 pf

35 pf

0.001 p f

0.001 p f

0.005 p f

150 pf

5-25 pf

18 pf

0.001 p f

0.001 p f

0.001 pf

0.001 pf

47 pf

12 pf

0.001 p f

47 pf

18 pf

5.5-18 pf

0.005 pf

1.5-7 pf

6.8 pf

0.001 pf

0.001 p f

0.001 p f

0.001 p f

6.88 pf

0.001 pf

0.001 pf

0.001 p f

0.001 p f

0.001 p f

0.001 p f

8 pf

0.01 p f

0.01 p f

0.0033 pf

470 pf

0.1 p f

0.02 p f

0.1 p f

470 pf

100 pf

7.5 pf

0.005 pf

0.001 p f

Capacitor* (Cont'd)

Description

Cer

Car

Cer

Cer

Car

Cer

Cer

Car

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Car

Car

Car

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Var

Var

Var

Var

Var

Var

Var

S /N Range

500 v

500 v

200 v

500 v

200 v

500 v

500 v

200 v

500 v

200 v

500 v

200 v

500 y

500 v

4000 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

200 v

600 v

200 v

500 v

350 v

500 v

500 v

200 v

500 v

500 v

200 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

200 v

500 y

500 v

500 y

500 v

5%

5%

500 v

500 v

500 v

500 v

200 y

500 v

200 v

200 v

± 0 .5 pf

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

XI 272-up

100-4749

4750-up

± 0 .5 p f

10%

10%

± 0 .5 p f

10%

10%

10%

± 0 5 pf

10%

5%

10%

100-4269

4270-up

100-4269

4270-up

100-4269

4270-up

100-4269

4270-up

100-4269

4270-up

100-10729

10730-up

100-10729

10730-up

100-4269

4270-up

XI 0730-up

10%

10%

10% 100-4269

4270-up

10%

10%

10%

100-4269

4270-up

Parts List— Typo 547

D86

D86

D90

D97

D97

D98

D100

0129

D132

0133

D133

D134

D134

D136

D147

D147

D163

D163

D164

D172

0181

D69

D69

D71

D71

D76

D76

D79

079

D83

D85

D21

D22

D45

D45

D57

D59

D181

D182

DI82

0182

D183

Ckt. N o.

Cl 153

C l 157

C l 161

C l 163

C l 165

C l 175

Cl 181

Cl 191

J ll

C apacitors (C a n t'd )

T ektronix

Part No.

283-001

Use 283-057

283-001

283-006

281-0512-00

281-0512-00

283-067

283 067

131-018

•152-0075-00

•152-0075-00

152-154

152-0140-01

•152-075

•152-075

152 141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

152-119

152-0281-00

152-141

152-0141-02

•152-075

Use *152-0125-00

•152-161

•152-0185-00

*152-0165-00

152-118

152-0294-00

•152-061

*152-061

*152-061

*152-061

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

*152-075

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

*152-075

*152-061

152-141

152-0141-02

Use *050-225

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

0.005 pf

0.1 pf

0.005 pf

0.02 Mf

27 pf

27 pf

0.001 f i t

0.001 /tf

Description

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

Cer

C onnector

16 contact. female, chassis mounted

D iode*

Germanium

Germanium

Tunnel

Tunnel

Germanium

Germanium

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Germanium

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Germanium

Silicon

Silicon

Tek Spec

Tek Spec

TD253

8 pf

Tek Spec

Tek Spec

10 MA

10M A

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Zener

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152

1N969A

Zener

Silicon

Silicon

Germanium

Tunnel

1N969B

1N4152

1N4152

Tek Spec

Selected TD3A

Tek

Silicon

Silicon

Zener

Zener

Silicon

0.4 w

0.4 w

4.7 MA

GaAs

Replaceable by 1N4152

Selected from 1N3579

1N3033

IN3033B

Tek Spec

1 w

1 w

Tek Spec

Tek Spec

Tek Spec

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152 fek Spec

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152

Tek Spec

Tek Spec

1N4152

Silicon 1N4152

Silicon Replacement Kit

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152

200 V

500 v

600 v

500 v

500 v

200 v

200 v

22 v

22 v

36 v

36 v

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

5%

20%

5%

S /N Range

X6740-up

X6740-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-10429

10430-up

100 10429

10430-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-1159

1160-10429

10430-up

100-10429

6-31

X6740-up

X6740-up

100-11889

11890-up

100-10429

10430-up

100 10429

10430-up

100-8629

8630-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-12479

12480-up

X3130-up

100-8629

8630-up

D271

D271

0 7 7 7

0 7 7 7

D279

D279

0283

0285

D286

D286

D291

D297

D297

0298

D300

D329

Ckt. No.

D163

D194

D221

D222

0245

0245

0257

0259

D265

D269

D269

0405

D433

D441

0441

0448

D449

0455

D455

D461

D461

D462

D462

D464

D464

D469

0332

0347

0347

0355

D355

D356

D356

D362

D362

D363

D363

D367

0 2 6 7

0372

D405

Part* U*t— Type 547

Tektronix

Part N o.

152-0141-02

*152-0061 -00

*152-0075-00

*152-0075-00

152-154

152-0140-01

*152-075

*152-075

152-008

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

152-119

152-0281-00

152-141

152-0141-02

*152-075

Use *152-0125-00

•152 161

*152-0185-00

*152-0165-00

152-118

152 0294-00

*152-061

*152-061

*152-061

*152-061

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

*152-061

Use 152-0081-00

152-0402-00

Use *152-061

152-141

152-0141-02

*152-075

152-008

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

•152-161

*152-0153-00

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

D io d e * ( C o n t'd )

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Tunnel

Tunnel

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Germanium

Germanium

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Tek

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Germanium

Germanium

Tunnel

Tunnel

Germanium

Germanium

Germanium

Silicon

Silicon

D e ic rip tio n

1N4152

Tek Spec

Tek Spec

Tek Spec

TD253

H pf

Tek Spec

Tek Spec

10 M A

10 MA

Silicon

Silicon

Zener

Zener

Silicon

Silicon

1N4152

1N4I52

1N-4152

1N4I52

1N969A

1N9698

1 N-4152

1N4I52

0.4 w

0.4 w

Germanium

Tunnel

Tek Spec

Selected TD3A

Tek

Silicon

Silicon

G«iAs

Tek Spec

4.7 MA

Replaceable by 1N4152

Zener

Zener

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

1N3033

1N30.13B

Tek Spec

Tek Spec

Tek S|>ec

1 w

1 w

Tek S|>ec

1N4I52

1N4I52

1N4I52

1N4I52

JN4I52

1N4I52

1N4I52

1N4I52

1N4I52

1N4I52

1N4I52

1N4I52

Tek Spec

1D2

Tek Spec

1N4I52

1N4I52

Tek Spec

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152

G o A i

Tek S|>ec

1N4I52

1N4152

1N4152

2.2 MA

22 v

22 v

36 v

36 v

2.2 MA (Note diode polarity)

6 - 3 2

10%

5%

20%

5%

S /N R ang*

10430-up

X1970-up

X6740-up

X6740.up

100-11889

11890-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-11489

11490-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-10429

10430 up

100-10429

10430-up

100-12479

12480-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-10429

100-10429

10430-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-8629

B630-up

100-10429

10430-up

100-12479

12480-up

XI2480-up

100-8629

8630-up

F a rt* U tt— T ype 54 7

Ckt. No.

D469

D471

D471

D472

D472

D474

D474

D475

D479

D479

D481

D481

D482

D482

D492

D492

D541

D541

0542

D542

D948

D1014

D 1014

D1018

D1024

D1024

DU 09

01109

D1114

0561

D561

D582

D642A,B,C,D,

0672A,B,C,D

D672A,B,C,D

D672A,B,C,D

D693

D694

D702A.B

D732A,B

D759

D759

D760

D769

D803

D804

0831

0831

0942

F601

F602

Diodes I C o n t 'd l

Tektronix

Part N o.

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

*152-161

*152-0153-00

152-141

152-0141-02

152-147

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

152-141

152-0141-02

152-067

152-0022-00

*152-075

*152 0061-00

•152-075

•152-0061-00

•152-061

152-066

•152-047

152-0066-00

152 0423-00

152-157

*152 0107-00

152-066

152-066

152-141

152-0141-02

*152-0075-00

*152-061

•152-0107-00

152-0265-00

152-208

152-0040-00

*152-061

152-004

152-141

152-0141-02

152-120

152-141

152-0141-02

152-0228-00

152-0305-00

*152 0107-00

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Tek

Silicon

D escription

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152

GaAs le k Spec

Silicon

Silicon

Zener

Silicon

Silicon

1N4152

1N4152

IN9718

1N4152

1N4152

0.4 w

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152

1N4152

Silicon

Zener

Zener

Germanium

Silicon

1N4152

1M25Z10

1N25Z5

Tek Spec

Tek Spec

Germanium

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Tek Spec

Tek Spec

Tek Spec

1N3194

Replaceable by 1N2862

Silicon

Silicon

1N3194

300 V

Zener 4M140Z10

Silicon Replaceable by 1N647

Silicon 1N3194

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

Germonum

Silicon

1N3194

1N4152

1N4152

Tek Spec

Ti-k Spec l w

1 w

3 A

0.4 w

Silicon Replaceable by 1N647

Zener IN970B

Silicon

Silicon

Silicon

IN 3 I9 5

IN2615

Ti k Spec

0.4 w

Zener 1N707 or 1N763

Silicon IN4152

Silicon

Zener

Silicon

IN4152

1N3020B

IN4152

Silicon

Zener

Zener

Silicon

Vi w

1 w

IN4152

7.M105Z10

1N3045B

1 w l w

Replaceable by 1N647

27 y

25 v

25 v

140 v

24 V

6.2-8 v lO v

105 v n o v

159-011

159-005

159-0005-00

Fuse

6 25 Amps 3AG Slo-Blo, 115 v, 50-60 and 400 cps

3 Amps 3AG Slo-Blo, 230 v, 50-60 and 400 cps

3 Amps 3AG Slo-Blo, 230 v, 50-60 and 400 cps

©

5%

10%

5%

10%

5%

5%

10%

5%

S /N Range

10430-up

100 10429

10430-up

100-12479

12480-up

100 10429

10430-up

100-10429

10430-up

100 10429

10430-up

100 10429

10430-up

100-10429

10430-up

100 8629

8630-up

100 5679

5680-up

100-5679

5680-up

100-4399

4400-12109

12110-up

100-7329X

X7330-up

100-10429

10430-up

XI 728-up

X5830-up

X5830-up

X I880 7479

7480 up

100-3149X

100 10429

10430-up

100 10429

10430-up

X2340-8629

8630-up

XI 1270-up

X7980-up

6 -3 3

0 3 4

0 3 4

0 3 4

0 4 4

0 4 4

0 4 4

0 6 5

0 7 5

0 8 4

0 8 4

Ckt. N o.

LR21

LR23

144

L50

L52

156

L85

LR221

LR223

1244

1250

L252

1256

1285

L404

LI 061

LRI062

LI 072

LI 082

LR1115

LR1135

LI 144

L1145

L1154

LI 155

LI 157

L1160

11170

L553

L760

1778

11013

11018

LI 023

LI 030

LI 040

LI 051

LR1052

Parts List— Type 547

T ektronix

Port No.

*108-230

*108-230

276-507

*108-0146-00

*108-147

*108-215

*108-0410-00

*108-230

*108-230

276-507

*108 0146-00

*108-147

*108-215

*108-0410-00

*120-309

*119-030

108 240

Use *108-323

*108-260

*120-266

*108-260

*108-264

*108-264

*108-260

*108-288

*108-260

•108-288

*108-260

*108-260

*131-335

*131-336

*108-095

276-0507-00

*108-095

276-0507-00

*114-080

276-528

276-528

Inductors

Description

3.25 /ih (on a 150 0 '/j w 5% resistor)

3.25 /ih (on a 150 O

'/■>

w 5% resistor)

Core, Ferramie Suppressor

5 /ih

2.2 /ih

1.1 /ih

1 /ih

3.25 /ih (on a 150 O '/j w 5% resistor)

3 25 /ih (on a 150 O '/j w 5% resistor)

Core, Ferramie Suppressor

5 /ih

2.2 /ih

1.1 /ih

1 /ih

Toroid, 6T Single

Delay Line Assembly

8 2 0/ih

Beam Rotator

0.1 /ih

Toroid, 10T Single

0.1 /ih

0.2 /ih

0.2 /ih

0.1 /ih

1.2 /ih (on a 6.2 Q '/* w 5% resistor)

0.1 /ih

1.2 /ih (on a 6.2 O 'A w 5% resistor)

0.1 /ih

0.1 /ih

0.5 /th (on a 330 f l '/< w resistor) (brown)

0.5 /ih (on a 330 Q '/« w resistor) (blue)

1 4 /ih

Core, Ferramie Suppressor

1.4 /ih

Core, Ferramie Suppressor

6.8 ph - 14.6 /ih Var

Core, Ferramie Suppressor

Core, Ferramie Suppressor

Core 276-0506 00

K600

K601

148-021

*148-019

151-089

151-0188-00

*151-0199-00

151-089

151-0188-00

*151-0199-00

•151-108

*151-108

*151-108

151-0190-00

Rolays

Tube Relay

Tek Spec

Transistors

2N962

2N3906

Silicon Replaceable by MPS-3640

2N962

2N3906

Silicon Replaceable by MPS-3640

Replaceable by 2N2501

Replaceable by 2N2501

Replaceable by 2N2501

2N3904

6 -3 4

S /N Range

100-6739X

X6740-up

100-6739X

X6740-up

100-6739X

X6740-up

100-6739X

<6740-up

XI 4640-up

X14640-up

100-6059

6060-6739

6740-up

100-6059

6060-6739

6740-up

100-12479

12480-up

Transistors (Coat'd)

Ckt. No.

0 8 6

Q89

0103

0103

0173

0184

0234

Q234

0234

0244

0244

0244

0265

Q275

0284

Q284

0286

0289

0303

0303

Q344

0373

0424

Q424

0433

Q444

0454

0464

0465

0475

0534

Q534

0543

0554

Q554

0564

Q564

01014

01024

Tektronix

Part N o.

151-0277-00

*151-096

151-089

151-0188-00

151-063

151-063

151-089

151-0188-00

*151-0199-00

151-089

151-0188-00

151 -0199-00

*151-108

*151-108

*151-108

151-0190-00

151-0277-00

*151-096

151-089

151-0188-00

*151-096

151-063

151-063

*151-0322-00

*151-103

•151-103

*151-103

*151-108

*151-108

*151-108

♦151-121

*151-0124-00

*151-096

151-063

*151-0322-00

151-063

*151-0322-00

*153-525

D escription

RCA 38520

Selected from 2N1893

2N962

2N3906

2N2207

2N2207

2N962

2N3906

Silicon Replaceable by MPS-3640

2N962

2N3906

Silicon Replaceable by MPS-3640

Replaceable by 2N2501

Replaceable by 2N2501

Replaceable by 2N2501

2N3904

RCA 38520

Selected from 2N1893

2N962

2N3906

Selected from 2N1893

2N2207

2N2207

Replaceable by 2N4890

Replaceable by 2N2219

Replaceable by 2N2219

Replaceable by 2N2219

Replaceable by 2N2501

Replaceable by 2N2501

Replaceable by 2N2501

Selected from T4I938

Selected from 2M3501

Selected from 2M1893

2N2207

Replaceable by 7N4890

2N2207

Replaceable by 2N4890

Matched pair (Selected from 2N2475)

01034

01044

01074

Q1084

0 1 104t

*153-527

*153-525

*153-526

Matched pair (Replaceable by 2N2501)

Matched pair (Selected from 2N2475)

Selected from 2N2369

01109

Q 11 14tt

Q 1 1 1 4 tt

0 1 1 24t

Q 11 34tt

151-0149-00

*153-524

*153-0548-00

*153-526

*153-524

2N3441

Selected from TA1938

Selected from 2N3119

Selected from 2N2369

Selected from TA1938

Q 1134tt

01144

01154

01163

01173

*153-0548-00

*153-527

•151-127

*151-127

Selected from 2M3119

Matched pair (Replaceable by 2N2501)

Selected from 2N2369

Selected from 2M2369 t Q l l 04 and Q 1 124 furnished as a matched pair.

t+Q1114 and Q1134 furnished as a matched pair.

Parts list— Typo 5 4 7

S /N Range

XI 2480-up

100-6059

6060-up

100-6059

6060-6739

6740-up

100-6059

6060-6739

6740-up

100-12479

12480-up

XI 2480-up

100-6059

6060-up

100-14709

14710-up

100-15299

15300-up

100-14709

14710-up

100-14709

14710-up

X2340 up

100 5679

5680-up

100-5679

5680-up

Part* Utt— Type 547

R«sistort

Ckt. N o.

T ektronix

Part No.

Description

R45

R45

R46

R47

R48

R49

R50

R51

R52

R53

R54

R36

R41

R42

R43

R44

R22

R23

R23

R24

R25

R18

R19

R20

R21

R21

Resistors are fixed, composition.

=fcl0% unless otherwise indicated.

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

302-104

321-385

323-406

316-101

311-018

100 k

100k

165k

1 0 0 0

20 k

' /

. w

% w

'A w

' A W

Var

R13

R14

R15t

R16

R17

323-481

302-155

3)1-426

302-394

302-335

1 meg

1.5 meg

300 k

390 k

3.3 meg

'A w

’A w

'A w

'A w

Var

302-104

316-105

316-101

316-221

315-0471-00

100 k

1 meg

1 0 0 0

220 Q

470 n

'A w

'A w

'A w

' / . W

'A w

316-101

316-221

315-0471-00

308-108

311-158

1 0 0 0

2 2 0

o

470 0

15k

200 0

'A w

'A w

'A w

6 w

Var

R27

R28

R32

R33

R36

308-267

302-102

315-0471-00

308-0301-00

324-335

7.5 k

1 k

470 0

10k

30.1 k

5 w

'A w

'A w

3 w

1 w

308-0320-00

316-221

315-0471-00

316-100

322-001

311-324

311-0405-00

308-0310-00

324-306

324-306

302-101

302-101

302-101

315-0560-00

323-370

323-140

15.6 k

220 0

470 0

10O

10O

50 0

10k

12k

15k

15k

10 00

100 O

100O

5 6 0

69.8 k

280 0

Var

Va-

R57

R57

R63

R65

R67

302-224

302-0104-00

316-470

301-303

301-912 tFumished as a unit with SW15.

220 k

100k

4 7 0

30 k

9.1 k

'A w

’A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

3 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

5 w

1 w

1 w

'A w

'A w

'A w w

'A w

6 -3 6

S /N Range

Prec

Prec

Prec

1%

1 %

8 INT TRIG DC LEVEL

1 %

TRIGGERING LEVEL

5%

100-6739

6740-up

Prec

W W

W W

Prec

Prec

W W

5%

100-6739

6740-up

5%

B TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING

W W

W W

Prec

5%

5%

1%

1%

X6740-up

X 6 7 4 0 -u p

100-6739

W W 1%

5%

1%

6740-up

100-6739X

X6740-up

100-6739X

100-6739X

B TRIGGER SENS 100-6739

B TRIGGER SENS 6740-up

1%

1%

1%

X6740-up

100-6739X

100-6739X

Prec

Prec

5%

1%

1%

X4740-up

100-6739

6740-up

5%

5%

Parti List— Type 547

Ckt. N o.

Tektronix

Part N o .

R89

R90A

R90B

R90C

R90D

R90E

R90F

R90O

R90E

R90F

R90G

R90C

R90F

R90F

R90G

R90H

R90D r 9 oe

R90F

R90G

R90H

R90D

R90E

R90F

R79

R79

R81

R81

R82

R82

R83

R84

R85

R86

R87

R88

R69

R71

R75

R75

R76

R76

R78

R90G

R90H

R90J

R90K

R90W

R90X

R90Y

R90Zt

R91

'

.

\

)

1

^

1

1

;1

'1

(

(

)

\

1

I

)

I

>

302-103

303-513

301-513

303-0243-00

302-471

301-0221-00

301-752

302-152

302 0561-00

316-101

315-0181-00

323-333

323-0636-00

316-394

305-153

315-102

303-513

315-273

302-823

302 105

*312-640

*312-641

*3120641-01

*312-0641-02

*312-0641-03

*312-0641-04

302-271

302-105

302-104

301-392

311-391

308-0400 00

R92

R93

R94

R95

R96

R97

316-101

304-473

304-473

316-101

316-101

315-0)02-00 tFurnished as a unit with SW90Z.

1.4 meg

2.8 meg

7 meg

47 k

39k

1.4 meg

2.8 meg

7 meg

47 k

39 k

10k

270 Q

1 meg

100k

3.9 k

150k

18k

10k

51 k

51 k

24 k

470 n

220 n

7.5 k

1.5k

560 n ioon

1.4 meg

2.8 meg

7 meg

1.4 meg

2.8 meg

7 meg

47 k

1.4 meg

2.8 meg

7 meg

47 k

39k

18011

28.7 k

50k

390 k

15k

1 k

51 k

27 k

82 k

1 meg

140 k

280 k

700 k

100 n

47k

47 k

100O

100 f l

1 k

Resistors fCon/'c/J

Description

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

2 w

'A w

1 w

'A w

'/, w

'A w

1 w

'A w

1 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'/, w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

(nominal value) Selected

'A w

'A w

'A w

(nominal value) Selected

(nominal volue) Selected

'A w

'A w

'A w

(nominal value) Selected

(nominal value) Selected

'A w

'A w

'/}W

(nominal value) Selected

(nominal value) Selected

(nominal value) Selected

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

Var

5 w

'A w

1 w

1 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

REV E SEPT 1975

Prec

Prec

W W

5*/.

VARIABLE

5% XI 2480-up

5%

15300-up

X I2480-up

6 -3 7

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

5%

1%

1%

5 %

5%

5*A

5%

1%

1%

1%

S /N Range

100 6739

6740-up

100-6739

6740-up

100-6739

6740-up

100-6739

6740-up

100-673?

6740-up

100-5479

5480-8299

8300-10259

10260-15299

Ckt. N o.

R130C

R132

R135

R136

R137

Rl 38

R139

R141

Rl 42

R143

R144

R145

R146

R147

R148

R149

R162

R163

Rl 64

Rl 65

R166

R170

R171

R172

R173

R174

R175

R176

R177

R178

R179

R180

R181

R181

R182

R182

R183

R184

R185

R98

R99

R100

R101

R102

R103

R105

R121

R124

R125

RI26

R128

R129

R130A

6 -3 8

Part* List'— Type 547

T ektron ix

Part N o.

315-303

323-356

316-272

316-122

316-153

306-273

316-152

306-683

303-163

311-011

305-393

302-102

302-562

302-155

301-156

302-824

323-385

301-113

323-481

309-439

316-101

301-334

301-274

301-683

302-101

323-302

323-385

323-402

316-101

302-122

323-243

308-268

324-339

301-183

301-134

315-472

302-472

302-274

316-101

308-272

323-0414-00

316-270

323-289

316-102

323-330

316-470

301-363

323-280

302-274

323-356

323-348

323-353

309-447

15 meg

820 k

100 k

11 k

1 meg

5.9 meg

100 n

330 k

270 k

68k

30 k

49.9 k

2.7 k

1.2 k

15k

27 k

1.5 k

68k

16k

5 k

39 k

1 k

5.6 k

1.5 meg lO O fi

13.7 k

100k

150 k ioo n

1.2k

3.32 k

22k

33.2 k

18k

130 k

4.7 k

4.7 k

270 k

100 n

20 k

200 k

27 n

10 k

1 k

26.7 k

47 n

36k

8.06 k

270 k

49.9 k

41.2 k

46.4 k

6.19 meg

Resistors (C o n t'd l

2 w

V w

V* w

Vi w

Vi w

'/I w

Vi w

Vi w

Vi w

Vi w

'A w

Vi w

V i w

V i w

'A w

V i w

V i w

V i w

' A w

Vi w

'/» w

5 w

1 w

V I w

Vt W

' A w

'/I w

Vi w

V i w

5 w

Vi w

V* w

Vi w

' A w

Vi w

'A w

Vi w

V l W

V l W

'/|W

VlW

Vi w

Vi w

Description

Vi w

V i w

'A w

'A w

'A w

2 w

'A w

2 w

1 w

Var

Prec

5%

1%

S /N Range

5%

B SWEEP LEt IGTH

5%

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

W W

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

W W

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

5%

1%

1%

1%

5%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

5%

1%

5 %

1%

1%

5%

5%

5%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

5%

5%

5%

100-1159

1160-up

100-1159

1160-up

100-1969

Ckt. N o.

T ektronix

Part No.

R194

R195

R196

R197

R198

R199

R205

R206

R207

R209

R185

R186

R187

R187

R188

R189

R190

R191

R192

R193

R210

R211

R213

R2T 4

R215t

R216

R217

R218

R219

R220

R221

R221

R222

R223

R223

R224

R225

R227

R228

R232

R233

R23<S

R236

R241

R242

R243

R244

R245

R245

R246

316-100

323-001

311-308

311-0076-00

308-0310-00

R247

R248

R249

324-306

324-306

102-101 tFurnished as a unit with SW215.

316-103

316-222

323-481

302-155

311-426

302-394

302-335

302-104

316-105

Use 316-0101-00

316-221

315-0471-00

Use 316-0101-00

316-221

315-0471-00

308-108

311-004

308-267

302-102

315-0471-00

308-0301-00

324-335

308-0320-00

316-221

315-0471-00

316-820

323-620

316-470

316-470

302-472

302-103

302-104

321-385

323-406

311-018

309-0451-00

323-469

309-448

309-0447-00

316-100

311-419

316-101

316-470

316-470

302-104

10O

10O

5 0 0

10k

12k

15k

15k

100O

10k

2.2 k

1 meg

1.5 meg

300 k

15k

200 O

7.5 k

1 k

4 7 0 0

10k

30.1 k

15.6 k

220 0

4 7 0 0

390 k

3.3 meg

100 k

1 meg

100 O

220 0

4 7 0 0

100O

220 0

470 0

82 0

800 k

47 0

47 0

4.7 k

10k

100 k

100 k

165k

20 k

3.92 meg

750 k

9.31 meg

6.19 meg ion

500 k loon

47 n

47 n

100 k

Resistors (Conf'd)

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w y4 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'/• w

'A w

D escription

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

•

Var

Var

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

Var

5 w

'A w

'A w

3 w

1 w

3 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

2 w

5 w

1 w

1 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

5 w

Var

Var

Var

Port* List— ‘Type 5 4 7

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prcc

1%

1%

1%

1%

BRIGHTNESS

S /N Range

1970-up

100-1969

1970-up

Prec 1%

Prec

Prec

Prec

1%

1%

A INT TRIG DC LEVEL

1%

TRIGGERING LEVEL

5%

100-6739

6740-up

100-6739

6740-up 5%

W W

A TRIGGER LEVEL CENTERING

W W

Prec

W W

Prec

W W

Prec

Prec

5%

1%

1%

1 %

X6740-up

X6740-up

100-6739

6740-up

100-6739X

X6740-up 5%

1%

100-6739X

100-6739X

A TRIGGER SENS 100 6739

A TRIGGER SENS 6740-up

1% X6740.up

1%

1%

100-6739X

100-6739X

6 -3 9

Part* List— Type 547

Ckt. N o.

T ektronix

Part N o.

R290D

R290E

R290F

R290G

R290H

R290D

R290E

R290F

R290G

R290H

R290J

R290W

R290X

R290Y

R290Z+

R252

R253

R254

R255

R256

R256

R258

R263

R265

R267

R269

R271

R275

R275

R276

R276 '

R278

R279

R279

R281

R281

R282

R282

R283

R284

R285

R286

R287

R288

R289

R290A

R290B

R290C

R290D

/

>

R290E

R290F

R290D

R290E

R290F

R290G

R290D

R290E

\

)

R290F

R290G

R290H _ 1

)

^

.

,1 i

11

,

1

1

*312-640

*312-641

*312-0641-01

*312-0641-02

*312-0641-03

*312-0641-04

302-105

302-104

311-388

311-391 tFurnished as a unit with SW290Z.

315-0560-00

323-370

323-140

301-203

301-134

301-0304-00

302-473

316-470

301-303

301-912

316-103

303-513

301-513

303-0243-00

302-471

301-0221-00

301-752

302-152

302-0561-00

316-101

315-0181-00

323-333

323-0636-00

316-394

305-153

301-102

303-513

301-273

302-823

302-105

50 k

390 k

15k

1 k

51 k

27 k

82k

1 meg

140 k

280 k

700 k

1.4 meg

2.8 meg

7 meg

1.4 meg

2.8 meg

7 meg

47 k

1.4 meg

2.8 meg

7 meg

47 k

39k

5 6 0

69.8 k

280 0

20k

130 k

300 k

47k

47 n

30k

9.1 k

10k

51 k

51 k

24 k

470 0

220 0

7.5 k

1.5 k

5 6 0 0

1000

18 00

28.7 k

1.4 meg

2.8 meg

7 meg

47 k

39 k

1.4 meg

2.8 meg

7 meg

47 k

39 k

10k

1 meg

100k

7.5 k

150 k

6 -4 0

Resistors (C o n t'd l

Description

V« w

Vi w

V i w

Y.

w

y

w

’A w

'A w

'A w

y

w

'A w

•A w

2 w

y.

w i w

'/• W y . w

V i w

’/ i w

V.W

V i w

V i w

V i w

V i w

'A w

1 w

V W

1 w y . w

' / w y . w y . w y . w y , w

y.

w

>/,w

y.

w

'A w

y.

w

'A

w

(nominal value) Selected

y .w

'A w

y

w

(nominal value) Selected

(nominal value) Selected

V .w

Vi w

Vi w

(nominal value) Selected

(nominal value) Selected

VlW

’/|W

VlW

(noniinal value) Selected

(nominal value) Selected

(noniinal value) Selected

'/ . w

V iW

Var

Var

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

W W A SWEEP CAL

VARIABLE

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

5%

1%

1%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

1%

1%

5%

5%

5%

S /N Range

X6740-up

100-6739

6740-up

100-6739

6740-up

100-6739

6740-up

100-6739

6740-up

100-6739

6740-up

100-6739

6740-up

100-5479

5480-8299

8300-10259

10260-15299

15300-up

REV E SEPT 1975

R297

R298

R299

R300

R301

R302

R303

R305

R310

R311

Ckf. No.

R292

R293

R294

R295

R296

R330B

R330C

R330D

R334

R335

R337

R338

R339

R341

R342

R343

R344

R345

R346

R347

R348

R349

R355

R357

R358

R359

R360

R361

R362

R363

R364

R365

R366

R367

R368

R312

R314

R316

R321

R324

R325

R326

R328

R329

R330A

®

ioon

47 k

47 k ioon ioon

18k

1 k

49.9 k

2.7 k

470 n

15k

27 k

1.5 k

2.7 k

100 k

100 f l

100

n

100k

68 k

16k

5 k

39k

1 k

5.6 k

1.5 meg

5.6 meg

15 meg

22 meg

75 k

6.81 k

1 meg

5.9 meg ioon

330 k

270 k

330k

2.2 k

2.32 k

22k

36.5 k

30k

270 k

1 k

1.8 k

33 meg

68k ioon

13.7 k

100 k

150 k ioon

1.2 k

220k

21.5 k

267 k

T ektronix

Port N o .

316-101

304-473

304-473

316-101

316-101

308-0400-00

315-0102-00

323-356

315-0272-00

316-471

316-153

306-273

316-152

301-272

302-104

323-481

309-439

316-101

301-334

301-274

301-683

302-101

323-302

323-385

323-402

316-101

302-122

301-224

323-321

323-426

301-334

316-222

323-243

308-268

324-343

301-303

301-274

316-102

316-182

316-336

316-101

316-101

302-104

306-683

303-163

311-011

305-393

302-102

302-562

301-155

301-565

301-156

301-226

323-373

323-273

Itasistors (Conf'dJ

Description

% w

1 w

1 w

V . W y4 w

5 w

'/« w

'A w y«w

'A w y4 w

2 w

'A w

V i w

'A w

V . W

'A w

' / » W

2 w

1 w

2 w

Vi w

V i w

V i w

V i w y» w

V i w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

V i w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

5 w

1 w

V i w y,w

'Aw

'Aw

'Aw

Var w w

Prec

Ports Us*— T ype 547

S /N Range

5%

5%

1%

5%

XI 2480-up

XI 2480-up

XI 2480-up

5%

Prec

Prec

Prec

W W

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

5%

1%

1%

5%

1%

1%

1%

5%

5%

5%

A SWEEP LENGTH

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

1%

1%

1%

1%

5%

5%

5%

1%

1%

1%

6-41

Parts List-Typo 5 4 7

Clef. N o.

R369

R370

R 37I

R372

R373

R374

R375

R376

R377

R380

R381

R382

R383

R384

R390

R391

R392

R393

R394

R397

R398

R399

R401

R404

R406

R407

R408

R409

R412

R413

R414

R415

R416

R417

R418

R419

R421

R424

R425

R426

R428

R429

R430

R431

R432

R433

R435

R438

R439

R441

R443

R444

R446

R448

6 -4 2

T ektronix

Part N o .

316-182

301-472

302-472

316-820

323-373

316-470

316-101

302-472

316-101

307-106

316-101

316-101

316-101

302-331

301-563

301-913

316-101

303-183

302-274

316-470

323-353

323-330

323-356

321-0193-00

302-0473-00

316-470

316-101

302-104

316-101

316-473

324-339

311-015

311-022

302-331

311-141

308-268

316-101

302-564

301-104

301-223

302-223

302-682

302-333

302-151

316-470

302-102

302-562

302-101

302-102

302-105

302-823

302-104

302-102

302-103

1.8 k

4.7 k

4.7 k

270 k

47 Cl

46.4 k

267 k

49.9 k

1 k

47k

47 n

100 Cl

100k

82 O

75 k

47 Cl ioo n

4.7 k

100 Q

4.7 ci ioo n ioo n ioo ci

330 n

56k

91 k ioo ci

18k ioo n

47 k

33.2 k

10k

30 k

330 Cl

2 k

22k

100 Cl

560k

100k

22k

22k

6.8 k

33 k

150 Cl

47 Cl

1 k

5.6 k

100 Cl

1 k

1 meg

82k

100 k

1 k

10 k

Resistors (C o n l'd )

Description

'A w

Vi w

V lW y . w

V .w

'/ i w

'A w

Vi w

V .w

' / | W

'A w

'A w

’/ i w

V .w

'A w

V .w

'A W

Vi w

V .w

'A w

V .w

V .w

V.

W

Vi w

Vi w

'A w

V .w

1 w

V.W

V.W

1 w

Var

Var

' / / W

5 w

V .w

'A W

'A w

Vi w

'A w

Vi w

Vi w

Vi w

V .w

'A w

'A w

'A w

Vi w

V .w

Vi w

V .w

' / | W

Vi w

Var

S /N Range

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

5%

1%

1%

1%

1 % X5680-up

XI 880-up

Prec 1%

5%

5%

5%

5%

Prec

W W

1%

DELAY STOP

DELAY TIME MULTIPLIER 1-10

W W

W W

DELAY START

1%

5%

5%

Ckt. N o.

R508

R509

R510

R511

R512

R514

R516

R5I7

R519

R522

R524

R525

R526

R530A

R530B

R493

R495

R496

R497

R498

R499

R501

R503C

R503D

R507

R475

R477

R479

R481

R481

R483

R484

R485

R486

R487

R488

R451

R452

R453

R454

R455

R456

R457

R458

R459

R461

R464

R467

R469

R470

R471

R474

T ektronix

Part No.

|

316-102

306-333

301-201

Use 311-491

306-333

316-101

302-332

302-224

311-026

305-183

323-356

301-565

302-101

311-431

302-183

304-223

302-103

301-913

304-393

316-100

302-472

302-473

302-332

323-384

303-183

316-273

302-155

311-153

323-382

303-183

302-104

316-273

302-155

301-154

304-273

301-434

311-028

315-203

316-470

303-433

303-433

301-434

315-203

316-470

303-433

303-433

315-162

302-470

323-611

323-610

323-481

Resistors (Conf'c/j

Description

V i w

1 w

•A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

1 w

'A w

' / j w

1 w

' / | W

V i

w

1 w

V „ W y , w y , w

V i

w

’A w

1 w

'A w

V i

w

Var

Var

'A w

'A w

1 w

1 W

'A w

'A w

'A w

1 w

1 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

V i

w

'A w

2 w

V i

w

2 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

2 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

Var

Var

Var

1 k

33k

200 0

10k

33 k loon

3.3 k

220k

100 k

16k

49.9 k

5.6 meg loon

50k

50k

100k

27 k

1.5 meg

150 k

27 k

430k

2 x 100 k

20k

4 7 0

43k

43k

430 k

20k

47 n

43 k

43k

1.6 k

47 n

900 k

111 k

1 meg

18k

22k

10k

91 k

39k ion

4.7 k

47 k

3.3 k

97.6 k

18k

27 k

1.5 meg

10k

93.1 k

18k

Ports List— Typo 547

S /N Range

5%

Prec

Prec

1%

5%

A SWEEP DC LEVEL

1%

5%

Prec

Prec

Prec

5% 100-1159

1160-up

5%

TRACE SEPARATION

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

1%

1%

1%

5%

VAR 10-1

Prec

EXT HORIZ DC B Al

5%

1%

5%

HORIZ POSITION

VERNIER

6 -4 3

R562

R563

R564

R566

R568

R569

R570

R571

R572

R573

R574

R553

R554

R556

R557C

R557E

R557F

R557G

R557H

R558

R561

R576

R577

R578

R579

R580

R581

R582

R583

R584

R585

R538

R539

R540

R541

R542

R543

R544

R545

R545

R547

R550

6 -4 4

Part* List— Typ« 547

Ckt. N o.

R531

R532

R533

R534

R535

Resistors (Co n t 'd )

T ektronix

Part N o.

323-369

301-274

323-452

304-123

316-390

68.1 k

270 k

499 k

12k

3 9 0

Description

'A w

'A w

'A w

1 w

'A w

302-123

303-753

304-822

316-101

301-303

12k

75 k

8.2 k

1 0 0 0

30 k

306-393

311-172

323 284

323-0281-00

302-104

302-823

39 k

2.5 k

8.87 k

8.25 k

100k

82 k

323-295

308-211

323-252

323-662

323-196

301-182

323-162

301-122

302-104

302-104

11.5k

12k

4.12 k

4.28 k

1.07 k

1.8k

47517

1.2 k

100k

100 k

302-0333-00

323-281

308-211

311-066

302-473

311-026

316-470

308-266

*310-600

316-470

316-470

3 3 k

8.25 k

12k

500 n

47 k

100k

47 C7

5 k

18 k/4.5 k

47 n

47 0

•310-601

302-154

316-103

302-394

316-470

302-155

•310-611

316-470

316-470

306-224

'A w

'A w

5 w

2 w w

30k

150k

10k

390k

4 7 0

1.5 meg

18 k /3 7 k/800 O

4 7 0

4 7 0

220k

'A w

5 w

7 w

'A w

•A w

8 w

•A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

V»W

6 w

•A w

'A w

2 w

'A w

5 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

1 w

1 w

'A w

'A w

2 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

Var

Var

Var

Prec

Prec

1%

5%

1%

S /N Range

Prec

W W

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

5%

5%

X 1 0

1%

1%

1%

5%

1%

1%

1%

5%

1%

5%

100-5129

5130-up

Prec

W W

W W

W W

1%

5%

X I i

SWP,

5V.

W W

1%

X5680-up

W W

©

R631

R632

R634

R635

R636

R637

R638

R639

R640

R641

R644

R645

R646

R647

R650

R65T

R663

R664

R665

R 666

R 667

R 667

R668

R610

R615

R616

R617

R618

R621

R623

R625

R628

R629

R592

R594

R595

R597

R598

R599

R601

R603

R605

R608

Ckf. No.

R586

R587

R588

R589

R591

T ektronix

Part No.

*310-601

302-154

316-103

302-394

302-155

302-102

302-104

302-563

316-470

304-103

302-473

308-229

308-269

311-377

302-333

316-470

308-282

308-282

324-443

324-458

Use 301-185

304-333

301-225

301-226

302-334

301-304

302-563

302-102

316-470

302-105

304-153

304-153

302-684

302-273

302-683

306-100

306-100

302-102

302-104

324-369

311-015

324-356

302-104

302-102

302-474

302-104

302-275

302-275

Resistors

( C o o l'd ) y , w

’A w

Vi w

1 w

1

W

Vi w

V i w

y,

w

2 w

2 w y , w y4 w

25 w

25 w

1 w

1 w y , w

1 w

'/i w

V i w

V i w y . w

Vi w y , w

1 w

1 w

y»

w y , w

Vi w

’/} w

y, w

y , w

Description

8 w y , w

’/»

W y , w

y,

w y , w

y,

w y4 w

1 w y , w

5 w

3 w y , w

Var

Vor

100k

68.1 k

10 k

49.9 k

100 k

1 k

470 k

100 k

2.7 meg

2.7 meg

1 k

47 n

1 meg

15k

15k

680k

27 k

68k io n io n

1 k

47 n

1.35 k

1.35 k

402 k

576 k

1.8 meg

33k

2.2 meg

22 meg

330 k

300 k

56k

30k

150k

10k

390 k

1.5 meg

1 k

100 k

56k

47 n

10k

47 k

4 k

2 2

n

25 n

33k

P art* List— Type 547

W W 1%

S /N Range w w

W W w w

5%

5%

SCALE ILIUM

Prec

W W

Prec

1%

- 1 5 0 VOLTS

1%

W W

W W

Prec

Prec

5%

5%

1%

1%

5%

5%

5%

5%

X I081-up

X1081-up

100-1080

1 0 8 1 u d

6 -4 5

Part* Lit*— Type 547

R681

R682

R683

R685

* 6 0 6

* 6 8 8

* 6 8 9

* 6 9 3

* 6 9 4

* 6 9 7

* 6 9 8

* 6 9 9

* 7 0 0

* 7 0 1

* 7 0 3

* 7 0 4

* 7 0 5

* 7 0 6

* 7 0 7

R7i0

R711

R712

R723

R726

R727

R728

Ckt. No.

R669

R670A

R670B

R671

R673

R674

R675

R 676

* 6 7 7

* 6 8 0

R728

R729

R729

R730

R731

K734

R737

R741

R743

R744

R757

R758

6 -4 6

T ektronix

Port N o.

302-393

306-100

306-100

308-155

308-147

302-102

303-470

303-470

Use 308-065

324-443

324-601

302-124

302-102

304-823

302-184

302-155

302-225

302-155

302-473

302-824

302-274

302-473

306-100

306-100

303-470

302-102

303-470

Use 308-0282-00

308-102

324-467

324-604

302-154

302-105

301-0204-00

302-105

302-684

264 k

120 k

1 k

82k

180k

1.5 meg

2.2 meg

1.5 meg

47k

820 k

270 k

47 k io n io n

47 n

1 k

47 n

1.35 k

1.25 k

715 k

303 k

150k

1 meg

200k

1 meg

680 k

39 k io n io n soon

750 n

1 k

47 n

47 n

2 k

402 k

301-0474-00

302-224

301-0224-00

302-100

306-823

316-470

308-192

302-104

307-103

307-103

302-154

315 823

470 k

220k

220k i o n

82 k

47 n

5k

100k

2.7 n

2.7 n

150k

82k

Resistors (C o n I 'd j

Description

V |W

2 w

2 w

25 w

25 w

Vi w

1 w

1

W

25 w

1

W

1 w

Vi w

V iw

1 w

V , W

Vs

W

V

W

V

W s w

Vl w

V, w

Vl

W

2 w

2 w

1 w

Vs w

1 w

25 w

25 w

1 w

1 w

Vl w

Vl w

V

W

Vl w

” , w

Viw s w

V

W

Vl W

2 w

20 w

Vi

w

y < w

% w

V4 w

W W

W W

W W

Prec

Prec

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

1%

1%

S /N Range

W W

W W

Prec

Prec

5%

5%

5%

5%

1%

1%

5%

5%

5%

X7330-up

100-7329

7330-up

100-7329

7330-up

W W 5%

5%

5%

5%

Ckf. N o.

R759

R760

R761

R761

R762

R762

R763

R764

R765

R766

R767

R768

R769

R771

R773

R774

R775

R 777

R778+

R802

RB03

R804

R806

R807

R814

R820

R821

R822

R824

R625

Tektronix

Port No.

315-203

316-470

315-472

321-0258-00

301-683

323-0370-00

302-185

302-105

302-474

316-470

304-122

308-286

316-101

323-097

323-097

324-097

323-097

307-103

311-407

306-271

306-563

316-0104-00

Use 302-0823-00

301-432

302-474

302-333

301-225

302-333

305-755

305-755

20k

47 n

4.7 k

4.75 k

68k

69.8 k

1.8 meg

1 meg

470 k

47 0

1.2k

8 2 k

io o n lo o n

ioo

n

100 Q

io o n

2.7 n

2 x 1 0 0

270 n

56k

100k

82k

4.3 k

470 k

33 k

2.2 meg

33k

7.5 meg

7.5 meg

R826

R826

R827

R828

R830

R831

R832

R836

R840

R841

R842

R843

311-450

311-0450-01

302-333

302-223

302-335

306-183

302-101

316-105

311-034

303-225

303-335

303-275

R845

R846

R846

R847

R853

R857

303-335

311-313

311-0313-01

302-474

302-103

302-273 tFurniihed as a unit with R864.

1 meg

1 meg

33 k

22k

3.3 meg

18k

io o n

1 meg

500 k

2.2 meg

3.3 meg

2.7 meg

3.3 meg

5 meg

5 meg

470 k

10k

27 k

Resistors (Conf'dJ

'A *

V*

w

'A *

2 w

y,

w

'A *

1 w

1 w

1 w

1 w

D escription y * w

% w

'/< w

% w y,w

'A w

y»w

y,w y, w

V.W

1 w

3 w y4w y» w y,w

1 w y,w

y.

w

2 w

2 w y . W

Vi

w

y .w

'A *

'A * y»w

'A w

2 w

2 w

Var

Var

Var

Var

Var

Var y . w

y .w

y .w

Parts List— Type 5 4 7

Prec

Prec

5%

5%

1%

5%

1%

S /N Range

100-1727

1728-up

100-1727

1728-up

W W

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

W W

5%

1%

1%

1%

1%

5%

TRACE ROTATION

X5830-up

5%

5%

5%

5%

INTENSITY

INTENSITY

100-8139

8140-up

HIGH VOLTAGE

5%

5%

5%

5%

FOCUS

FOCUS

100-8139

8140-up

6 -4 7

Parts List— Type 547

R863

R864t

R931

R932

R934

R935

R936

R938

R939

R941

R943

R944

R945

R948

R949

R950

R950

R951

R951

R952

R952

R953

R953

R954

R954

R954

R955

R955

R956

R956

R956

Ckt. N o.

R858

R859

R861

R862

R862

R863

R957

R957

R957

R958

R958

R958

R960

R962

323-629

323-0702-01

323-0629-01

323-628

323-0701-01

323-0628-01

323-636

323-627

R962

R962

R964

R964

R965

R965

R969

323-0700-01

323-0627-01

323-638

323-0638-06

323-637

323-0637-06

308-242 tFurnished as a unit with R778.

Tektronix

Part No.

302-105

302-471

311-025

301-823

323-395

301-473

323-356

311-407

302-154

301-394

301-475

302-103

302-102

302-102

302-221

302-221

311-141

302-100

308-268

315-0682-00

302-274

323-289

323-0709-01

323-635

323 0708 01

323-634

323-0707-01

323-633

323-0706-01

323-632

323-0705 01

323-0632-01

323-631

323-0704-01

323-630

323-0703-01

323-0630-01

1 meg

470 n

100 k

82k

127 k

47 k

49.9 k

50 k

150k

390 k

4.7 meg

10k

1 k

1 k

220 n

220 n

2 k ion

22 k

6.8 k

270k

10k

10.048 k

6.667 k

6.628 k

1.789 k

1.728 k

801

n soon

452 0

452 n

452 0

146.1 O

1460

72 .4 0

7 2 .4 0

72.4 0

43.1 O

43.1 0

43.1 0

28 .6 0

28 .6 0

2 8 .6 0

50 k

21 .4 0

21.4 0

21.4 0

50k

50k

5 0 0 son

.2 5 0

6 -4 8

Resistors (C o n t'd )

Vi W

V*

W

V i W

V, w

V i w

5 w

% w

V i W

V i w

V j

W

Vi w

V j W

V j w

'/ j W

V j w

V j w

V j w

V j w

Vj

W

V j w

V j

w

V j

w

V j w

V j

W

V i

/

w w

J W

V j

W

V j

w

V j w

V j w

V j w

V j w

V i w

V i

w

Vi w

V j w

V .w

V j

W

5 w

Description

V i w

V jw

% w

V i

w

Vj w

V ,w

V i w

Vj w

Vi W

'/, w

Var

Var

Var W W

W W

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

W W

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

W W

S /N Range

GEOMETRY

5%

1%

5%

100-1009

1010-up

100-1009

1%

ASTIGMATISM

1010-up

5%

5*/.

CAL AMPl

1%

5%

1%

ViV.

1%

'/!%

1%

V j %

1%

’/ l%

1%

'/j%

V j

%

1%

V j

%

1%

V j %

V i %

1 %

V j %

V j

%

1 %

V i%

V i%

1%

1 %

V j %

V i %

'A %

% %

% %

5%

X3150-up

100-2889

2890-up

100-2889

2890-up

100-2889

2890-up

100-2889

2890-up

100-2889

2890-14130

14131-up

100 2889

2890-up

100-2889

2890-14130

14131-up

100-2889

2890-14130

14131-up

100-2889

2890-14130

14131-up

100-2889

2890-14130

14131-up

100-10199

10200-up

100-8849

8850-up

©

Ckt. N o.

R1000

R1001

R1002

R1003

R1004

R1004

R101I

RI013

R1014

R1015

R1016

R1017

R1017

R1018

R1019

RI020

R1024

R1025

R1026

R1027

R1027

R1031

R1032

R1034

R1038

R1041

R1042

R1048

R1051

R1061

R1091

R1104

R1105

R1106

R1106

R1108

Rl 109

R1113

R1114

R1118

Rl 124

R1069

R107I

R1072

R1073

R i:7 4

R1076

R1076

R1077

R1077

R1082

R1083

R1084

R1087

R1088

R1089

315-361

315-360

323-105

301-331

321-073

311-442

311-1223-00

315-163

311-0614-00

323-105

301-331

321-073

304-122

305 681

308-296

311-0613-00

301-270

323-102

311-442

311-1223-00

•310-603

305-0243-00

315-100

•310-602

308-232

301-270

T ektronix

Part N o.

315-471

315-512

322-092

315-100

301-821

315-512

322-092

301 821

321-117

321-117

316-820

315 220

301-101

305-682

311-086

311-0629-00

315-220

305-682

301-131

315-131

315-300

311-258

311-0097-00

305-273

308-002

316-331

301-131

315-131

315-300

315-121

330 n

130(1

130 (1

30(1

120(1

470 (1

5.1 k

88 7(1 i o n

820 n

5.1 k

B8.7 0

820 n

162 n

162 n

82 n

22 n l o o n

6.8 k

2.5 k

3 k

2 2

n

6.8 k

13 00

130 0

3 0 n ioo n

200(1

27 k

1.5k

360 n

36 n

121 n

330 n

56.2 n

250 n

250 n

16k

30 k

121 n

330 n

56 2 n

1.2 k

680 0

1.2 k

100k

27 n

1 1 3 0

250 0

250 0

600 0/3 0 0 0

24 k i o n

1 k

320 0

27 0

2 w

5 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w y . w

'/• w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'A w

'/» w

Resistors IC o n t'd )

D escription

'A w

'A w

'A w

2 w

Var

Var

'A w

2 w

'A w

'A w

'A w

Var

Var

Var

Var

Var

'A w

'A w

'A w

'/• w

1 w

2 w

5 w

Var

'A w

'A w

Var

Var

3 w

2 w

'A w

8 w

5 w

'A w

Parts list— Type 5 4 7

Prec

W W

W W

W W

Prec

Prec

W W

W W

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

Prec

S /N Range

5%

5%

5%

VERT DC BAL 100-6729

VERT DC BAL 6730-up

5%

5%

57.

5%

5%

1%

57.

1%

17.

5%

5%

1%

5%

5%

5%

VERT G A IN 100-4749

VERT G A IN 4750-up

5%

5%

X940-up

5%

5%

5%

5% 100-1009

1010-up

5%

5%

17.

57.

17.

5%

100-15279

15280-up

100-10729

10730-up

17.

57.

57.

57.

57.

XI 0730-up

57.

1%

100-15279

15280-up

2%

5%

57.

17.

5%

5%

X2340-up

6 -4 9

Port* List— Typt 547

Resistors (Conf'dJ

Ckt. N o .

R1126

R1126

R1129

R1132

R1134

R1141

R1142

R1144

R1151

R1152

R1153

RU 54

R1156

R1I57

R1161

R1163

R1165

R1166

R1169

R1173

R1175

T ektronix

Port No.

321-204

321-0201-00

308-283

315-100

•310-602

322-092

315-331

301-681

322-092

315-331

315-100

301-681

315-820

315-361

315-221

308-258

1.3 k

1.21 k

800 0 ion

1 k

88.7 0

330 0

680 0

88.7 0

330 0 io n

680 0

82 0

360 0

220 0

6 k

Description

Vi w

Vs w

10 w

Vs w

8 w

Vs w

V. W*

Vi w

Vs w

W w

Vs w

Vi w

Vs w

Vs w

Vs w

Iw

Prec

Prec

W W

W W

Prec

Prec

W W

R1181

R1184

R1187

R1187

R1191

R1194

315-820

302-221

302-105

308-258

315-820

315-105

301-334

301-334

323-0431-00

315-105

301-334

82 0

220 0

1 meg

6 k

82 k

1 meg

330k

330 k

301 k

1 meg

330k

SW1

SW5

SW10

SW75

SW 15t

SW90 unwired wired

260-495

\

260-494

260-542 f _ _ _ _ _ _

(

IB Triggering)

260-493/

311-426

260-531 *262-596

Lever

Lever

Lever

Lever

Lever

Rotary

SW90 260-0531-00 *262-0596-01

S W 90Z tt 311-391

SW201

SW205

260-495V

260-5421 * 2^ 2' 597 (A Triggering)

SW210

SW375 260-493

/

Rotary

Lever

Lever

Lever

Lever

S W 2 1 5 ttt 311-426

SW290 260-530 *262-595

SW290 260-0530 00 *262-0595-01

S W 2 9 0 Z ttt+ 311-391

SW369

SW135

1 •*“ »

Lever

Rotary

Rotary

Lever

Push

SW530 260-535 *262-601

SW530 260-0796-00 *262-0601-00

SW557 260-534 *262-600 ♦

SW601 260-199

SW60I 260-0785-00

SW601 260-0276-00

S W 6 0 2 ttttt

Rotary

Rotary

Rotary

Toggle

Toggle

Toggle tFurnished a* a unit with R15. ttF urn iih ed a* a unit with R90Z. tttF u rn iih e d as a unit with R215. ttttF u rn ish e d as a unit with R290Z. t t t t tS e e Mechanical Parts List, Line Voltage Selector Body

Vs w

Vi w

V i

w l w

Vs w

Vs w

Vi w

V i

w

Vi w

Vs w

Vi w

Switches

SOURCE

COUPLING

SLOPE

MODE

PULL FOR X10 RANGE INCREASE

A TIME/CM

A TIME/CM

SINGLE SWEEP

RESET

W W

Prec

SOURCE

COUPLING

SLOPE

MODE

PULL FOR X10 RANGE INCREASE

B TIME/CM OR DELAY TIME

B TIME/CM OR DELAY TIME

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY REAR

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY REAR

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY FRONT

POWER O N

POWER O N

POWER O N

1%

1%

5%

5%

1%

1%

5%

5%

1%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

5%

1%

5% s%

6 -5 0

S /N Range

100-10729

10730-up

100-11889

11890-up

100-5309

5310-up

100-5309

5310-up

100-4269

4270-up

100-7979

7980-15300

15301-up

X7980-up

‘ REV. G SEP. 1975.

V293

V345

V393

V404

V494

V514

V574

V584

V589

V609

V24

V24

V24

V9T

V91

V93

V145

V I93

V224

V224

V224

V291

V624

V634

V637

V647

V664

V677

T52

T52

T252

T252

T601

T601

T801

T1030

T il 04

Ckt. N o .

T ektronix

Part N o.

SW673

SW858

260-516

260-209

SW950 260-536 Use *262-0731-00

SW1000 260-601

TK601 260-336

Switches (Conf'dJ

Push

Description

Toggle CRT CATHODE SELECTOR

Rotary

Slide

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR

COMPENSATION

Thermal Cutout 150* F ± 5 * F

Use *120-0323-01

•120-0500-00

Use *120-0323-01

•120-0500-00

•120-307

Transform ers

Toroid 2T-8T Bifilar

Toroid 2T-12T Bifilar

Toroid 2T-BT Bifilar

Toroid 2T-12T Bifilar

L.V. Power

*120-0521-00

*120-308

*120-341

276-541

LV. Power

H.V. Power

Toroid 3T Bifilar

Core, Ferrite

Electron Tubes

154-187

154-187

154-187

154-187

154-187

154-187

154-187

154-187

154-146

154-291

154-187

*157-0122-00

♦157-0125-00

154-040

154-0040-05

154-187

6DJ8

6DJ8, Checked

6DJ8, Checked

12AU6

8426

6DJ8

154-187

154-187

154-187

*157-0122-00

*157-0125-00

154-022

6DJ8

6DJ8

6DJ8

6DJ8, Checked

6DJ8, Checked

6AU6

154-043

154-022

154-202

154-202

154-414

154-056

6DJ8

6DJ8

6DJ8

6DJ8

6DJ8

6DJ8

6DJ8

6DJ8

6197

OG3

12AX7

6AU6

6CW5

6CW5

6BY8

6080

<8

Parts List— T ype 547

S /N Range

100-6739

6740-up

100-6739

6740-up

100-7979

7980-up

100-6239

6240-7979

7980-up

100-4169

4170-up

100-6239

6240-7979

7980-up

6-51

V859t

V859

V859

V862

V935

V945

V1003

V I 003

V I 184

Ckt. N o.

V684

V694

V707

V724

V737

V764

V800

V814

V822

V832

V842

V852

Part* List— Type 547

Electron Tubes

( C o n t 'd l

T ektronix

Port N o .

154-043

154-022

154-056

154-022

154-202

154-187

154-021

1544)41

154-051

154-051

154-051

1544)51

12AX7

6AU6

6080

6AU6

6CW5

6DJ8

6AU5

12AU7

5642

5642

5642

5642

Description

*154-0478-00

*154-04784)0

•154-0568-00

154-051

1544)41

T5470-31-2 CRT Standard Phosphor

T5470-31-2 CRT Standard Phosphor

T5471-31-2 CRT Standard Phosphor

5642

12AU7

1544)22

154039

•1574)1184)0

154-043

6AU6

12AT7

12AT7, checked

12AX7

CRT O p tio n a l Phosphors

*154-0568-01

*154-0568-02

*154-0568-03

P2

P7

P11

S /N Range

100-2069

2070-9999

10,000-up i 00-6729

6730-up t S / N 100-2069 add *050-0246 kit.

IMPORTANT:

A ll circuit voltages w ere o b ta in e d w ith a 2 0 ,0 0 0 £2/V olt V O M .

A ll readings are in volts. The voltages w e re measured w ith respect to gro u n d unless otherw ise ind ica te d by the use o f arrow s to p o in t o u t v o lt­ age d ro p .

W aveform s w e re o b ta in e d using a Type 530-Series O scilloscope w ith a

Type L Plug-In U nit and 10X a tte n u a to r probe. An e q u iva le n t o scillo ­ scope having a ve rtica l passband o f dc to 10 me o r b e tte r a n d equal sensitivity can be used as a test oscilloscope.

W a v e fo rm dc levels w ith respect to gro u n d are indicated a t the rig h t side o f w a ve fo rm ; measured w hen test oscilloscope AC -D C switch was set to DC.

W aveform s w ere p h o to g ra p h e d w ith test oscilloscope AC-DC switch set to AC; vertical d e fle ctio n fa c to r and T im e/C m switch set to those settings indicated a d ja ce n t to w aveform s.

In most cases + E x t. AC trig g e rin g on the Type 5 4 7 1-kc AMPLITUDE

CALIBRATOR signal w as used. Exceptions: — Int., + l n t . and + L in e

160 cps) trig g e rin g modes w ere also used; these modes, if used, are ind ica te d above the w aveform s.

NOTE

N um ber o f cycles disp la ye d by w a ve fo rm when c a li­ b ra to r signal was used as a trig g e r source depends m ostly on the signal repetition rate. Though + E x t. tr ig ­ g ering was used, a tim e d iffe re n ce o f 1 msec can occur between w aveform s because the test oscilloscope can trig g e r on a d iffe re n t cycle than the Type 5 4 7 and vice versa.

V o lta g e an d w a ve fo rm measurements are not absolute. They m ay vary betw een instruments due to norm al m a n u fa ctu rin g tolerances, an d tra n ­ sistor an d vacuum tube characteristics.

The p lu g -in unit used in the Type 5 4 7 O scilloscope d u rin g the vo lta g e and w a ve fo rm measurements is a Type TU-7 Test U nit. Its fro n t-p a n e l control settings and o th e r condition s are as fo llo w s :

Input Signal ....................................................

P o s itio n .................................................

Test Function .....................................

Centered

None

(Exception: See V ertical

A m p lifie r schematic diagram )

Low Load

A n y letter-series o r 1-series p lu g -in unit o r the TU-2 can be used in place o f the Type TU-7 w hen tro u b le sh o o tin g the Type 547.

V E R T I C A L

I N P U T

V E R T I C A L

P L U G - I N

A M P L I F I E R

T

*

I

V E R T S I C

O U T

T R I G G E R

P I C K O F F

E F a 1 1 * 9 0 1 1 7 3

I N P U T

C F

V 100 3

V E R T I C A L

I N P U T

A M P L I F I E R

Q 1 0 I 4 Q I 0 2 4

D E L A Y

L I N E

1 7 0 n S E C

M U L T I - T R A C E

S Y N C

A M P L I F I E R

V 7 6 4

*A'

T R I G G E R

I N P U T

( e x t T

( T i '

¥ 1

.

T R I G G E R

G E N E R A T O R

V 2 2 4 0 2 4 4

T R I G G E R

P 1 C K O F P

Q 1 1 4 4 Q 1 1 3 4

-o-*o-

On o

*A*

*6'

E X T

'A'

S W E E P

G A T I N G

O Z B 4 D 2 8 6

D 2 S 5 DSOO

Q 2 3 f c * Q 3 Q S

H O L O O F F

$ L O C K O U T

M U L T I V I B R A T O R

V 1 4 5 0 2 6 9

S I N G L E

S W E E P

R E S E T

3 W S 4 9

'B'

A U T O

M U L T I V I B R A T O R

Q 6 6 Q 7 3

'B '

T R I G G E R I

I N P U T

” n * T >

|

T R I G G E R

G E N E R A T O R

V 2 4

Q 3 4

Q 4 4

D 4 S

D E N O T E S P R E S E N C E I N U N I T S

A B O V E S N 1 1 4 6 0 . F O R U N I T S

B E L O W 5 N 1 1 4 6 0 , T H E C O M ­

P O N E N T I S A S S E N T .

T Y P E S 4 7 O S C I L L O S C O P E

H O L O O F P

$ L O C K O U T

MULTIVIBRATOR

0 S 9 V 1 4 5

f t

M R U -

9 * 9

'A '

o r

'B '

o r

E X T E R N A L M O D E

E5 7 O C E

&

P O N fc N T IS A B 5 1 N T •

VB ' IN T E N S IF IE D BY 'A' MODE

DON

9fc9

V t R T I C A L

INUJT f-

V E R T A IO

O U T

O

TYPE. 5 4 7 O SCILLOSCOPE

'A ' D E L A Y E D M O D E .

TYPE 5 4 7 OSCILLOSCOPE ft

ft

X ALTERNATE. WITH MODE

«K>

6 9

V E R T I C A L

IN P U T

V E R T S IG

O U T

O

5 7 I L C .

'E y

I N T E N S B Y 'A" A L T E R N A T E W IT H 'A' D LY’D

DOM

9 6 9

MODE

MO f » D J S

V574

6DJO

V/4V4

<F>DJ&

V /93

6 D J e

V 7 6 4 V 5 / 4

ADi/6

V 3 9 3

AO./rt

^293 f> D U Q

V2Z^

* > D J 4

1/346

S D * J Q

V 7 0 7

6 0 6 0

1/737

6CW3 ft! ©•

TYPE 5 4 7 OSCILLOSCOPE

^ 'o w n wm .v

^ c u t emeurr

^ •» ftwie* T«i4<ku

<&> A ' i w u p T O i a a t n

<g> D U M ilN CONW K .TO * piu >

LIU M T

P O W E R S U P P L Y C H A S S IS

H E A T E R W I R I N G D I A G R A M

% N 7 * * 0 - U P

P O W E R .

» n rfto-v* S U P P L V v

1

POWER SUPPLY

VOLTAGE READINGS WERE OBTAINED under the fo llo w in g conditions:

LINE V O L T A G E ..................................

INPUT SIGNAL ..................................

•A* A N D 'B ' TRIGGER INPUT S ignal . . . . None

•A ' A N D 'B ' TRIGGERING LEVEL . .

•A ' A N D ‘ B’ TRIGGERING MODE . . ___ TRIG

'A ' A N D ‘ B' TRIGGERING SOURCE ____ EXT

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR ............... . . . . OFF

POWER ................................................. ___ O N

Also see IMPORTANT note on " A o r B o r External M o d e " Block d ia g ra m

*oov s e ^ t

G O J & v a r *

6 D U Q

V A 9 4

6 D J 6

V / 9 5

* D J e

V7B4 a DOB

V 514

6 D J Q

V 3 9 3

£ D j Q

V 2 9 9 aDsJQ

VZ2A a D xja

V 3 4 5 a o j a

<

8

>

, UNC

'r 'f S t r ®

•A' S W E E P C H A S S IS

TO

LKkMTO v a i 4

I 2 A U 7

F t l C H A S S IS

V U B 4

/ 2 A X 7

V 9 3 a D\j a

V 4 0 4

6 d j &

V 2 4

€ d j b

% C H A S S I S v«64

4

VB94

£ A U €

4

Si O ftl 9

V 7 0 7

6 0 8 0

.

Y 7 J 7

6 C W 6

<a|

.

TYPE 6 4 7 OSCILLOSCOPE

^

Q

IttM M i k B W m

»owt« mri*.v

C A T c m c u iT

^

^

<£>

*»• t W U T T R l M i a

K

» w t l » T f tiO O tft

a U A l H COMMK.CTO*

POWER SUPPLY CHASSIS

H E A T E R W I R I N G D I A G R A M

1

CRT CIRCUIT

W A V E F O R M A N D D Y N A M IC V O L T A G E R E A D IN G S w e re o b ta in e d under th e f o llo w in g c o n d itio n s :

IN T E N S IT Y ccw

P O W E R

O N

* V o lt a g e r e a d in g o b ta in e d w ith a s s o c ia te d c o n tro l set fo r n o rm a l o p e ra t io n . V o lt a g e is d e p e n d e n t o n p o s itio n o f th e c o n tro l.

A ls o see IM P O R T A N T n o te o n

" A o r B o r E x te rn a l M o d e ” Block d ia g ra m .

T801

TRANSFORMER

DETAILS

RjLTJ^R£N£l^^AAWINOA

^ P O W tR S U P P L Y 4 M E A T S * W IR IN G D lAG .

^ *D* S W L S P G t N t R A T O R

^ *A ' I W U P G lN L R A T O *

H O R IZ O N T A L d i s p l a y s w i t c h

< Q p l u g - i n c o n n l c t o r

Hfc PACTS UST H A t«J

V A lJ fS AND M « tM NUMMrf

CANGES O* PACTS MA«KH> wm< auii ouniMt

S E B P A R T S L I S T F O R

S S M IC O N O U C T O R T Y P E S

+

T E 7 L C

M V. A S S L M S L Y

C R T

C M©

4 vr

CIRCUIT <§>

V f c k l l C A l A M H I H t K cc l i l t ^ C t i i I V O U

AGt

K t A U t l K.»0 a v i c r> b n * li.c U O ild o i i t i v I v l i n 'n » g

conditions:

Oscilloscope;

P O W E R ................................................. O N

Type HJ / :

INPUT S I G N A l ....................................... N one

VEK1ICAI POSITION ...................... C entered’'

TEST F U N C T IO N .................................. C O M M O N M u L -t

‘ I f a letter ifciies uc ’ I ' series plug in im it is used, adjust the ph-g-in ijiiil V e rtica l Position co n tro l to o b ta in *e ro •/alts re a d in g betw een pins

1 a n d 3 o f the interconne cting plug

Also see IM P O R lA i-'l n o t e o n block Lnograiii.

f r o m

T R A C E . S E P A R A T I O N

A M P L I F I E R ,

F R O M

T R A C E S E P A R A T I O N

A M P L I F I E R , V 4 9 4 B

O

QUO4 k Q 1 0 7 4

R IO T S

M O

♦ 9 0 . 1

; r »

5 4 . 2

4

C I0 T 4

H H i *

R IO S T

I . S K

C l 0 6 7 g a n

H R l -

C I U 7 - -

1C “ i P Z g !

CRilO S

• 4 0 0

^ 1104

2 6 0

R lO ftA

- e s . x

♦ 9 0 . 2

R * I0 0 5

M O

BMOOO s s o

Q 1 0 6 - 4

C l NTT s s ^

Rioei i l l u o e i

S I

♦ B S O V

+ » f c . x

/ P i

I N T E R N A L T R IG G E R

S I G N A L T O 'A '

S O U R C E S W I T C H ,

N T E R N A L T R I G G E R

S I G N A L T O ' S '

S O U R C E S W I T C H

V E R T IC A L A M P L IF IE R <§>

♦ lOOV

T Y P E . f> 4 7 O SC IL L O S C O P E

'A ' S W U P T *

< $ > P L U & 'IM CONN

S K PAJTTJ UST P O i EAJtUBI

V A U IIS AND MMAL N U M M I tAMCCS O f P A IT1 M AJM D

<§> V urn

CAL AMPUFILft

< £ > '%>' IkW LtP Q k N L ftA T O ft

< § > 'A ' S W U P T H I M L K

< £> P U M ' I M CONNECTOR

M l P A R T * U f t T F O R

5 » M lC O P iD O C T O A T Y P E *

6

4*6

C M D

1

‘B’ SWEEP TRIGGER

WAVEFORMS A N D VOLTAGE READINGS w ere o b ta in e d under the fo l­ lo w in g conditions:

TIME BASE A —

TRIGGER INPUT S ignal ...................... None

TRIGGERING:

M O D E .................................................... TRIG

SOURCE ............................................... EXT

M A IN TIME BASE (B) —

TRIGGERING:

M O D E .................................................... TRIG

S L O P E .................................................... +

COUPLING .......................................... AC

SOURCE ............................................... EXT

HORIZONTAL D IS P L A Y .............................. B

POWER O N

W AVEFORM C onditions —

•B' TRIGGER INPUT Signal

‘ B’ TRIGGERING LEVEL . .

•B’ T I M E / C M ......................

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR

10 Volts P-P C a lib ra to r

+ 4 5 * ; knob pushed in

.1 mSEC

10 Volts

QUIESCENT VOLTAGE C onditions —

•B’ TRIGGER INPUT S i g n a l .................. None

•B’ TRIGGERING LEVEL w ith knob pushed in:

U pper V o lta g e R e a d in g s .................. ccw

Lower V o lta g e R e a d in g s ................... cw

A lso see IMPORTANT note on " A o r B or External M o d e " Block d ia g ra m .

♦ 1 0 0 V

+

T Y P t 5 - 4 7 O S C IL L O S C O P E

^ > ■ i w i k r T U I

^ P L U O -IM COHN c ,

7

IU

♦ »OOV

< R 4 »

! IOO

” L

C A% oa

I

L_

■f IO O V

(pic)

D K .C O U TU M G

< £ > P L U P 't N G O N W IC TO K

M i F A R T * U » T WOm.

M M I C O N O O C T O K r O l i

C »

C M D

'B ' SWEEP TRIGGER <$>

( * / n l o o - e r s p j v

B’ SWEEP GENERATOR

WAVEFORMS A N D VOLTAGE READINGS w ere o b ta in e d under the fo l­ lo w in g conditions:

TIME BASE A —

TRIGGER INPUT S ignal ...................... None

TRIGGERING:

M O D E .................................................... TRIG

SOURCE ............................................... EXT

HORIZONTAL D IS P L A Y .............................. B

SINGLE SWEEP S w it c h ........................... NORMAL

M A IN TIME BASE (B)

TRIGGERING LEVEL .

TRIGGERING:

S L O P E ....................

COUPLING ..........

SOURCE ...............

BR IG H TN ESS.............

T IM E /C M .................

VARIABLE (TIM E/CM )

+ 4 5 *; pushed in

+

AC

EXT cw

.1 mSEC

CALIBRATED

POWER O N

W AVEFORM C O NDITIO NS —

•B' TRIGGER INPUT SIGNAL .

■B’ TRIGGERING MODE . . .

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR . .

10 Volts P-P C a lib ra to r

TRIG (AUTO fo r w aveform s at collectors o f Q 6 5 an d Q 75).

10 V olts

QUIESCENT VOLTAGE C O N D ITIO N S —

‘ B’ TRIGGER INPUT S IG N A L .................. None

•B’ TRIGGERING MODE ........................ TRIG

A lso see IMPORTANT note on " A or B o r External M o d e " Block d ia g ra m .

r ------------------r --------------------------- r

IF** 2F4* IF

3 E C

5

2

1

.5

.2

• I

5 0

20

10

-O o

-o

5

*

2

1 -o o

. 5

.2

•

I

50

20

10

M S L C

5

2

I

. 5

.2

.1

o

-o

T “

&R

“

H O U D O F F

R E d l Q T O R S

1 r

M O L D O r r

C A P A C I T O R S

^ 'B ' SWEEP GENERATOR

T Y P E 5 4 7 O S C I L L O S C O P E t i l PARTS UST TO* I

VA11JII AND SHIM

I X N O I ) OP PMTS M

WTTH M U t OUTUML

RRV.D, JAM. I*

c.

> z

0>

(J)

£ m

H

2

Z

o

( I

£ o i l

I x

<£>

DELAY PICKOFF

WAVEFORMS A N D VOLTAGE READINGS w ere o b ta in e d under the f o l­ lo w in g conditions:

TIME BASE A —

*A* TRIGGER INPUT S i g n a l .................. None

•A ’ TRIGGERING LEVEL ...................... ccw

T IM E /C M ..................................................... 1 mSEC/CM

VARIABLE ................................................. CALIBRATED

SINGLE SWEEP S w it c h ................................ NORMAL

M A IN TIME BASE (B) —

TRIGGERING LEVEL............................... + 4 5 ' ; push in

TRIGGERING:

M O D E .................................................... TRIG

S L O P E .................................................... +

COUPLING .......................................... AC

SOURCE ............................................... EXT

T IM E /C M ..................................................... 1 mSEC/CM

VARIABLE ................................................. CALIBRATED

DELAY-TIME MULTIPLIER........................... 2.0 0

P O W E R ........................................................... O N

W AVEFORM CO N D ITIO N S -

‘ A ’ TRIGGERING MODE .

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY . .

•B1 TRIGGER INPUT Signal

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR

AUTO

A DLY’D

10 Volts P-P C a lib ra to r

10 Volts

QUIESCENT VOLTAGE C O NDITIO NS —

‘A ’ TRIGGERING M O D E ...................... TRIG

HORIZONTAL D IS P L A Y ......................... B

‘ B' TRIGGER INPUT S i g n a l .................. None

Also see IMPORTANT note on " A o r B o r External M o d e " Block d ia g ra m .

< 5 > ' V S W L IP t U I U U l W t « W U P U M U A T O d

< £ > H O R IZ O N T A L D IS P L A Y S W IT C H

/

T Y P E ! 5 - 4 7 O S C IL L O S C O P E B

------------------------------------------- !

+

DON

©4b*

D E L A Y P IC K O F F < J >

♦ IOOV

T Y P t 6 4 7 OSCILLOSCOPE.

B

< ^ > V U T K A L A H n j m i l

< ^ > 5 W U P n u M U

^ *A* S W U P O IN D U T O A

« p * m lot r o t l m u o i

VALUn AND M UAi N U M M

IANC1S OP PAST* MASMD

WfTX SVC OCTTUNt

• * T

C «D

‘A ’ SWEEP TRIGGBt

WAVEFORMS A N D VOLTAGE READINGS w ere o b ta in e d under the f o l­ lo w in g conditions:

TIME BASE A —

TRIGGERING:

M O D E .................................................... TRIG

S L O P E .................................................... +

COUPLING .......................................... AC

SOURCE ............................................... EXT

M A IN TIME BASE (B) —

TRIGGER INPUT S i g n a l ......................... N one

M O D E ......................................................... TRIG

SOURCE .................................................... EXT

HORIZONTAL D IS P L A Y .............................. A

P O W E R ........................................................... O N

W AVEFORM C O NDITIO NS —

*A' TRIGGER INPUT S ignal .

•A ’ TRIGGERING LE V E L____

*A ’ T IM E /C M ...........................

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR . .

10 V olts P-P C a lib ra to r

+ 4 5 * ; knob pushed in

.1 mSEC

10 Volts

QUIESCENT VOLTAGE C O N D ITIO N S —

‘ A ’ TRIGGER INPUT S i g n a l ................... N one

*A ’ TRIGGERING LEVEL w ith knob pushed in:

U pper V o lta g e R e a d in g s .................. ccw

Lower V o lta g e R e a d in g s ................... cw

A lso see IMPORTANT note on " A or B or External M o d e ” Block d ia g ra m .

♦ oov

TYPE. &<47 OSCILLOSCOPE.

c

' ♦ IOOV

L 2 5 ? ___

DECOUPLING tAMCcs o r m jm m

»"Tm bum o u tu m .

cho

'A' SWEEP TRIGGER < &

( 9 / N I O O - 67 3 9 ) V

♦ Z2SV ♦ 2 2 6 V g m a a g m a tfm fli*

C R T C I R C U I T

' S ' S W E E P G E N E R A T O R

D E L A Y P I C K O F F

‘ A * S W E E P T R I G G E R

' A ' S W E E P T I M I N G S W I T C H

A L T E R N A T E S W E E P S W I T C H I N G

H O R I Z O N T A L D I S P L A Y S W I T C H

P L U G - I N C O N N E C T O R , l T O

M R H

S W E E P G E N E R A T O R ^

( W n G T 4 0 u p ) v

‘A ’ SWEEP GENERATOR

WAVEFORMS A N D VOLTAGE READINGS w ere o b ta in e d under the fo llo w in g conditions:

TIME BASE A —

TRIGGERING LE V E L.............................

TRIGGERING:

SLOPE .................................................

COUPLING .......................................

SOURCE ............................................

T IM E /C M ...............................................

VARIABLE ...............................................

. + 4 5 * ; knob pushed in

• +

. AC

. EXT

. .1 mSEC

. CALIBRATED

HORIZONTAL D IS P L A Y ........................... . A

SINGLE SWEEP S w it c h ............................... . NORMAL

M A IN TIME BASE (B) —

TRIGGER INPUT S i g n a l ......................

TRIGGERING:

M O D E .................................................

SOURCE ............................................

. None

. TRIG

. EXT

P O W E R ........................................................ . O N

W AVEFORM CO N D ITIO N S —

‘A ’ TRIGGER INPUT S i g n a l ...............

•A ’ TRIGGERING M O D E ....................

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR .................

. 10 Volts P-P C a lib ra to r

. TRIG (AUTO fo r w aveform s a t collectors o f Q 2 6 5 a n d Q 2 7 5 ).

. 10 Volts

QUIESCENT VOLTAGE CO NDITIO NS

•A ’ TRIGGER INPUT S i g n a l ...............

‘A ' TRIGGERING M O D E ....................

. None

. TRIG

A lso see IMPORTANT note on " A o r B or External M o d e ” Block d ia g ra m .

3 f 1

... 1 ill

j c s°. « rr«fs=

V 2 2 S V

' A ' S W E E P

S A W T O O T H

T O

S W E E P SW IT C H IN G

G A T E ,

0 4 7 1 * 0 * * * ^ r e f e r e n c e ; d r a w i n g s *

C R T C I R C U I T

' S ' S W E E P G E N E R A T O R

D E L A Y P l C K O P P

* A ' S W E E P T R I G G E R

' A ' S W E E P T I M I N G S W I T C H

A L T E R N A T E S W E E P S W I T C H I N G

H O R I Z O N T A L D I S P L A Y S W I T C H

P L U G - I N C O N N E C T O R % u l

M R H

' A ' S W ^ . ?

o - ^ E R A T O R < ^ >

5

Q

C

E

ALTERNATE SWEEP SW ITCHING

WAVEFORMS A N D VOLTAGE READINGS w ere o b ta in e d un d e r the f o l­ lo w in g conditions:

TIME BASE A and M A IN TIME BASE (B) —

‘A ’ TRIGGERING LEVEL . / .................. ccw; pushed in

•B* TRIGGERING LE V E L......................... + 4 5 * ; pushed in

•A ’ an d B* TRIGGERING S LO P E .......... +

•A* a n d ‘ B’ TRIGGERING COUPLING . AC

•A ’ T IM E /C M ...............................................5 mSEC

‘ B’ T I M E / C M ............................................ 1 mSEC

‘A ’ an d B' VARIABLE (T IM E /C M )___ CALIBRATED

S ingle Sweep S w it c h .............................. NORM AL

DELAY-TIME M ULTIPLIER...................... 2.0 0

HORIZONTAL P O S IT IO N ...................... C entered

VERNIER (HORIZONTAL POSITION) . . ccw

P O W E R ...................................................... O N

W AVEFORM C O NDITIO NS

TRACE ROTATION ................................ Fully cw

•A ' TRIGGERING M O D E ...................... AU TO

‘ B’ TRIGGERING M O D E ......................... TRIG

‘A ’ an d 'B ' TRIGGERING SOURCE . . . LINE (60 cps)

HORIZONTAL D IS P L A Y * ...................... ALT B INTENS BY

•A ’ /A L T /A DLY’ D

’ Exception: See w a ve fo rm a t co lle cto r o f Q 4 5 4 .

QUIESCENT VOLTAGE C O NDITIO NS —

‘ A ’ TRIGGER INPUT S i g n a l ................. None

TRACE R O T A T IO N .................................. 0

‘A ’ an d B' TRIGGERING M O D E ____TRIG

‘A ’ a n d 'B* TRIGGERING SOURCE . . . EXT

HORIZONTAL D IS P L A Y ......................... B

Also see IMPORTANT note on “ A o r B o r External M o d e " Block d ia g ra m .

+ o o o

T Y P E 5 * 7 O S C I L L O S C O P E

+ U n*

— *J Rg5!tVIF

J s w i i i * s w i t c h i n g m u l t i v i i

J - 3 W T E P S W I T C H I N G M U L T I V I B R A T O R ^ - A S W E E P G A T E

+ IO O V

A S W E E P

T R A C E S E P A R A T I O N A M P L I F I E R i

!

i

I

>

C, m f acts u n k » m i i

VALUCS AND ODIM N U N H

KAMOCS Of PACTS M A M O

«MTM BUM OimJNB.

R E F E R E N C E DRAWINGS!

V E R T I C A L A M P L I F I E R !

* B ' S W E E P G E N E R A T O R

' A ' S W E E P G E N E R A T O R

H O R I Z O N T A L D I S P L A Y S W I T C H

H O R I Z O N T A L A M P L I F I E R

P L U G - I N C O N N E C T O R

M R N

8G6>

A L T E R N A T E S W E E P S W I T C H I N G ^

D E L A Y E D m o d e

A L T E R M A T E S W E E P

L O C K O U T F O R ' S ' S W E E P

S IN G L E S W E E P

R E S E T d e l a y e d M O D E

W S W E E P T R I G G E R

D IS A B L E

- j - H H O R IZ O N T A L DiSPC<ky~(- — y -------------- —

1 R o raOM ►

T ° o

y

T O

S W S 7 E

❖

b

E X T

I N I

H O L D O P P

C O R R E C T IO N

P L U S - I N U N IT

S L A V E P U L S E

D E L A T E D T R IG G E R

D IS C O N N E C T

S W E E P S W I T C H I N G M U L T I L O C K U P

T R A C E S E P A R A T IO N ^ S L A V E P U L S E

W S W E E P

T E R M IN A T IO N

A L T - T R A C E

S Y N C P U L S E

S W E E P S W IT C H IN G

T R IG G E R S O U R C E

- I -

T Y P E 5 4 7 O S C IL L O S C O P E

E E P E R E N C E D R A W IN G S

<$> C R T C I R C U I T

' S ' S W E E P G E N E R A T O R

❖

<$>

D E L A Y P lC K O F P

<$> 'A " S W E E P G E N E R A T O R

A L T E R N A T E S W E E P S W IT C H IN G f

❖

<£

H O R IZ O N T A L A M P L IF IE R

P L U G - I N C O N N E C T O R

D M O D t rm ia a tR

I

HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIER

W AVEFORM A N D VOLTAGE READINGS w ere o b ta in e d under the fo l­ lo w in g conditions:

M A IN TIME BASE (B) —

TRIGGERING LEVEL .............................. + 4 5 ‘ ; pushed in

TRIGGERING:

M O D E .................................................... TRIG

S L O P E .................................................... +

COUPLING .......................................... AC

SOURCE ............................................... EXT

T IM E /C M ......................................................1 m SEC/CM

VARIABLE ( T IM E /C M ) ........................... CALIBRATED

SWEEP M A G N IF IE R ................................ X I

HORIZONTAL POSITION (VERNIER) . . ccw

POWER O N

W AVEFORM C O NDITIO NS —

•B* TRIGGER INPUT Signal

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR . .

HORIZONTAL D IS P LA Y ____

SWEEP M A G N IF IE R ...............

HORIZONTAL POSITION . .

10 V olts P-P C a lib ra to r

10 Volts

B

X I

Centered

QUIESCENT VOLTAGE C O N D ITIO N S —

HORIZ INPUT S ig n a l.............................. N one

HORIZONTAL D IS P L A Y ......................... Ext X I

HORIZONTAL POSITION:

U pper V o lta g e R e a d in g s ................. ccw

Lower V o lta g e R e a d in g s ................. cw

Also see IMPORTANT note on " A or B o r External M o d e ” Block d ia g ra m .

Isw aao I

O M T A L D I S P L A Y )

( R E A R )

<nw

J

ITAIU . R&60

MK

,--- '

!»0 IT Z

11 T P

i V: J/Nl-tV

I I MASi OW |

HORIZONTAL AMPLIFILR <§>

i

SYNC AMP.

W AVEFORM A N D VOLTAGE READINGS w ere o b ta in e d under the f o l­ lo w in g conditions:

HORIZONTAL D IS P L A Y .............................. B

SINGLE SWEEP S w it c h ................................ NORMAL

M A IN TIME BASE (B) —

TRIGGER INPUT S i g n a l ......................... None

TRIGGERING LE V E L................................ cw

TRIGGERING S O U R C E ........................... EXT

T IM E /C M ................................................... 50 ju-SEC

VARIABLE ................................................. CALIBRATED

POWER O N

W AVEFORM CO NDITIO NS —

*B‘ TRIGGERING M O D E ...................... AUTO

QUIESCENT VOLTAGE CO N D ITIO N S —

•B1 TRIGGERING M O D E ...................... TRIG

A lso see IMPORTANT note on " A or B or External M o d e " Block d ia g ra m .

A L T E R N A T E

T R A C E

5VK1C

P U L S E

POWER SUPPLY * HEATER WIRING OlAG

& CRT CIRCUIT

^ VERTICAL AMPLIFIER

A ' f t '

SW EEP TRIGGER d k ' f t ' SW EEP GENERATOR

^ 'A ' S W E E P TRIGGER

& 'A ' SW EEP GENERATOR

<u> a l t e r n a t e s w e e p s w it c h i n g

< & h o r i z o n t a l o i s p l a y s w it c h s e e P A R T S l i s t f o r

S E M IC O N D U C T O R T T P S *

SR l * m 1ST K » l A t t R v / u t n am o n « A i n l m a u ft AM O K C0

WITH BUM OUTUNl

+

T Y P E S<*7 O S C I L L O S C O P E *

■ H O O V

B,

P L U G - I N C O N N E C T O

MRM

+

I

CALIBRATOR

W AVEFORM A N D D Y N A M IC VOLTAGE READINGS w e re o b ta in e d under the fo llo w in g conditions:

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR ........................... 10 Volts

P O W E R ........................................................... O N

A lso see IMPORTANT note on " A or B o r External M o d e " Block d ia g ra m .

+

MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION

At Tektronix, we continually strive to keep up with latest electronic developments by adding c irc u it and com ponent improvements to our instrum ents as soon as they are developed and tested.

Sometimes, due to printing and shipping requirements, we can't get these changos immediately into printed manuals. Hence, your manual may contain new change inform ation on follo w in g pages.

A single change may affect several sections. Since the change inform ation sheets are carried in the manual until all changes are perm anently entered, some duplication may occur. If no such change pages appear follow ing this page, your manual is correct as printed.

SERVICE NOTE

Because of the universal parts procurem ent problem, some electrical parts in your instrum ent may be different from those described in the Replaceable Electrical Parts

List. The parts used w ill in no way alter o r com prom ise the performance or reliability of this instrument. They are installed when necessary to ensure prom pt delivery to the customer. Order replacement parts from the Replaceable Electrical Parts List.

CALIBRATION TEST EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT

Calibration Teat Equipment Chart

This chart compares TM 500 product perform ance to that o f older Tektronix equipm ent. O nly those characteristics where significant specification differences occur, are listed. In some cases the new instrum ent may not be a total functional replacement. A dditional support instrum entation may be needed or a change in calibration procedure may be necessary.

Com parison of Main C haracteristics

DM 501 replaces 7D13

PG 501 replaces 107

108

PG 501 - Risetim e less than

3.5 ns in to 50 O.

PG 501 - 5 V o u tp u t pulse;

3.5 ns Risetime

107 - Risetim e less than

3.0 ns Into 50 O.

108 - 10 V o u tput pulse

1 ns Risetime

PG 502 replaces 107

108 l i t

PG 502 - 5 V o u tput

PG 502 - Risetim e less than

1 ns; 10 ns

Pretrigger pulse delay

108 - 10 V output

111 - Risetim e 0.5 ns; 30 to 250 ns

Pretrigger pulse delay

PG 508 replaces 114

115

2101

PG 506 replaces 106

Perform ance of replacem ent equipm ent is the same or better than equipm ent being replaced

PG 506 - Positive-going trigg e r o u tpu t slgnal at least 1 V;

H igh A m p litu d e output. 60 V.

106 - Positive and Negativegoing trigg e r o u tput signal. 50 ns and 1 V;

H igh A m plitude output.

100 V.

067-0502-01 PG 506 - Does not have chopped feature.

0502-01 - C om parator o u tput can be alternately chopped to a refer­ ence voltage.

SG 503 replaces 190,

190A. 190B SG 503 - A m p litu d e range

5 mV to 5.5 V p-p.

190B - A m plitude range 40 mV to 10 V p-p.

191

067-0532-01 SG 503 - Frequency range

250 kHz to 250 MHz.

0532-01 - Frequency range

65 MHz to 500 MHz

SG 504 replaces

067-0532-01 SG 504 - Frequency range

245 MHz to 1050 MHz.

0532-01 - Frequency range

65 MHz to 500 MHz.

067-0650-00

TG 501 replaces 180,

180A

181

184

2901

TG 501 - T rig g e r ou tpu tslaved to m arker o u tpu t from 5 sec th ro u g h 100 ns. One tim e-m ark can be generated at a time.

TG 501 • T rig g e r ou tpu tslaved to m arket o u tp u t from 5 sec th ro u g h 100 ns. One tim e-m ark can be generated at a time.

TG 501 - T rig g e r o u tp u tslaved to m arker o u tput from 5 sec th ro u g h 100 ns.

One tim e-m ark can be generated at a time.

180A - T rigger pulses 1, 10,

100 Hz; 1, 10, and

100 kHz. M ultiple tim e-m arks can be generated sim ultaneously.

181 - M ultiple tim e-m arks

184 - Separate trigg e r pulses of 1 and 0.1

sec; 10, 1, and 0.1

ms; 10 and 1 ps.

2901 - Separate trigg e r pulses, from 5 sec to 0.1 ps. M ultiple tim e-m arks can be generated sim ultaneously.

NOTE: All TM 500 generator outputs a r e short-proof. All TM 500 ptug-ln Instruments require TM 500-Serles Power Module.

REV B, JUN 1978

n ,.

MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION

TEKTRONIX’

PRODUCT

f

1

c o m m itte d to to c h n tc o t o x c o t/o o o o

070-039K-00

547

CHANGE:

CHANGE REFERENCE

DATE

Cl/376

3-15-76

DESCRIPTIO N

SCHliMATIC CORRECTIONS

The serial numbers (6740 & Ul’) given on Diagrams 5 and 9 are not correct. The diagrams with the above serial number are for instruments serial numbered 12840 and up.

These diagrams also apply to serial numbers between 6740 and 12839 except for the following:

1. Q86 and Q286 are not in these units, the circuitry at this point is like that shown for serial numbers 100 to 6739.

2. In the absence of Q86 and Q286, resistors R91, R97, R297, and R298 are not used.

3. R300 and D291 are not in instruments below serial number 12839.

In cases of doubt, go by the serial number ranges given in the

Electrical Parts List.

PAGE 1 OF 1